owner’s manual - seat · owner’s manual alhambra 7n5012720bg inglés 7n5012720bg (11.16)...

OWNER’S MANUAL

Alhambra

7N5012720BG

Ingl

és 7

N50

1272

0BG

(11

.16)

Alh

ambr

a I

nglé

s (

11.1

6)

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALHAMBRA range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this man-ual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive ad-vertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function-alities better. It does not replace the instruc-tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

Audiovisual material on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

ForewordThis Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully tofamiliarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance ofthe vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa-tion concerning accessories, modificationsand part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-boarddocumentation to the new owner, as itshould be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.

● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.

● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa-tion concerning the passenger's front air-bag ››› page 75, Important informationregarding the front passenger's airbag. »

Related videos

Park Assist ››› page 211 Blind Spot Detector (BSD) ››› page 222

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsThe essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 44Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 50How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Changing windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Correct position of the vehicle occupants . . . . 57Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 64Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Vehicle tool kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Changing a wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 87Tow-starting and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 89Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 106Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Three button unit in headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle key set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Central locking and locking system . . . . . . . . . 112

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Panoramic sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Adjusting the seats and head restraints . . . . . . 140Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 150Transporting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Ashtray and cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Auxiliary heater* (additional heater) . . . . . . . . 177Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 182Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Start assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Parking distance warning system* . . . . . . . . . . 208

3

Table of Contents

Park Assist system* (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 211Rear assist* (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Cruise control* (Cruise control system -CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross trafficalert (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Traffic signal detection (Sign Assist)* . . . . . . . . 227Tiredness detection (recommendation to takea break) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Dynamic Chassis control (DCC)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Accessories, replacement of parts and modifi-cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior . . . 250Caring for and cleaning the vehicle interior . . . 256Notes for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Selective catalytic reduction* (AdBlue) . . . . . . 265Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 268Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Technical features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

4

The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 102 ››› page 503 ››› page 39

4 ››› page 395 ››› page 126 ››› page 8

7 ››› page 118 ››› page 44

5

The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 402 ››› page 393 ››› page 42

4 ››› page 395 ››› page 416 ››› page 41

7 ››› page 418 ››› page 1579 ››› page 45

10 ››› page 44

6

The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 82 ››› page 163 ››› page 244 ››› page 25




17 ››› page 1618 ››› page 1319 ››› page 15

7

The essentials

How it works

Unlocking and locking

Doors

Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.

Fig. 2 In the driver door: central locking but-ton

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using thekey

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Locking the vehicle without activating theanti-theft system: Press the ››› Fig. 1 buttonfor a second time within 2 seconds.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the ››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-ing switch

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. Noneof the doors can be opened from the outside.The doors can be opened from the inside bypulling the inside door handle.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button.

››› in Introduction on page 112

››› page 110

››› page 8, ››› page 9

Locking or unlocking of driver door

Fig. 3 Driver door handle: hidden lock cylin-der.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked all other doors are locked. Unlockingmanually only opens the driver door. Pleasenote the instructions for the anti-theft alarm››› page 112.

● Unfold the key shaft ››› page 110.

● Insert the key shaft into the lower openingin the cover on the driver door handle from

8

The essentials

below ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the coverupwards.

● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinderto unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special Characteristics

● The anti-theft alarm will remain active whenvehicles are unlocked. However, it is not trig-gered ››› page 112.

● If the driver door is opened, the alarm willbe triggered.

● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key anddeactivates the anti-theft alarm system.


Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when thevehicle is locked manually using the keyshaft ››› page 112.

Locking the passenger side door andsliding doors manually

Fig. 4 At the front of the passenger slidingdoor: Emergency lock, hidden by a rubbercap.

Fig. 5 Emergency locking of the vehicle usingthe vehicle key

The passenger side door and the slidingdoors can be locked manually. The anti-theftalarm is not activated in this case.

● Open the door.

● Remove the rubber cap to the front of thedoor. The rubber cap is marked with a locksymbol ››› Fig. 4.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade››› page 110.

● Insert the key shaft horizontally into theopening and moved the coloured lever for-ward ››› Fig. 5.

● Replace the rubber cap and close the door.

● Check if the door is locked.

● Carry out the same operation on the otherdoors if necessary.

● Have the vehicle checked by a specialisedworkshop.


Note

The doors can be opened and unlocked indi-vidually from the inside by pulling the insidedoor handle. To open, pull the inner door re-lease lever twice ››› page 112.

9

The essentials

Opening the rear door

Fig. 6 Detailed view of the centre console:button for unlocking the rear lid

Fig. 7 Opening the boot hatch from the out-side

Before opening the rear lid, always removeany load on its luggage rack ››› in Introduc-tion on page 122.

Opening with the ignition key

● Press the button on the vehicle key un-til the rear lid opens automatically.

To open using the centre console control

● Press the button on the centre console››› Fig. 6. The rear lid will be automaticallyopened.

● The button is still operative when the igni-tion is switched off.

Opening the rear lid with the button

● Unlock the vehicle or open a door.

● Raise the rear lid using the button ››› Fig. 7(arrow).


Emergency unlocking the boot hatch

Fig. 8 From the luggage compartment: re-move the boot hatch cover.

Fig. 9 From the luggage compartment: Emer-gency unlocking of the booth hatch.

● Remove equipment to access the inside ofthe rear lid.

● Remove the square cover in the inner trimof the rear lid ››› Fig. 8.

10

The essentials

● Push the release lever ››› Fig. 9 A in the di-rection of the arrow to unlock the boot.

● Manually open the rear lid.


Bonnet

Fig. 10 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 11 Cam under the bonnet

● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever underthe dashboard ››› Fig. 10 1 .

● Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catchunder the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 11. The ar-rester hook under the bonnet is released.

● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

››› in Opening and closing the bonneton page 270

››› page 268

Electric windows*

Fig. 12 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows, and the electric child safety lockbuttons.

Buttons on the driver door

For the front electric windows.

For the sliding door electric windows.

To lock the sliding doors and their win-dows.

Opening and closing the windows

Opening: Push the button.

Closing: Pull the button.

To stop theone touchfunction:

Press or pull on the corresponding win-dow button. »

1

2

3

11

The essentials

Press the button for the electronicchild safety lock to deactivate the con-trols for the electric windows on thesliding doors and to lock these doors››› page 119. The indicator on the but-ton will light up.

››› in Electric windows: functions onpage 125

››› page 125

Panoramic sunroof*

Fig. 13 On the interior roof lining: use the ro-tary button for opening and closing

Fig. 14 On the interior roof lining: press thebutton and pull on it to raise and lower thesunroof.

To open the panoramic sliding sunroof, theswitch must be in the position 1 .

● Opening: Turn the switch to position››› Fig. 13 3 .

● Convenience position: Turn the switch toposition ››› Fig. 13 2 .

● Closing: Turn the switch to position››› Fig. 13 1 .

● To tilt open: Push the switch to position››› Fig. 14 4 . For an intermediate position,hold down the switch until you reach the de-sired position.

● Lowering: Pull the switch to position››› Fig. 14 5 . For an intermediate position,hold down the switch until you reach the de-sired position.

››› in Panoramic sliding sunroof: oper-ating on page 126

››› page 126

››› page 13

12

The essentials

Manually closing the panoramic sun-roof

Fig. 15 On the interior roof lining: removecover.

Fig. 16 Allen bolt to close the panoramic slid-ing sunroof

● Push open the cover in the direction indica-ted (arrow) ››› Fig. 15.

● Insert a standard 4 mm Allen key1) into theAllen bolt ››› Fig. 16 A .

● Rotate the Allen bolt to close the panoram-ic sliding sunroof.

● Re-install the lining.

● Bring the vehicle to a specialised workshopto check the panoramic sliding sunroof giventhat the emergency closing operation coulddamage general operation or the anti-trapfunction of the panoramic sliding sunroof.


Before driving

Manually adjusting the front seat

Fig. 17 Front left seat controls

The controls are mirrored for the front right-hand seat.

Mechanically and electrically adjusted con-trols can be combined on the seat.

Fig. 17 Function Necessary operations

1

Moving thehead restraintbackwards orforwards.

Pull the lever and movethe seat forwards. Thefront seat must be engag-ed when the lever is re-leased!

2Adjusting thelumbar sup-port*.

Turn the lever. »

1) Not included with the vehicle tool kit.13

The essentials

Fig. 17 Function Necessary operations

3Adjusting theseat backrestangle.

Turn the wheel.

4Adjusting theseat height.

Pull the lever up or pushdown (several times ifnecessary) from its homeposition.

››› in Manual adjustment of seats onpage 140

Electrical controls on the front seat*

Fig. 18 Adjusting the front left seat forwardsor backwards, the height, the seat angle andthe front seat backrest

Fig. 19 Adjusting the lumbar support

The controls are mirrored for the front right-hand seat.

Mechanically and electrically adjusted con-trols can be combined on the seat.

Fig. 18 Press the control in the direction of thearrow:

A

1Move the seat backwards or for-wards.

2 and3

Raise or lower the seat.

2 or 3 Adjust the seat angle.

BForwardsor back-wards.

Adjust the seat backrest angle.

Fig. 19 Press the corresponding area of theswitch:

1 or 2 Adjust the curve of the lumbar support.

3 or 4 Adjust the height of the lumbar support.

››› in Electric driver's seat adjustment*on page 141

14

The essentials

Adjustment of the head restraint

Fig. 20 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-straint.

Grab the sides of the head restraints withboth hands and push upwards to the desiredposition. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 button on the side.

››› in Removing and installing the headrestraints on page 144

››› page 57, ››› page 142

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 21 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

Fig. 22 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should-ers, adjust the height of the seats or theheight of the belt.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should bewell centred over it, never over the neck. Theseat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on theupper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across thepelvis, never across the stomach. The seatbelt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-vis.

››› page 61

››› page 64

15

The essentials

Seat belt tensioners

In the event of a head-on, lateral or rear colli-sion, the seat belts on the front seats and theouter seats of the second row will tighten au-tomatically.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Service and disposal of belt ten-sion devices on page 68

››› page 67

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 23 In the driver door: exterior mirror con-trols

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knobto the corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-tion, adjust the mirrors on the driverside (L, left) and the passenger side (R,right) to the direction desired.

Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.

Folding in mirrors.

››› in Exterior mirrors on page 139

››› page 139

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 24 Mechanical steering wheel adjust-ment

Adjust the steering wheel before your tripand only when the vehicle is stationary.

L/R

● Push the lever ››› Fig. 24 1 downwards.

● Adjust the steering wheel so that you canhold onto the steering wheel with both handson the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and3 o'clock positions and your arms slightlybent.

● Push the lever firmly upwards until it isflush to the steering column ››› in Adjust-ing the steering wheel position onpage 58.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-sition on page 58

16

The essentials

Airbags

Front Airbags

Fig. 25 Location and deployment area of thefront airbag for the driver

Fig. 26 Location and deployment area of thefront airbag for the front passenger

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the driver and the frontpassenger additional protection for the headand chest in the event of a severe frontal col-lision. Always remains as far away as possi-ble from the front airbag. This way, in theevent of an accident, the front airbags can

deploy fully when triggered, providing maxi-mum protection.

The front airbag for the driver is located inthe steering wheel ››› Fig. 25 and the airbagfor the front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 26. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the front airbags are triggered they fillthe zones marked in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 25. Therefore, objects should never beplaced or mounted in these areas ››› inFront airbags on page 71, Factory-fitted ac-cessories are outside the range of the frontairbag for the driver and the front passenger,e.g. the baseplate for the mobile phone sup-port.

The airbag covers open out of the steeringwheel or dash panel and remain attached tothem when the driver and front passengerfront airbags are triggered ››› Fig. 26.

››› in Front airbags on page 71

17

The essentials

Disconnecting the passenger front air-bag

Fig. 27 In the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side: Key switch for enabling anddisabling the front passenger front airbag.

Disabling the front passenger front airbag

● Switch the ignition off.

● Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade››› page 110.

● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 27. About 3/4 of the key should enter,as far as it will go.

● Then turn the key gently to the OFF posi-tion. Do not force it if you feel resistance, andmake sure you have inserted the key fully.

● Close the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

● The control lamp onthe dash panel will remain lit while the igni-tion is switched on ››› page 72.

››› in Manual disabling and enabling ofthe front passenger front airbag with thekey switch on page 73

››› page 73

Knee airbag

Fig. 28 On the driver side: location of theknee airbag

Fig. 29 On the driver side: radius of action ofthe knee airbag.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 28. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed red ››› Fig. 29 A is coveredby the knee airbag when it is triggered (de-ployment area). Therefore, objects shouldnever be placed or mounted in these areas.

››› in Knee airbag* on page 71

18

The essentials

Side airbags

Fig. 30 On the side of the front seat: locationof the side airbag

Fig. 31 Range of action of the front and rearside airbags. With 5 and 7 seats.

The side airbags are located in the outercushion of the driver and front passenger

seat backrests ››› Fig. 30. Depending on theequipment of the model, the outer seats ofthe second row of seats may also be fittedwith side airbags, located between the seatbackrests and the access area. Their positionis indicated by the word “AIRBAG”. The redarea (dotted line) ››› Fig. 31 shows the field ofaction of the side airbags.

In a side collision, the side airbags are trig-gered on the affected side of the vehicle,thus reducing the risk of injury to passengerson that side.

››› in Side airbags* on page 71

19

The essentials

Head-protection airbags

Fig. 32 On the left side of the vehicle: location and deploy-ment area of the curtain airbag

Fig. 33 Deployed head-protection airbags.

The curtain airbags are located on the driverand front passenger side above the doors››› Fig. 32. Airbags are identified by the word“AIRBAG”.

The area framed red ››› Fig. 32 is covered bythe curtain airbag when it is deployed (de-ployment area). Therefore, objects shouldnever be placed or mounted in these areas.

In a side collision, the curtain airbag on theside affected will be deployed. The airbagcovers the windows and pillars.

In a side collision, the head-protection air-bags for the front and outer rear seats reducethe risk of injury to the areas of the body fac-ing the impact.

››› in Curtain airbags* on page 72

20

The essentials

Child seats

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag

Fig. 34 Airbag stickers - version 1: on thefront passenger's sun visor and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 35 Airbag stickers - version 2: on thefront passenger's sun visor and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame.


››› page 75

21

The essentials

Different mounting systems

Fig. 36 On the rear seats: Possible installationsfor the child seat.

Always secure child seats properly and safelyin the vehicle according to the child seatmanufacturer's installation instructions.

Mounted child seats must rest correctly onthe vehicle's seat and must not move or rockmore than 2.5 cm (1 inch).

Child seats equipped for a Top Tether strapmust also be secured using the Top Tether re-taining strap in the vehicle ››› page 23. Onlysecure the retaining belt to the rings fitted forthis purpose and identified as Top Tether.Not all rings can be used with the Top Tethersystem. Always tighten the Top Tether retain-ing strap so that the child seat fits snuglyagainst the corresponding seat in the vehi-cle.

Specific mounting systems for each country

Europe: ISOFIX retaining rings and upperretaining strap ››› page 23 and››› page 23.

Three-point seat belt and upper retainingstrap ››› page 22.

The systems include the child restraint sys-tem mounting with an upper retaining strap(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points onthe seat.

Securing child seats with the seat belt

Securing the child seat using the seat belt

● Please read and observe the child seatmanufacturer's handling instructions.

A

B

● Positioning the child seat on the seat ac-cording to the manufacturer's instructions.

● The seat belt height adjustment must be ashigh as possible.

● Fasten the seat belt or pass it around thechild seat structure in the manner describedin the manufacturer's instructions.

● Make sure the seat belt is not twisted.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click.

● Ensure that the upper belt web lies tightlyon the child seat.

● Pull the belt (it must be no longer possibleto pull the lower belt webbing out).

22

The essentials

Removing the child seat

The seat belt must not be unfastened untilthe vehicle has come to a standstill.

● Press the red button on the buckle. Thelatch plate is released from the buckle.

● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged.

● Remove the child seat from the vehicle.

››› in Safety instructions on page 75

Fix the child seat with the lower an-chor points (ISOFIX)ISOFIX system

Fig. 37 Version 2: identification of the anchorpoints for the child seat on the vehicle seat

There are two retaining rings, the so-calledlower anchor points, on each rear seat or,where applicable, on the front passenger

seat. The retaining rings are attached to theseat frames.

Child seats with rigid mounting

● Observe the manufacturer's instructionswhen installing and removing the child seat.

● Press the child seat onto the retaining rings››› Fig. 37 in the direction of the arrow. Thechild seat must be safely engaged and clickaudibly into place.

● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is secure.

Child seat with adjustable retaining straps

● Observe the manufacturer's instructionswhen installing and removing the child seat.

● Place the child seat on the seat cushionand attach the retaining strap hooks to theretaining rings ››› Fig. 37.

● Tighten the straps evenly using the corre-sponding adjustment device. The child seatmust sit flush against the vehicle seat.

● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is secure.


Securing a child seat using a Top Teth-er retaining strap

Fig. 38 Upper retaining strap hooked in theluggage compartment

● Observe the manufacturer's instructionswhen installing and removing the child seat››› in Safety instructions on page 75.

● Raise the head restraint behind the childseat until it engages.

● Secure the child seat to the lower anchorpoints ››› page 23.

● Pull the upper child seat retaining strapback to the seat backrest of the rear seat, be-low or on both sides of the head restraint(depending on the child seat model).

● Hook the upper retaining strap to the corre-sponding retaining ring (for Top Tether) onthe back of the seat backrest on the rear seat››› Fig. 38. »

23

The essentials

● Push the head restraint down as far as itwill go. Ensure that it does not interfere withthe seatbelt from the upper attachment.

● Tighten the strap so that the top of thechild seat rests on the seat backrest.


Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 39 Vehicle key positions

Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Removethe key from the ignition and turn the wheel

until it locks. In vehicles with an automaticgearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,press the locking key on the selector leverand release it again.

● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the keyinto the ignition and turn it at the same timeas the steering wheel in the direction indica-ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turnthe steering wheel, it may be because it islocked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glowplugs reheating

● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2

position.

● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1

position.

● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheatwhen the ignition is switched on

Starting the engine

● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal allthe way down and move the gearbox lever in-to neutral.

● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedaland move the selector lever to the P positionor into N.

● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do notpress the accelerator.

Start-Stop System*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal,the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.The ignition remains switched on.

››› in Ignition lock on page 183

››› page 183

Lights and visibility

Light switch

Fig. 40 Dash panel: light control.

Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 40.

24

The essentials

When the igni-tion is switchedoff

When the ignitionis on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Lights off or daytimedriving light on.

The guidance lightsmay be switchedon.

Automatic dippedbeam control or day-time driving light on.

Side light on.

Dipped beam off; ifnecessary, the sidelight comes on for atime.

Dipped beam switch-ed on.

Front fog lights: move the switch to thefirst position, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch completelyfrom positions , or .

Switching off fog lights: Push the switch orturn it to the position.

››› in Switching lights on and off onpage 129

››› page 128

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 41 Turn signal and main beam lever

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal: Right-hand parkinglight (ignition switched off).

Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).

Main beam switched on: Control lamp lit up on the instrument panel.

Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever ispushed. Control lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

››› in Switching lights on and off onpage 129

››› page 129

1

2

3

4

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 42 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam

● In an emergency

● The vehicle has broken down

● When towing or being towed

››› in Hazard warning lights onpage 132

››› page 132

25

The essentials

Interior lights

Button/Position: Function

Switches interior lights off.

Switches interior lights on.

Switches door contact control on (centralposition).The interior lights come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is unlocked, a door isopened or the key is removed from the igni-tion.The lights go off a few seconds after all thedoors are closed, the vehicle is locked orthe ignition is switched on.

Turning the reading light on and off

Ambient light: in the door panel, it changescolour (white or red) depending on the driv-ing mode.

››› page 134

Windscreen wipers and window wiperblade

Fig. 43 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper

Move the lever to the required position

0 Windscreen wiper off.

1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.Using the control ››› Fig. 43 A adjustthe interval (vehicles without rain sen-sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Brief wipe - short wipe. Hold the leverdown for more time to increase the wipefrequency.

5 Automatic wipe for cleaning wind-screens with the lever up.

Move the lever to the required position

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwipes the window at 6-second intervals.

7 Automatic wipe for cleaning rear win-dows with the lever pressed.

››› in Window wiper lever on page 135

››› page 135

››› page 54

SEAT information system

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possibleto read the different functions of the displayby scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with a multifunction steeringwheel, there are no buttons on the wind-screen wiper lever. The multifunction displaycan only be controlled from the buttons onthe steering wheel.

The number of menus displayed on the in-strument panel will vary according to the ve-hicle electronics and equipment.

26

The essentials

A specialised workshop will be able to pro-gramme or modify additional functions, ac-cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-ommends taking your car in for technicalservice.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, itwill not be possible to read the menus. Todisplay the menus, confirm the warning bypressing OK .

Summary of the menu structure

■ Multifunction display (MFD) ››› page 29■ Travelling time■ Current fuel consumption■ Average fuel consumption■ Operating range■ Distance covered■ Average speed■ Digital display of speed■ Oil temperature digital display■ Speed warning

■ Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navi-gation system

■ Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system■ Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-

let Navigation system■ Auxiliary heating ››› page 177

■ Activation■ Programme On / Off■ Disconnection

■ Timer 1-3■ Day■ Time■ Minute■ Activate

■ Duration■ Operating mode■ Heat■ Ventilation

■ Day■ Default setting

■ Vehicle condition ››› page 28■ Configuration ››› page 30■ Multifunction display data■ Travelling time■ Current fuel consumption■ Average fuel consumption■ Distance covered■ Operating range■ Average speed■ Digital display of speed■ Speed warning

■ Compass■ Convenience ››› page 31■ Central locking system (Central locking)■ Automatic lock (Auto. lock) On / Off

■ Automatic unlocking (Auto. unlock.)On / Off

■ Unlocking doors (Door unlock.: All,One door, Vehicle side, Individual)

■ Back■ Electric windows■ Off■ All■ Driver■ Back

■ Mirror angle (Mirror angle) On / Off■ Adjusting mirrors (Adjust. mirrors)■ Individual■ Synchronised■ Back

■ Factory settings (Factory settings)■ Back

■ Lights & visibility ››› page 31■ Coming Home■ Leaving Home■ Footwell light■ Convenience turn signals On / Off■ Default setting■ Tourist light On / Off

■ Time■ Winter tyres■ Language■ Units■ Second speed display On / Off »

27

The essentials

■ Autohold■ Service■ Info■ Reset

■ Default setting

Using the menus on the instrumentpanel

Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: buttons toaccess the instrument panel menus

Fig. 45 Multifunction steering wheel: buttonsto access the instrument panel menus

Enabling the main menu

● Switch the ignition on.

● If a message or vehicle symbol is dis-played, press OK (››› Fig. 44 A or ››› Fig. 45).

● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-er: the main menu list is displayed.

● If managed from the multifunction steeringwheel: the main menu list is not displayed.To scroll through the options of the mainmenu, press the arrow keys or re-peatedly ››› page 28.

Select a submenu

● Press rocker switch ››› Fig. 44 B upwardsor downwards, or, on the multifunction steer-ing wheel, turn the thumbwheel until youreach the required menu option.

● The selected option is displayed betweentwo horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle isdisplayed on the right .

● To select the submenu, press OK .

Making changes according to the menu

● Use the rocker switch on the windscreenwiper lever or the thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheel to make the requiredmodifications. To scroll through numbersmore quickly, hold the rocker switch down orturn the thumbwheel more quickly (fast for-ward or reverse).

● Mark or confirm the selected option withOK .

Main menu

MFD

Information and possible configura-tions of the multifunction display(MFD).››› page 29

Audio

If the radio is on, the station is dis-played.In CD mode, the current CD is played.››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet naviga-tion system

28

The essentials

Navigation

When the navigation to destination ison, change of direction arrows and aproximity bar are displayed. Thesesymbols are similar to those used inthe navigation system.If navigation to destination is not on,the direction of travel (compass) andthe name of the street on which youare driving are displayed.››› Booklet Navigation system

Telephone

Information and possible configura-tions of the mobile phone preinstalla-tion.››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-tion system

Parking heat-ing

Information and configurations of theparking heating:switching the parking heating on oroff. Select the operating mode and du-ration.››› page 177

Vehicle status

Current warning or information texts.This option only appears when one ofthe following texts is available. Thenumber of available messages is dis-played. Example 1/1 or 2/2.››› page 100

Configuration

Different setting options, for example,the Convenience, Lighting & Visibilitymenus, and the time, speed warningwith winter tyres, language, units ofmeasurement, or “Display off”.››› page 30

MFD (multifunction display) menu

The multifunction display (MFD) has two au-tomatic memories: 1 - Partial memory and 2 -Total memory. The selected memory will beshown in the upper right-hand corner of thedisplay.

With the ignition switched on, and memory 1or 2 displayed, briefly press OK to changefrom one memory to another

1Trip memo-ry (for a sin-gle jour-ney).

The memory stores the values for thejourney and the consumption from themoment the ignition is switched on untilit is switched off again.If the journey is broken for more than 2hours, the memory is automaticallyerased. If the journey is continued in lessthan 2 hours after the ignition is switch-ed off, the new data is added to the dataalready stored in the memory.

2Total mem-ory (for alljourneys).

The memory records the values for a spe-cific number of partial trips, up to a totalof 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hoursand 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km (or miles)for 9999 km (or miles), depending on themodel of instrument panel. On reachingeither of these limits, the memory is au-tomatically erased and starts to countfrom 0 again.

Possible displays

Travelling timeThis indicates the hours (h) and mi-nutes (min) since the ignition wasswitched on.

Current fuelconsumption

The current fuel consumption whiledriving is displayed in l/100 km (ormiles per gallon, mpg); when the en-gine is running but the vehicle is notmoving, in l/h (or gallons per hour).

Average fuelconsumption

When the ignition is switched on, theaverage consumption (in l/100 km orin mpg) is displayed after the vehiclehas moved approximately 100 metres(328 feet). Otherwise horizontal linesare displayed. The value shown is up-dated approximately every 5 seconds.

Operatingrange

Approximate distance in km (or miles)that can still be travelled with the fuelremaining in the tank, assuming thesame style of driving is maintained.This is calculated using the currentfuel consumption.

Distance cov-ered

Distance travelled, after ignition isswitched on, in km (or miles).

Average speed

After the ignition is switched on, theaverage speed will be shown after adistance of approximately 100 metres(328 feet) has been travelled. Other-wise horizontal lines are displayed.The value shown is updated approxi-mately every 5 seconds.

Digital displayof speed

Current speed displayed digitally.

Oil tempera-ture digitaldisplay

Updated engine oil temperature digi-tal display »

29

The essentials

Speed warn-ing at --- km/h

If the stored speed is exceeded (be-tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 18 -155 mph), an audible warning is giventogether with a visual warning.

Changing between display modes

● In vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: press the lever.

● Vehicles with a multifunction steeringwheel: press or .

Storing a speed for the speed warning

● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h.

● Press OK to store the current speed andswitch off the warning.

● In addition, set the required speed bypressing the rocker switch on the windscreenwiper lever or buttons on the multifunc-tion steering wheel for 5 seconds. Next,press OK again or wait a few seconds. Thespeed is stored and the warning activated.

● To switch off, press OK . The stored speed isdeleted.

Manually erasing memory 1 or 2

● Select the memory that you wish to erase.

● Hold down OK for approximately 2 sec-onds.

Personalising the displays

It is possible to select which of the displaysin the multifunction display you wish to seeon the instrument panel in the settingsmenu. The units of measurement can also bemodified ››› page 30.

Configuration Menu

Multifunc-tion displaydata

Configuration of the multifunction dis-play data that you wish to see on the in-strument panel display ››› page 29.

Compass

Changing the magnetic region and cali-bration of the compass. To calibrate thecompass, please follow the instructionsgiven on the instrument panel display.

ConvenienceChanging vehicle convenience functions››› page 31.

Lights & vis-ibility

Configuration of vehicle lighting››› page 31.

Time

Changing the hours and minutes of theinstrument panel clock and the naviga-tion system. The time can be set hereand the choice can be made betweenthe 24-hour and 12-hour display. The Sin the upper part of the display indicatesthat the clock is set to summer time.

Winter tyres

Changing the visual and audible speedwarnings. This function should only beused when the vehicle is fitted with win-ter tyres, which are not designed fortravel at high speeds.

LanguageChanging the language of the displaytexts and the navigation system.

UnitsChanging the units of measurement forthe temperature, consumption and dis-tance.

Secondspeed

Switching second speed display on andoff.

ServiceCheck the service notifications or resetthe service intervals to zero.

Factory set-tings

Some functions of the Configurationmenu will be reset to the factory value.

Back The main menu is displayed again.

30

The essentials

Submenu Convenience

Central lock-ing››› page 112

Auto. lock (Auto Lock): automaticlocking of all doors and boot whenreaching a speed of approximately15 km/h (10 mph). In order to unlockthe vehicle when it is stopped, push thecentral locking button, pull the doorhandle or remove the key from the igni-tion lock if the Auto unlock functionis enabled.

Auto unlock (Auto Lock): Unlockingall doors and the boot by removing theignition lock key.

Door unlock: when unlocking the ve-hicle with the key, the following doorswill unlock based on the setting:– All: all of the doors are unlocked.– One door: when unlocking the vehi-cle with the key, only the driver's doorunlocks. Pressing the button againunlocks all doors and the boot.– Vehicle side: the doors on thedriver's side unlock.On vehicles fitted with the KeylessAccess ››› page 112 system, when usingthe corresponding handle, all doors un-lock on the side of the vehicle where thekey is.

Handlingwindows

Adjusting the electric windows: this en-ables the windows to be opened orclosed when the vehicle is unlocked orlocked respectively. The open functioncan only be activated from the driverdoor ››› page 125.

Rear visionmirror ad-justment

Tilts passenger mirror downwards whenreverse gear is engaged. This enablesthe driver to see the edge of the pave-ment, for example ››› page 137.

Exterior mir-ror adjust.

If synchronised adjustment is selec-ted, when the driver side exterior mirroris adjusted, the passenger exterior mir-ror is also moved.

Factory set-tings

Some functions of the Conveniencesubmenu will be reset to the factory val-ue.

BackThe Configuration menu is dis-played again.

Lights & visibility submenu

ComingHome

This permits the adjustment of the timethe headlamps stay on after locking orunlocking the vehicle, the function canalso be connected or disconnected here››› page 131.

LeavingHome

Footwelllight

This permits the adjustment of thebrightness of the footwell lighting whenthe doors are open, the function can al-so be connected or disconnected here

Convenienceturn signals

Switching convenience turn signals onand off When the convenience turn sig-nals are connected,, these flash at leastthree times when the turn signal isswitched on ››› page 128.

Factory set-tings

All the configurations in the submenuLights & visibility are reset tothe predefined factory values.

Tourist light

Headlamp adjustment for countries inwhich vehicles are driven on the otherside of the road. When the mark is acti-vated, the headlamps of a left-handdrive vehicle are adjusted for driving onthe left. This function must only be usedfor a short period.

BackThe Configuration menu is dis-played again.

Personal convenience settings

When two people use a vehicle, SEAT recom-mends that each person always uses “their”own remote control key. When the ignition isswitched off, or the vehicle is locked, the per-sonal convenience settings are stored andautomatically allocated to the vehicle key››› page 26.

The values of the personalised conveniencesettings of the following menu options are al-located to the vehicle key:

■ Parking heating menu■ Configuration Menu■ Time■ Language■ Units

■ Convenience settings menu »31

The essentials

■ Door unlock (individual opening, AutoLock)

■ Convenience handling of windows■ Rear vision mirror adjustment

■ Lights & visibility settingsmenu■ Coming home and leaving home■ Footwell light■ Convenience turn signals

The stored settings are automatically activa-ted, at the latest when the ignition is switch-ed on. Please refer to the information andtips relating to the seat memory››› page 144.

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system(CCS)*

Fig. 46 On the left of the steering column:switches and controls for operating the CCS

● Switching on the CCS: move the lever to 1 ››› Fig. 46. The system switches on but it

does not control the speed as no speed hasbeen programmed.

● Activating the CCS: press the A

››› Fig. 46 button. It memorises and main-tains the current speed.

● Temporarily switching off the CCS: movethe lever to 2 ››› Fig. 46 and release itor press the brake or clutch pedal. The cruisecontrol system is switched off temporarily.

● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to 1 ››› Fig. 46 and release it. The memo-rised speed is saved and controlled again.

● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: briefly move the lever toward +

to increase the speed by 10 km/h intervals.By holding it down, the vehicle will accelerateto the desired speed. Release the button tostore the current speed.

● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: briefly move the lever toward –

to decrease the speed by 10 km/h intervals.By holding it down the vehicle will slowdown, ceasing to accelerate but not applyingthe brakes. Release the button to store thecurrent speed.

● Switching off the CCS: move the lever to po-sition 2 ››› Fig. 46. The system is discon-nected and the memorised speed is deleted.

››› in Cruise control system operationon page 219

››› page 219

Warning lamps

Control and warning lamps

Red warning lamps

Do not continue driving!The electronic parking brake ison, the brake fluid level is toolow or the brake system is faulty.

››› page 187

32

The essentials

Do not continue driving!Fault in the engine cooling sys-tem.

››› page 274

Do not continue driving!Engine oil pressure too low.

››› page 271

Do not continue driving!At least one of the vehicles doorsis open, or is not correctlyclosed.

››› page 119

Do not continue driving!The rear lid is open or is incor-rectly closed.

››› page 122

Do not continue driving!Fault in the steering.

››› page 181

Engine cannot be started again!"AdBlue" level too low.

››› page 265

Driver or passenger has not fas-tened seat belt.

››› page 64

Use the foot brake!

Change››› page 192Brake››› page 187

Faulty generator.››› page 280

Yellow warning lamps

Front brake pads worn.

››› page 187

lights up: ESC malfunction or off.

flashes: ESC working.

ASR manually deactivated.

ABS faulty or does not work.

Electronic parking brake faulty.››› page 187

Rear fog light switched on.››› page 128

lights up: Driving light totally orpartially faulty.

››› page 91

flashes: Fault in the adaptivelight system.

››› page 128

lights up or flashes: fault in theemission control system.

››› page 200

lights up: pre-heating of dieselengine.

flashes: fault in the diesel en-gine management.

fault in the petrol engine man-agement.

Diesel particulate filter blocked

Fault in the steering system.››› page 181

Tyre pressure too low.

››› page 284

Fault in the tyre pressure gauge.››› page 231

Level of windscreen washer fluidtoo low.

››› page 135

Fuel tank almost empty.››› page 261

flashes: engine oil sensor faulty. ››› page

271lights up: insufficient engine oil.

Fault in airbag system and seatbelt tensioners.

››› page 72

Front passenger front airbag isdisabled ( ).

››› page 72

Top up "AdBlue", or there is afault in the "AdBlue" system.

››› page 265

Fuel tank not closed correctly.››› page 261

Lane Assist is switched on, butnot active.

››› page 220

Other warning lamps

Left or right turn signal.

››› page 128

Hazard warning lights on.››› page 82 »

33

The essentials

Use the foot brake!

Change››› page 192Brake››› page 187

Cruise control operating.››› page 219

Lane Assist is switched on andactive.

››› page 220

Main beam on or flasher on.››› page 128

Headlight adjustment (Light As-sist) on.

Electronic immobiliser active.››› page 182

Service interval display››› page 103

Mobile telephone is connectedvia Bluetooth to the original tel-ephone device.

››› Book-let Radioor››› Book-let Navi-gationsystem

Mobile telephone battery chargemeter. Available only for pre-in-stalled factory-fitted devices.

Freezing warning. The outsidetemperature is lower than +4°C(+39°F).

››› page 102

››› in Control and warning lamps onpage 105

››› page 105

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 47 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed man-ual gearbox

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 47.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.

● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itupwards, move it to the left as far as it will goand then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 47R .

● Release the clutch.

››› in Manual gear change on page 193

››› page 193

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 48 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-sitions.

Parking lock

Reverse gear

P

R34

The essentials

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) togo down a gear.

››› in Automatic gearbox* on page 194

››› page 193

››› page 35

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 49 Remove the lining from the area ofthe gear indication

N

D/S

+/–

Fig. 50 Manual release of gear selector lever

If the vehicle power supply should ever fail(e.g. discharged battery) and the vehicle hasto be pushed or towed, the selector levermust first be moved to position N using themanual release mechanism.

The emergency release mechanism is locatedunderneath the gearbox cover panel to theright-hand side. To release the gear selectorlever mechanism, a suitable tool is required,(e.g. a screwdriver).

Preparations

● Apply the parking brake. If the brake can-not be activated, the vehicle must be alterna-tively secured so that it cannot move.


To remove the gearbox cover panel

● Pull the cover up around the dust guard onthe gear selector lever ››› Fig. 49.

● Take the cover off by passing it over thegear selector lever ››› .

Manual release of the selector lever

● Press the release lever ››› Fig. 50 in the di-rection of the arrow and hold it in this posi-tion.

● Press the lock button ››› Fig. 49 1 on thegear selector lever knob and place the gearselector lever in the N position.

WARNING

Never move the gear selector lever from theposition P while the electronic parking brakeis deactivated. Otherwise, the vehicle mayaccidentally move off on hills or steep slopescausing serious accidents.

CAUTION

If the vehicle is moved on its wheels with theengine stopped and the selector lever in posi-tion N for a prolonged period of time and athigh speed, for example for towing, then theautomatic gearbox will be damaged.

35

The essentials

Air conditioning

How does the air conditioning work?

Fig. 51 Detailed view of the centre console: Electronic manual air conditioningcontrols

Fig. 52 Detailed view of the centre console: Climatronic controls

Control button Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning ››› Fig. 51; Climatronic ››› Fig. 52.

1 TemperatureElectronic manual air conditioning: rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly. In the MAX position, the cooling output will be set tomaximum. The air recirculation mode and the cooling system are automatically switched on.Climatronic: the left and right sides can be adjusted separately. Rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly.

36

The essentials


2 Fan

Electronic manual air conditioning: Setting 0: air fan and air conditioning system (manual) switched off, setting 4: maximum setting of fan.Climatronic: the power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Rotate the control to manually adjust the fan.

3 Air distributionElectronic manual air conditioning: rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.

Climatronic: the airflow will be automatically adjusted to a comfortable flow. It can also be switched on manually with the buttons 3 .

4 Climatronic: display of the selected interior temperature for the left and right sides.

Electronic manual air conditioning: defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. In this position, air recirculation is automatically switch-ed off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. to dry the air, the cooling system willautomatically switch on.

Climatronic: defrost function. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off.To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Electronic manual air conditioning: air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Climatronic: upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a 10 minutes.

Electronic manual air conditioning: air recirculation ››› page 176.

Climatronic: manual and automatic air recirculation ››› page 176.

Instant auxiliary heating on/off button ››› page 177.

Buttons for the seat heating ››› page 144.

Climatronic: depending on the vehicle equipment there may be a button for the windscreen heating on the air conditioner control panel. The wind-screen heating only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a few minutes. »

37

The essentials


Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Climatronic: accept the temperature selection for the driver and front passenger sides. When the SYNC button light is lit, the temperature settings onthe driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or adjust the temperature control for the passenger side in order to set a differenttemperature. No lamp lights up on the button.

Climatronic: automatic temperature, fan, and air distribution control. Press the button to switch on the function. The control lamp lights up on theAUTO button.

Climatronic: press the REAR button to adjust the air conditioner for the rear seats from the front seats. A lamp is lit on the REAR button if the feature isactivated. The settings for the rear seats will be displayed. Press the button again to switch the function off or do not touch any other button foraround 10 seconds.

Climatronic: Press the REST button to use the heat that the engine produces. When the engine is still warm but the ignition switched off, the heatgiven off by the engine can be used to keep the vehicle interior warm. The REST button will light up when the function is switched on. The function willswitch off after around 30 minutes and if the battery level is low.

a)

Switch off.Electronic manual air conditioning: turn the fan switch to setting 0.Climatronic: press the OFF button or manually set the fan to 0. When the device is switched off the OFF button will light up.

a) Depending on the version of the model.


››› page 173

38

The essentials

Fluid Level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

70 litres. 8 litre reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

Versions without head-light washer system

3.5 litres

Versions with headlightwasher system

6 litres

Fuel

Fig. 53 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

Before refuelling, always turn off the engine,the ignition, mobile telephones, auxiliaryheating and keep them off during refuelling.

Opening the fuel tank cap

● The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle onthe right.

● Press the rear of the tank flap to open it.

● Unscrew the tank cap anticlockwise and in-sert it in the hole in the tank flap hinge››› Fig. 235.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Screw on the tank cap clockwise until it youhear it click into position.

● Press the tank flap until you hear it click in-to place. The tank flap must be flush with thebody contour.

››› page 261

››› page 263

Oil

Fig. 54 Engine oil dipstick.

Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-ted in the engine compartment››› page 271.

The oil should leave a mark between zonesA and C . It should never exceed zone A .

● Zone A : Do not add oil. »39

The essentials

● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.

● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .

Topping up engine oil

● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.

● Add oil slowly.

● At the same time, check the level to ensureyou do not add too much.

● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Motor oil specifications

Petrol engines

With LongLife service VW 504 00

Without LongLife serviceVW 504 00,VW 502 00

Diesel engines

With LongLife service VW 507 00

Without LongLife service VW 507 00

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

››› in Topping up engine oil onpage 274

››› page 271

Coolant

Fig. 56 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 271.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolantwhen the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additive G13(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives thenecessary frost protection down to -25°C

(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts ofthe engine cooling system against corrosion.It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percentageof additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theG13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection ››› in Coolant specifi-cations on page 276. The mixture of G13with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) orG11 (green-blue) engine coolants will signifi-cantly reduce anti-corrosion protection andshould therefore be avoided ››› in Coolantspecifications on page 276.

››› in Coolant specifications onpage 276

››› page 274

40

The essentials

Brake fluid

Fig. 57 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 271.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-cal Service.

››› in Checking the brake fluid level onpage 279

››› page 278

Windscreen washer

Fig. 58 In the engine compartment: wind-screen washer reservoir top.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment ››› page 271.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› in Checking and topping up thewindscreen washer reservoir onpage 280

››› page 280

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment ››› page 271. It does not require

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-spection Service.

››› in Checking the electrolyte level ofthe vehicle battery on page 282

››› page 280

41

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 59 On the driver-side dash panel: fusebox cover

Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Identifying fuses by colours

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

To open the dash panel fuse box

● To remove the cover, move the activationlever in the lower part to the right ››› Fig. 59.

● For right-hand drive vehicles, move the lev-er to the left.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

● Open the bonnet ››› page 268.

● Move the attachment tabs forwards, in thedirection indicated by the arrow to releasethe fuse box cover ››› Fig. 60.

● Then lift the cover out.

● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the attachment tabs back, in the oppo-site direction indicated by the arrow untilthey click audibly into place.

In is possible that there are more fuses be-hind a cover in the lower left-hand side of theluggage compartment.

››› page 90

42

The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 61 Image of a blown fuse

Fig. 62 Removing or fitting a fuse

Preparation

● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-trical equipment.

● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 42

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 61.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse

● If necessary, remove the plastic pincersfrom the fuse box cover.

● Small fuses: lock the pincer in from above››› Fig. 62 A.

● Larger fuses: move the pincer sidewaysover the fuse ››› Fig. 62 B.

● Remove the relevant fuse.

● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights/day-time running lights (DRL)

H15 (double element)

Side lights W5W

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

AFS bi-xenon main head-light

Type

Daytime running lights (DRL) P21W SLL

Side lights W5W

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Dipped beam / Main beamXenon bulb. Visit anauthorised workshopfor replacement.

Front fog light Type

Fog lights HB4

LED rear lights Type

Side/brake light LED

Turn signal WY21W

Reverse lights W16W

43

The essentials

Action in the event of a punc-ture

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surfaceand in a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.

● Apply the handbrake.

● Switch on the hazard warning lights.

● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.

● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector leverto position P.

● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.

● Keep the vehicle tool kit ready*››› page 82.

● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING

● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.

● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the car witha stone or similar to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-ture kit

Fig. 63 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under thefloor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre

● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 63 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.

● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 63 10 .

● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 63 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.

● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 63 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,fill the tyre with the contents of the sealantbottle.

● Remove the bottle from the valve.

● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 63 1 .

Inflating the tyre

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 63 5 into the tyre valve.

● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 63 7 .

● Start the engine and leave it running.

● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 63 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 171.

● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFFswitch ››› Fig. 63 8 .

● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8minutes.

● Disconnect the air compressor.

● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.

44

The essentials

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.

● Repeat the inflation process.

● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).

● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 86.

››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* onpage 85

››› page 85

Changing a wheel

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 64 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

Adapter for anti-theft bolt

Towing eye, removable

Box spanner for wheel bolts

Crank handle for jack

Jack

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in thehandle

Hook for pulling off wheel trims or wheelbolt caps.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

››› in Location on page 82

››› page 82

Full hubcaps*

Fig. 65 Removing the full hubcap

Removing the full hubcap

● Take the wheel brace and the wire hookfrom the vehicle tool kit ››› page 82.

● Hook the wire through one of the grooveson the hubcap.

● Insert the wheel brace onto the wire hook››› Fig. 65 and pull the hub cap in the direc-tion shown by the arrow. »

45

The essentials

Fitting hubcaps

Before mounting the full trim, the anti-theftwheel lock must be threaded into position››› Fig. 68 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not bepossible to mount the full hubcap.

● Press the trim against the wheel so that thespace for the valve fits over the tyre valve››› Fig. 68 1 . Make sure that the hubcap iscorrectly fitted all the way around the wheel.

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 66 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

Removal

● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over thecap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 66.

● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a spe-cial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lockingbolts and is not for use with standard wheelbolts.

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 67 Changing a wheel: Slacken the wheelbolts.

Fig. 68 Changing a wheel: tyre valve 1 andposition of anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or

3 .

Only use the tool supplied with the vehicle toloosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may beable to loosen it by pushing down on the endof the wheel brace carefully with your foot.Hold on to the vehicle for support and takecare not to slip.

Loosening wheel bolts

● Fit the wheel brace as far as it will go overthe wheel bolt ››› Fig. 67.

● Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotatethe bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise››› .

46

The essentials

Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts

For wheels with full trim, the anti-theft wheellock must be threaded into position ››› Fig. 68

2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be possible tomount the entire hubcap.

● Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel boltsout of the vehicle tool kit.

● Insert the adapter onto the anti-theft wheelbolt.

● Fit the wheel brace onto the adapter as faras possible.

● Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotatethe bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise››› .

Important information about wheel bolts

The wheel rims and bolts have been de-signed to be fitted to factory options. If differ-ent rims are fitted, the correct wheel boltswith the right length and correctly shapedbolt heads must be used. This ensures thatwheels are fitted securely and that the brakesystem functions correctly.

In some circumstances, wheel bolts from thesame model vehicle should not be used.

Wheel bolt tightening torque

The prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm.Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

checked as soon as possible with a reliabletorque wrench.

If wheel bolts are rusty and it is difficult totighten them, the threads should be replacedand cleaned before checking the tighteningtorque.

Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or thewheel hub threads. Although they have beentightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not fitted correctly theycould be released while driving leading toloss of vehicle control and serious damage.

● Only use wheel bolts which correspond tothe wheel rims in question.

● Never use different wheel bolts.

● The bolts and threads should be clean, freeof oil and grease and easy to thread.

● To loosen and tighten the wheel bolts, al-ways use the wheel brace supplied with thevehicle.

● Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

● Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or thewheel hub threads. Although they have beentightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

● Never loosen the bolted joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.

● If the wheel bolts are not tightened to thecorrect torque, they may come loose whiledriving, and the bolts and rims may comeout. If the tightening torque is too high, thewheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Raising the vehicle with the jack

Fig. 69 Jack position points

Fig. 70 Jack mounted on the left rear part ofthe vehicle »

47

The essentials

The jack may be applied only at the jackingpoints shown (marks on chassis) ››› Fig. 69.The mark indicates the jacking points belowthe vehicle. The jacking points are on the ribsbehind the front edges ››› Fig. 70. Always therelevant jacking point for the wheel to bechanged ››› .

Raise the vehicle using only the designatedjacking points.

For your own safety and that of other passen-gers, the following points should be ob-served in the order given:

Select a suitable flat and firm surface forraising the vehicle.

Switch off the engine, engage a gear(manual gearbox) or place the selectorlever in position P ››› page 192 andturn on the electronic parking brake››› page 187.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite thewheel being changed with folding wheelchocks* or other suitable objects.

When towing a trailer: unhook the trailerfrom the towing vehicle and park it cor-rectly.

Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel tobe changed ››› page 46.

Look below the vehicle for the jackingpoint ››› Fig. 69 closest to the tyre whichhas to be changed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Raise the jack with the handle until itcan be inserted below the jacking point.

Ensure that the foot of the jack is firmlyon the ground and that it is placed im-mediately below the lifting point on thevehicle ››› Fig. 70.

Straighten the jack and continue raisingit using the handle until the claw holdsthe vertical reinforcement beneath thevehicle ››› Fig. 70.

Raise the vehicle until the wheel is clearof the ground.

WARNING

If the vehicle is not correctly raised, it couldfall off the jack causing serious injury. Pleaseobserve the following rules to minimise therisk of injury:

● You should only use a jack approved bySEAT for your vehicle. Other jacks, even thoseapproved for other SEAT models, might slipout of place.

● The ground should be firm and flat. If theground is sloped or soft then the vehiclecould slip and fall off the jack. If necessary,support the jack on a wide solid base.

● If the ground is slippery, such as tiles,place a non-slip surface (a floor mat, for in-stance) beneath the jack to avoid slipping.

● Only fit the jack at the prescribed jackingpoints. The claw of the jack should grip thereinforcement nerve on the underbody››› Fig. 70.

7.

8.

9.

10.

● You should never place a body limb such asan arm or leg under a raised vehicle that issolely supported by the jack.

● If you have to work underneath the vehicle,you must use suitable stands additionally tosupport the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-dent!.

● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.

● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose from thejack due to the engine vibrations.

Removing and fitting the wheel

Fig. 71 Changing a wheel: loosen wheel boltswith the socket at the end of the wheel brace

Removing the wheel

● Slacken the wheel bolts ››› page 46.

● Raise the vehicle ››› page 47.

48

The essentials

● Using the hexagonal socket in the wheelbrace ››› Fig. 71, unscrew the slackenedwheel bolts and place them on a clean sur-face.

● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

Check the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 49.

● Fit the wheel.

● Screw on the anti-theft locking bolt withthe adapter in position ››› Fig. 68 2 or 3

clockwise and tighten gently.

● Replace the other wheel bolts and tightenslightly using the hexagonal socket on theend of the wheel brace.

● Lower the car with the jack.

● Tighten all of the wheel bolts clockwise››› . Tighten the bolts in diagonal pairs (notin a circle).

● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on››› page 45.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not treated suitably ornot tightened to the correct torque then thiscould lead to loss of vehicle control and to aserious accident.

● All the wheel bolts and hub threads shouldbe clean and free of oil and grease. The wheel

bolts should be easily tightened to the cor-rect torque.

● The hexagonal socket in the wheel braceshould be used for turning wheel bolts only.Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheelbolts.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when rotatingin only one direction. An arrow on the tyresidewall indicates the direction of rotation ontyres with directional tread ››› page 291.Always observe the indicated direction of ro-tation in order to guarantee optimum gripand help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noiseand wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direc-tion of rotation, drive with extreme caution,as the tyre is no longer being used correctly.This is of particular importance when theroad surface is wet. Change the tyre as soonas possible or remount it with the correct di-rection of rotation.

Subsequent work

● On alloy wheels: replace the wheel boltcaps.

● On plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap.

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion ››› page 82.

● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.

● If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre monitoringsystem, this should be “reprogrammed” ifnecessary whenever a tyre is changed››› page 231.

● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench ››› page 47. Meanwhile, drivecarefully.

Snow chains

Use

When using snow chains, applicable locallegislation and maximum permitted speedlimits must be observed.

In winter weather, snow chains not only helpto improve grip but also improve the brakingcapacity.

Snow chains must only be mounted on thefront wheels, even on all-wheel drive vehi-cles, and only with the tyre and rim combina-tions listed below:

Tyre size Wheel rim

205/60 R16 6 1/2 J x 16 ET 33 »49

The essentials

SEAT recommends you ask a technical serv-ice for further information on wheel, tyre andchain sizes.

Wherever possible use fine-link chains meas-uring less than 15 mm (37/64 inch) includ-ing the lock.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings be-fore fitting snow chains ››› . The wheel boltsshould be covered with caps for safety rea-sons. These are available from technical serv-ices.

WARNING

The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.

● Always the appropriate snow chains.

● Observe the fitting instructions provided bythe snow chain manufacturer.

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION

● Remove the snow chains to drive on roadswithout snow. Otherwise they will impairhandling, damage the tyres and wear out veryquickly.

● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched ifthe chains come into direct contact withthem. SEAT recommends the use of coveredsnow chains.

Note

Snow chains are available in different sizesaccording to the vehicle type.

Emergency towing of the vehi-cle

Towing

Fig. 72 On the right-hand side of the frontbumper: Screw in the towline anchorage.

Fig. 73 On the rear bumper, to the right handside: Towline anchorage in position

Towline anchorages

Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-rages.

They are located with the vehicle's tools››› page 82.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection ››› Fig. 72 o ››› Fig. 73 and tightenit with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

When towing, the tow bar is the safest andvehicle friendly way. You should only use atow rope if you do not have a tow bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

50

The essentials

Only secure the tow rope or tow bar to thetowline anchorage or specially designed fit-ting.

Vehicles with a factory fitted towing device,can only be used for towing with a tow bar,specially designed to fit on a tow hitch ball››› page 234.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Note the following for a towed vehicle:

● Make sure the gear selector lever is in the Nposition.

● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph).

● Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles).

● If a breakdown truck is used, the vehiclemust be towed with the front wheels raised.Note the following instructions for towingfour all-wheel drive vehicles.

Instructions for towing all-wheel drive vehi-cles

All-wheel drive vehicles can be towed using atoolbar or tow rope. If the vehicle is towedwith the front or rear axle raised, the enginemust be turned off to avoid transmissiondamage.

For vehicles with a double clutched DSG® (di-rect shift gearbox) the instructions for towingvehicles with an automatic gearbox apply››› page 51.

Situations in which a vehicle should not betowed

In the following cases, the vehicle should notbe towed but transported on a trailer or spe-cial vehicle:

● If the vehicle gearbox does not contain lu-bricant due to a fault.

● If the vehicle battery is flat and, as a result,the electronic steering lock and electronicparking brake cannot be disengaged if ap-plied.

● If the vehicle to be towed has an automaticgearbox and the distance to be covered isgreater than 50 km (30 miles).


››› page 87

Tow-starting

In general, the vehicle should not be startedby towing. Jump-starting is much more pref-erable ››› page 51.

For technical reasons, the following vehiclescan not be tow started:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

● Vehicles with the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system, since the electronicsteering lock may not unlock.

● Vehicles with an electronic parking brake,given that it is possible that the brake willnot be disengaged.

● If the vehicle battery is flat, it is possiblethat the engine control units do not operatecorrectly.

However, if your vehicle must absolutely betow-started (manual gearbox):

● Put it into second or third gear.

● Keep the clutch pressed down.

● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights.

● Release the clutch when both vehicles aremoving.

● As soon as the engine starts, press theclutch and move the gear lever into neutral.This helps to prevent a collision with the tow-ing vehicle.

How to jump start

Jump leads

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery of another vehi-cle can be used to start the engine. Before »

51

The essentials

starting, check the magic eye on the battery››› page 280.

For starting assistance, jump lead cables con-forming to the standard DIN 72553 are re-quired (see the cable manufacturer instruc-tions). The jump lead cable must be at least25 mm2 in section (0.038 inches2) for petrolengines, and 35 mm2 (0.054 inches2) for die-sel engines.

For vehicles whose battery is not in the en-gine compartment, the jump leads shouldonly be connected to the starting assistanceconnection points in the engine compart-ment.

WARNING

Incorrect use of jump leads and incorrectlyjump starting could cause the battery to ex-plode resulting in serious injury. Please ob-serve the following rules to minimise the riskof a battery explosion:

● The battery providing current must havethe same voltage (12V) and approximatelythe same capacity (see markings on battery)as the flat battery.

● Never charge a frozen or recently thawedbattery. A flat battery can also freeze at tem-peratures close to 0°C (+32°F).

● If a battery is frozen and/or has been frozenthen it must be replaced.

● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is being charged. Al-

ways keep lit cigarettes, flames, sparks andfire far from the battery. Never use a mobiletelephone when connecting and removing thejump leads.

● Charge the battery only in well ventilatedareas given that when the battery is chargedby outside assistance, it creates a mix ofhighly explosive gases.

● Jump leads should never enter into contactwith moving parts in the engine compart-ment.

● Never switch the positive and negativepoles or connect the jump leads incorrectly.

● Note the instruction manual provided bythe manufacturer of the jump leads.

CAUTION

To avoid considerable damage to the vehicleelectrical system, note the following careful-ly:

● If the jump leads are incorrectly connected,this could result in a short circuit.

● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Positive pole on the jump lead con-nection points

Fig. 74 In the engine compartment: positivepole for starting assistance + .

On some vehicles, there is a starting assis-tance terminal in the engine compartment,under a labelled cover.

52

The essentials

How to jump start: description

Fig. 75 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start-Stop system.

Fig. 76 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 75.

3. Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump lead tothe negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 75.

– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-nect one end of the black jump lead X to asuitable ground terminal, to a solid piece ofmetal in the engine block, or to the engineblock itself ››› Fig. 76.

5. Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component boltedto the engine block or to the engine blockitself of the vehicle with the flat battery.Do not connect it to a point near the bat-tery A .

6. Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

Starting

7. Start the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flatbattery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes untilthe engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switchoff the dipped beam headlights if they areswitched on.

10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rearwindow in the vehicle with the flat battery.This helps minimise voltage peaks whichare generated when the leads are discon-nected.

11.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery termi-nals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the start-er after about 10 seconds and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING

● Please note the safety warnings referring toworking in the engine compartment››› page 268.

● The battery providing assistance must havethe same voltage as the flat battery (12V) andapproximately the same capacity (see imprint »

53

The essentials

on battery). Failure to comply could result inan explosion.

● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-ter the battery has thawed, battery acid couldleak and cause chemical burns. If a batteryfreezes, it should be replaced.

● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettesaway from batteries, danger of explosion.Failure to comply could result in an explo-sion.

● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.

● Do not connect the negative cable from theother vehicle directly to the negative terminalof the flat battery. The gas emitted from thebattery could be ignited by sparks. Danger ofexplosion.

● Do not attach the negative cable from theother vehicle to parts of the fuel system or tothe brake line.

● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-erwise electricity could flow as soon as thepositive terminals are connected.

Changing windscreen wipers

Windscreen wipers service position

Fig. 77 Wipers in service position

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 77.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 268.

● Switch the ignition on and off.

● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 26 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-

screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

››› page 87

Changing the front wiper blades

Fig. 78 Changing the front wiper blades

Fig. 79 Changing the rear wiper blade

54

The essentials

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

● Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms.

● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the wiper blades.

● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› in Changingthe windscreen and rear window wiperblades on page 87.

Change the windscreen wiper blades

● Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms.

● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 78 1

and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.

● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.

● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms

The wiper arm may only be lifted at the pointwhere it is fastened to the blade.

Changing the rear wiper blade

● Lift and unfold the wiper arm.

● Pull the wiper blade out of its mounting onthe wiper arm ››› Fig. 79 (arrow A ).

● Hold down the release button ››› Fig. 79 1

while gently pulling the blade in the directionof arrow B . This may require some strength.

● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the wiper arm in the opposite direc-tion to the arrow ››› Fig. 79 B and hook intoplace. This feature is operational when theknob is in position (arrow A ).

● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

››› in Changing the windscreen andrear window wiper blades on page 87

››› page 87

55

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information,tips, suggestions and warnings that youshould read and consider for both your ownsafety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle, bothfor the driver and the passengers. The othersections of the on-board documentation alsocontain further information that you shouldbe aware of for your own safety and for thesafety of your passengers.

● Ensure that the on-board documentation iskept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-cially important when lending or selling thevehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Introduction

Depending upon how you expect to use yourvehicle, it may a good idea to protect the en-gine from below. An undercarriage may help

to reduce the risk of damage to the lower partof the vehicle and the oil sump when drivingover kerbs, or along dirt tracks or unsurfacedroads, etc. SEAT recommends you have theguard fitted by a technical service centre.

WARNING

Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs,medication or narcotics may result in severeaccidents and even loss of life.

● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affect re-action times and safety while driving, whichcould result in the loss of control of the vehi-cle.

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 150.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-rors properly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the head restraints inthe in-use position ››› page 142.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 74.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 57.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 64.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

56

Safe driving

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, takebreaks regularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip,the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce therisk of injury. The following list includes mostof the safety equipment in your SEAT:

● three-point seat belts,

● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,

● belt tensioners for the front seats,

● front airbags,

● knee airbags,

● side airbags in the front seat backrests,

● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,

● head-protection airbags,

● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats inthe rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,

● height-adjustable front head restraints,

● rear head restraints with in-use positionand non-use position,

● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehicleoccupants

Correct sitting position

Fig. 80 The correct distance between the driv-er and the steering wheel must be at least 25cm (10 inches).

Fig. 81 Correct belt web and head restraintpositions »

57

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

The correct sitting positions for the driver andpassengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if a cor-rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend thefollowing positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:

● Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the same lev-el as the top of your head and under no cir-cumstances below eye level. Keep the backof your neck as close as possible to the headrestraint ››› Fig. 80 and ››› Fig. 81.

● Short people must lower the head restraintcompletely, even if your head is below its up-per edge.

● Tall people must raise the head restraintcompletely.

● Adjust the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion.

● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 64.

Also valid for the driver:

● Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) be-tween it and your chest ››› Fig. 80 and so thatyou can hold the steering wheel with bothhands on the outside of the ring at the 9o'clock and 3 o'clock positions with yourarms slightly bent.

● The adjusted steering wheel must face yourchest and not your face.

● Adjust the driver seat forwards or back-wards so that you are able to press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals to the floorwith your knees slightly angled and the dis-tance between your knees and the dash pan-el is at least 10 cm (4 inches) ››› Fig. 80.

● Adjust the height of the driver seat so thatyou can easily reach the top of the steeringwheel.

● Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Also valid for the front passenger:

● Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible for optimum protection shouldthe airbag deploy.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Read the additional information carefully››› page 16.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustment ofthe steering wheel can result in severe or fa-tal injury.

● After adjusting the steering column, pushthe lever ››› Fig. 24 1 firmly upwards toensure the steering wheel does not acciden-tally change position while driving.

● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust thesteering wheel while the vehicle is in motion,stop safely and make the proper adjustment.

● The adjusted steering wheel should be fac-ing your chest and not your face so as not tohinder the driver's front airbag protection inthe event of an accident.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positionsto reduce injuries when the driver's front air-bag deploys.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g.in the centre of the steering wheel). In suchcases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you maysustain injuries to your arms, hands andhead.

58

Safe driving

Danger of injuries due to an incorrectsitting position

Number of seats

Depending on the equipment, your vehiclehas a total of five or seven seats. Each seat isequipped with a seat belt.

5 seats

Seats in thefront

Seats in thesecond row

Seats in thethird row

2 3 –

7 seats

Seats in thefront

Seats in thesecond row

Seats in thethird row

2 3 2

If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Seatbelts can provide optimal protection only ifthe belt web is properly worn. Being seatedin an incorrect position means the seat beltcannot offer its full protection. This could re-sult in severe and even fatal injuries. The riskof severe or fatal injuries is especially height-ened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehi-cle occupant who has assumed an incorrectsitting position. The driver is responsible forall passengers in the vehicle, particularlychildren.

The following list shows just some examplesof incorrect sitting positions which can bedangerous to all vehicle occupants.

Whenever the vehicle is in motion:

● Never stand in the vehicle.

● Never stand on the seats.

● Never kneel on the seats.

● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear.

● Never lean against the dash panel.

● Never lie on the rear bench.

● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

● Never sit sideways.

● Never lean out of a window.

● Never put your feet out of a window.

● Never put your feet on the dash panel.

● Never put your feet on the surface of a seator seat backrest.

● Never travel in a footwell.

● Never sit on the armrests.

● Never travel on a seat without wearing theseat belt.

● Never carry any person in the luggage com-partment.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position in the vehiclecan lead to severe injuries or death in the

event of sudden braking or manoeuvres, colli-sion or accidents or if the airbag deploys.

● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-er sitting position and maintain it throughoutthe trip. This also includes fastening the seatbelt.

● Never transport more people than there areseats with a seat belt available in the vehicle.

● Children must always be protected with anapproved child restraint system suited totheir height and weight ››› page 74.

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion. Never, for example,put your feet on the surface of a seat or onthe dash panel and never put them out of awindow. Otherwise the airbag and seat beltoffer insufficient protection and the risk of in-jury in the event of an accident is increased.

WARNING

Before every trip, adjust the seat, the seatbelt and the head restraints and instruct yourpassengers to fasten their seat belts proper-ly.

● Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible.

● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a dis-tance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) betweenthe centre of your chest and the hub of thesteering wheel. Adjust the driver seat so thatyou are able to press the accelerator, brakeand clutch pedals to the floor with your kneesslightly angled and that the distance »

59

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

between your knees and the dash panel is atleast 10 cm (4 inches). If your physical consti-tution prevents you from meeting these re-quirements, contact a specialised workshopto make any modifications required.

● Never drive with the seat backrest tilted farback. The further the seat backrests are tiltedto the rear, the greater the risk of injury dueto incorrect positioning of the belt web or tothe incorrect sitting position!

● Never drive with the seat backrest tiltedforwards. Should a front airbag deploy, itcould throw the seat backrest backwards andinjure the passengers of the rear seats.

● Sit as far away as possible from the steer-ing wheel and the dash panel.

● Keep your back straight and resting com-pletely against the seat backrest and thefront seats correctly adjusted. Never placeany part of your body in the area of the airbagor very close to it.

● If passengers on the rear seats are not sit-ting in an upright position, the risk of severeinjury due to incorrect positioning of the beltweb increases.

WARNING

Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci-dents and severe injuries.

● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Further-

more, an incorrect position is adopted whenadjusting the seat.

● Only adjust the height, seat backrest andforwards or backwards position of the seatwhen there is nobody in the seat adjustmentarea.

● There must be no objects blocking the seatadjustment area.

● Only adjust the height, angle and longitu-dinal position of the rear seats when nobodyis in the way.

● The seat adjustment and lock areas mustbe kept clean.

Pedal area

Pedals

Do not allow floor mats or other objects toobstruct the free passage of the pedals.

Floor mats should leave the pedal area freeand unobstructed and be correctly secured inthe footwell zone.

In the event of failure of a brake circuit, thebrake pedal must be pressed harder thannormal to brake the vehicle.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell couldprevent use of the pedals. This could lead the

driver to lose control of the vehicle, increas-ing the risk of a serious accident.

● Make sure the pedals can be used at alltimes, with no objects rolling underneaththem.

● Always secure the mat in the footwell.

● Never place other mats or rugs on top ofthe original mat supplied by the factory.

● Ensure that no objects can fall into the driv-er's footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

The pedals must always have free and unob-structed passage to the floor. For example, incase of a fault in the brake circuit, the brakepedal will need to be pressed further to stopthe vehicle. To press the brake pedal downfurther will require more force than usual.

60

Seat belts

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt?

Introduction

Check the condition of all the seat belts atregular intervals. If you notice that the beltwebbing, fittings, retractor mechanism orbuckle of any of the belts is damaged, thebelt must be replaced immediately by a spe-cialised workshop ››› . The specialisedworkshop must use the appropriate spareparts corresponding to the vehicle, theequipment and the model year. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

WARNING

Unbuckled or badly buckled seat belts in-crease the risk of severe or even fatal inju-ries. The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion if it is not fastened and used correctly.

● Seat belts are the most effective way of re-ducing the risk of sustaining severe or fatalinjuries in the event of an accident. Seat beltsmust be correctly fastened when the vehicleis in motion to protect the driver and all vehi-cle occupants.

● Before each trip, every occupant in the ve-hicle occupants must sit properly, correctlyfasten the seat belt belonging to his or herseat and keep it fastened throughout the trip.

This also applies to other vehicle occupantswhen driving in town.

● When travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a child restraint systemsuitable for their weight and height and withthe seat belts correctly fastened››› page 74.

● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and ensure it is engaged.Using the latch plate in the buckle of anotherseat will not protect you properly and maycause severe injuries.

● Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to en-ter the buckle fastenings. This could damagethe buckles and seat belts.

● Never unbuckle your seat belt when the ve-hicle is moving.

● Never allow more than one passenger toshare the same seat belt.

● Never hold children or babies on your lapsharing the same seat belt.

● Loose, bulky clothing (such as a jacket) im-pairs the proper fit and function of the seatbelt.

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to drive using dam-aged seat belts and could result in serious in-jury or loss of life.

● Avoid damaging the seat belt by jamming itin the door or the seat mechanism.

● If the fabric or other parts of the seat beltare damaged, the seat belts could break inthe event of an accident or sudden braking.

● Always have damaged seatbelts replacedimmediately by seat belts approved for thevehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts whichhave been worn in an accident and stretchedmust be replaced by a specialised workshop.Renewal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorage shouldalso be checked.

● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove aseat belt yourself. All repairs to seat belts, re-tractors and buckles must be carried out by aspecialised workshop.

61

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Warning lamp

Fig. 82 Warning lamp on the instrument pan-el.

Fig. 83 Example of seat belt status display forthe rear seats (here, a 7-seat vehicle) on theinstrument panel above, the second row and,below, the third row of seats.

Lights up or flashes

Driver's seat belt notfastened or front pas-senger seat belt notfastened if the frontpassenger seat is occu-pied.

Fasten seat belts!

Objects on the frontpassenger seat.

Remove any objects from thefront passenger seat andstore them safely.

Some control and warning lamps on the in-strument panel will come on to check certainfunctions when the ignition is switched on.They will switch off after a few seconds.

An audible warning will be heard for a maxi-mum of 90 seconds if the seat belts are notfastened as the car drives off and reaches aspeed of more than 25 km/h (15 mph) or ifthe seat belts are unfastened while the vehi-cle is in motion. The seat belt warning lamp will also flash.

The warning lamp does not switch off untilthe driver and front passenger fasten theirseat belts while the ignition is switched on.

Seat belt status display for rear seats

The seat belt status display on the instru-ment panel informs the driver, when the igni-tion is switched on, whether any passengersin the rear seats have fastened their seatbelts. The symbol indicates that the pas-

senger in this seat has fastened “his or her”seat belt ››› Fig. 83.

The seat belt status is displayed for around30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis fastened or unfastened. You can switch offthis display by pressing the 0.0 / SET button.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.An audible warning will also be heard if thevehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h(15 mph).

The rear seat display can be enabled or disa-bled by a technical service centre.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 84 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking

62

Seat belts

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability of thebelts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just driv-ing around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injuryand improving the chances of survival wheninvolved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered during

minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 85 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently

Fig. 86 The unbelted rear passenger isthrown forward violently, hitting the driverwearing a seat belt

It is easy to explain how the laws of physicswork in the case of a head-on collision: whena vehicle starts moving, a type of energycalled “kinetic energy” is created both in thepassengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and the weight ofthe vehicle and its passengers. The higherthe speed and the greater the weight, themore energy there is to be “absorbed” in anaccident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-netic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the »

63

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbedsolely by said impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengersare thrown forward and will make violent con-tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,windscreen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 85.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 86.

Using seat belts

Twisted seat belt

If it is difficult to remove the seat belt fromthe guide, the seat belt may have becometwisted inside the side trim after beingwound too quickly on unfastening:

● Pull out the seat belt completely, carefullypulling on the latch plate.

● Untwist the belt and guide it back, assist-ing it by hand.

The seat belt must be fastened even if it isimpossible to untwist it. In this case, thetwisted area must not be in an area in directcontact with your body. Have the seat beltuntwisted urgently by a specialised work-shop.

WARNING

An improperly handled seat belt increasesthe risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

● Regularly check that the seat belts andtheir components are in perfect condition.

● Always keep your seat belt clean.

● Do not jam or damage the seat belt or rub itwith sharp edges.

● Make sure there are no liquids or foreignbodies on the latch plate and in the buckle.

How to properly adjust yourseatbelt

Fastening and unfastening your seatbelt

Fig. 87 Insert the latch plate into the buckle

64

Seat belts

Fig. 88 Position of seat belt during pregnan-cy.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat belt

Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor-rectly ››› page 57.

● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .

● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do nottwist the seat belt when doing so ››› .

● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of thecorresponding seat ››› Fig. 87 A.

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Unfastening the seat belt

The seat belt must not be unfastened untilthe vehicle has come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 87 B. The latch plate is released fromthe buckle.


Correct belt position

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries onlywhen they are properly positioned. Further-more, if the webbing is correctly positioned,the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupantsin the optimum position to ensure the airbagprovides the maximum protection. The seatbelt must therefore always be worn and thewebbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 57, Correct po-sition of the vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or behindthe shoulder.

● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.

● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat beltmust lie evenly across the chest and as lowas possible over the pelvis, never across thestomach and must be worn properly at alltimes during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 88.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing toyour size

The seat belt can be adapted using the fol-lowing equipment:

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

● Front seat height adjustment.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can causesevere or fatal injuries in the event of an acci-dent.

● The seat belt cannot offer its full protectionunless the seat backrest is in an upright posi-tion and the seat belt is worn correctly, ac-cording to your size.

● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicleis in motion can cause severe or fatal injuriesin the event of an accident or sudden braking. »

65

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, cancause severe injuries if the belt moves fromhard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. thestomach).

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm.

● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly on the torso

● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach. Theseat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably onthe pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary totake up any slack.

● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” thestomach ››› Fig. 88.

● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.

● Once the seat belt is positioned correctly,don't pull it away from your body with yourhand.

● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or frag-ile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.

● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings orsimilar instruments to alter the position ofthe belt webbing.

Note

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position of the

belt webbing, contact a specialised workshopfor help with any special devices to ensurethe optimum protection of the seat belt andairbag. SEAT recommends taking your car infor technical service.

Fastening or unfastening the seat beltwith two buckles

Fig. 89 Fasten the seat belt on the centre seatin the second row of seats

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

The seat belts for the centre seat in the sec-ond row of seats and for the seats in the thirdrow of seats are fastened using two buckles.

Fastening the seat belt

Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the rear seat and head restraint cor-rectly ››› page 57.

● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .

● Use latch plate of the belt ››› Fig. 89 1 topull the seat belt down. Do not twist the seatbelt when doing so ››› .

● Engage the latch plate 1 in the buckle ofthe corresponding seat A .

● Use the latch plate ››› Fig. 89 2 to pull theseat belt across your lap.

● Engage the latch plate 2 in the buckle ofthe corresponding seat B .

● Pull the belt to ensure that both latchplates are securely engaged in the buckles.

Unfastening the seat belt

The seat belt must not be unfastened untilthe vehicle has come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 89 A . The latch plate is released fromthe buckle.

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 89 B . The latch plate is released fromthe buckle.


66

Seat belts

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can causesevere or fatal injuries in the event of an acci-dent.

● The seat belt cannot offer its full protectionunless the seat backrests are in an uprightposition and the seat belt is worn correctly,according to your size.

● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicleis in motion can cause severe or fatal injuriesin the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Note

Seat belts with two buckles include a dia-gram to show how to fasten the seat belt.

Belt height adjustment

Fig. 90 Next to the front seats: belt height ad-juster

Using the height adjusters for the front seatsand the outer seats of the second row, theposition of the seat belts can be adjusted inthe shoulder area according to the height ofthe occupant:

● Keep the guide device pressed down in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 90.

● Move the guide device up or down until theseat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder››› page 64.

● Release the guide device.

● Pull the belt sharply to check that the de-vice is engaged securely.

WARNING

Never adjust the belt height while the vehicleis in motion.

Seat belt tensioners

Automatic belt retractor, belt tension-er, belt tension limiter

Seat belts are part of the vehicle’s safety fea-tures and consist of the following importantfunctions:

Automatic belt retainer

Every seat belt is equipped with an automaticbelt retainer on the shoulder belt. If the belt

is pulled slowly or during normal driving, thesystem allows for total freedom of movementon the shoulder belt. However, during sud-den braking, during travel in mountains orbends and during acceleration, the automat-ic belt retainer on the seat belt is locked ispulled quickly.

Belt tensioners

The seat belts on the front seats and the out-er seats of the second row are equipped withbelt tensioners.

Sensors trigger the belt tensioners during se-vere head-on, lateral and rear collisions andretract and tighten the seat belts. If the seatbelt is loose, it is retracted to reduce the for-wards movement of vehicle occupants ormovement in the direction of the collision.The belt tensioner works in combination withthe airbag system. The belt tensioner will notbe triggered in the event of the vehicle over-turning if the side airbags are not deployed.

If the belt tensioner is triggered, a fine dust isproduced. This is normal and it is not an indi-cation of fire in the vehicle.

Belt tension limiter

The belt tension limiter reduces the force ofthe seat belt on the body in the event of anaccident. »

67

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Note

The relevant safety requirements must be ob-served when the vehicle is dismantled or sys-tem components are removed. These require-ments are known to specialised workshops››› page 68.

Service and disposal of belt tensiondevices

If you work on the belt tensioners or removeand install other parts of the vehicle whenperforming other repair work, the seat beltmay be damaged. The consequence may bethat, in the event of an accident, the belt ten-sioners function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the belt tensioneris not reduced and that removed parts do notcause any injuries or environmental pollu-tion, regulations must be observed. These re-quirements are known to specialised work-shops.

WARNING

Improper handling and homemade repairs ofseat belts, automatic belt retainers and ten-sion devices increase the risk of sustainingsevere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionermay fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrongcircumstances.

● Never attempt to repair, adjust or remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts. Any work must be performed by a spe-cialised workshop only ››› page 244.

● Belt tensioners and automatic belt retain-ers cannot be repaired and must be replaced.


Airbag modules and belt tensioners may con-tain perchlorate. Observe the legal require-ments for their disposal.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Introduction

Front airbags have been installed for bothdriver and passenger. The front airbags canalso protect the chest and head of driver andpassenger if the seats, seat belts head re-straints and, for the driver, the steeringwheel are correctly adjusted and used. Air-bags are considered as additional safetyequipment. An airbag cannot replace theseat belt, which must be worn at all times,even in front seats where front airbags havebeen installed.

WARNING

Never exclusively trust the airbag system as ameans of protection.

● Even when triggered, airbag protection isonly auxiliary.

● The airbags provide the best protectionwhen the seat belts are properly fastened,thus reducing the risk of sustaining injuries››› page 64, How to properly adjust your seat-belt.

● Before each trip, every occupant must sitproperly, correctly fasten the seat belt be-longing to his or her seat and keeping it fas-tened throughout the trip. This rule is validfor all vehicle occupants.

68

Airbag system

WARNING

Vehicle occupants sitting in the front of thevehicle must never carry any objects in thedeployment space between them and the air-bags, as this increases the risk of sustaininginjuries if the airbag is triggered. This modi-fies the airbag deployment space or the ob-jects may fly uncontrollably and hit yourbody.

● Never carry objects in your hand or on yourlap while the vehicle is in motion.

● Never transport objects on the front pas-senger seat. In the event of sudden brakingand manoeuvres, the objects may end up inthe airbag deployment space and fly uncon-trollably around the vehicle interior if the air-bag is activated.

● Vehicle occupants of the front and outerrear seats must never carry any other people,pets or objects in the deployment space be-tween them and the airbags. Make sure chil-dren and other passengers also respect thisrecommendation.

WARNING

The airbag system provides protection forone accident only. If they have been de-ployed, they must be replaced.

● Ensure deployed airbags and the systemcomponents involved are immediately re-placed with new, SEAT-approved componentsfor the vehicle.

● Have any repairs or modifications carriedout at a specialised workshop. Specialisedworkshops have the necessary tools, diag-nostics equipment, repair information andqualified personnel.

● Never fit recycled or reused airbag compo-nents in your vehicle.

● Never modify the airbag system compo-nents.

WARNING

If the airbags are triggered, a fine dust is pro-duced. This is normal and it is not an indica-tion of fire in the vehicle.

● This fine dust may irritate the skin and eyesand cause breathing difficulties, particularlyin people suffering from or who have sufferedfrom asthma or other illnesses of the respira-tory tract. To reduce breathing difficulties,get out of the vehicle and open and doors andwindows to breath in fresh air.

● Should you touch the dust, wash yourhands and face using a mild soap and waterbefore you eat.

● Prevent the dust from affecting the eyes oropen wounds.

● Rinse your eyes with water if you have dustin them.

WARNING

Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbagmodules to become porous. If an airbag is ac-

cidentally triggered, the detachment of plas-tic parts could cause serious injury.

● Never clean the dash panel and the surfa-ces of the airbag modules with cleaners con-taining solvents.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system is not a substitute for theseat belts. The airbag system offers addition-al protection for the driver and passenger incombination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the followingmodules (as per vehicle equipment):

● Electronic control unit.

● Front airbags for driver and passenger

● Knee airbag for the driver

● Side airbags

● Head airbag

● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel

● Key-operated switch for front passenger air-bag

● Control lamp to disconnect/connect thefront airbag. »

69

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

● the ignition is switched off

● there is a minor frontal collision

● there is a minor side collision

● there is a rear-end collision

● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

● The seat belts and airbags can only providemaximum protection if the occupants areseated correctly ››› page 57.

● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise there is a

danger that during a collision, the systemmay fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit the

airbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions

● Driver airbag.

● Front passenger front airbag

● Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions

● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);

● the hazard warning lights switch on;

● all doors are unlocked;

● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

70

Airbag system

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags


WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac-tions of a second.

● Always keep the deployment areas of thefront airbags free.

● Never secure objects to the covers or in thedeployment area of the airbag modules, e.g.drink holders or phone supports.

● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.

● Never fix any object to the windscreenabove the front airbag on the front passengerside.

● Do not alter, cover or stick anything to thesteering wheel hub or the surface of the air-bag module on the passenger side of thedash panel.

WARNING

Front airbags are deployed in front of thesteering wheel ››› Fig. 25 and the dashpanel ››› Fig. 26.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel on the outer edge of the ring with bothhands: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position.

● Adjust the driver seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between your chest andthe hub of the steering wheel. If your physi-cal constitution prevents you from meetingthese requirements, make sure you contact aspecialised workshop.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so there isas much distance as possible between thefront passenger and the dash panel.

Knee airbag*


WARNING


● The knee airbag is deployed in front of thedriver's knees. Always keep the deploymentareas of the knee airbags free.

● Never not fix objects to the cover or in thedeployment area of the knee airbag.

● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a dis-tance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) betweenyour knees and the location of the knee air-bag. If your physical constitution preventsyou from meeting these requirements, makesure you contact a specialised workshop.

Side airbags*


WARNING


● Always keep the deployment areas of theside airbags free.

● Vehicle occupants of the front and outerrear seats must never carry any other people,pets or objects in the deployment space be-tween them and the airbags.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

● Do not mount accessories on the doors.

● Only used protective covers for the seatsthat are approved for the vehicle. Otherwise,the side airbag would be obstructed when de-ployed.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of the driver's and frontpassenger seat could prevent the side airbagfrom deploying properly and cause severe in-juries.

● Never remove the front seats of the vehicleor modify any of their components. »

71

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● Great forces must not be exerted on theseat backrest bolsters because the side air-bags might not deploy correctly, might notdeploy at all or might deploy unexpectedly.

● Any damage to the original seat upholsteryor around the seams of the side airbag unitsmust be repaired immediately by a special-ised workshop.

Curtain airbags*


WARNING


● Always keep the deployment areas of thehead-protection airbags free.

● Do not fix objects to the cover or in the de-ployment area of the curtain airbag.

● Vehicle occupants of the front and outerrear seats must never carry any other people,pets or objects in the deployment space be-tween them and the airbags.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

● Do not mount accessories on the doors.

● Do not fit curtains to the windows otherthan those expressly approved for use in thevehicle.

● Only turn the sun blinds towards the win-dows if there is no object, e.g. pens or garageremote controls, secured to the sun blind.

Deactivating airbags

Control lamp

Fig. 91 Control lamp for disabling the frontpassenger front airbag on the dash panel

It lights up on the combi-in-strument

Fault in airbagsystem and seatbelt tensioners.

Have the system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the air-bag system.

Have the system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

Front passengerfront airbag disa-bled.

Check whether the airbag shouldremain disabled

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the lamp does not re-main lit, or if it is lit together with the controllamp on the dash panel, there may be afault in the airbag system ››› .

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag system,the airbag may not trigger correctly, may failto trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly,leading to severe or fatal injuries.

● Have the airbag system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

● Never mount a child seat in the front pas-senger seat ››› page 78 or remove themounted child seat! The front passenger frontairbag may deploy during an accident in spiteof the fault.

72

Airbag system

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control lampsand to the corresponding descriptions and in-structions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Manual disabling and enabling of thefront passenger front airbag with thekey switch

Fig. 92 In the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side: Key switch for enabling anddisabling the front passenger front airbag.


The front passenger front airbag must be dis-abled when a rear-facing child seat is moun-ted.

Activating the front passenger front airbag


● Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 92. About 3/4 of the key should enter,as far as it will go.

● Then turn the key gently to the ON position.Do not force it if you feel resistance, andmake sure you have inserted the key fully.

● Close the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.

● Check that, with the ignition switched on,the control lamp on thedash panel is not lit ››› page 72.

How to know whether the front passengerfront airbag is disabled

The only indication of the front passenger air-bag being disabled is that the control lamp on the dash panel re-mains lit ( stays yellow) ››› page 72,Control lamp.

If the control lamp onthe centre console does not remain lit or is litin combination with the control lamp onthe dash panel, a child restraint system can-not be mounted on the front passenger seatfor safety reasons. The front passenger frontairbag may deploy during an accident.

WARNING

The front passenger front airbag must only bedisabled in special cases.

● Disable and activate the front passengerfront airbag when the ignition is switched offto avoid damage to the airbag system.

● It is the driver's responsibility to ensurethat the key operated switch is set to the cor-rect position.

● Only disable the front passenger front air-bag when a child seat is to be mounted underexceptional circumstances.

● As soon as the child seat is no longer nee-ded on the front passenger seat, reconnectthe front passenger front airbag.

● Never leave the key in the airbag deactiva-tion switch as it could get damaged or acti-vate or deactivate the airbag during driving.

73

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction


Please read the information regarding the air-bag system fully before transporting babiesand children in a child seat or other child re-straint system installed on the front passen-ger seat.

This information is extremely important fordriver and passenger safety, particularly thatof babies and children.

SEAT recommends the use of child seats fromthe SEAT accessory programme. These childseats have been designed and tested for usein SEAT vehicles. You can purchase childseats with different mountings from a techni-cal service centre.

Using child restraint systems with a base orfoot

Some child retention systems are secured tothe seat using a base or support leg. For cer-tain kinds of equipment the use of an addi-tional accessory will be necessary (e.g. an ac-cessory for the footwell) to fit the child reten-tion system correctly and securely.

WARNING

Make sure children are properly belted in andcorrectly secured to avoid severe or fatal inju-ries while the vehicle is in motion.

● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.

● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and project itwith great force against the door, the roof orthe backrest.

● Never install a child seat facing backwardson the front passenger seat unless the frontpassenger front airbag has been disabled.Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-ses, to transport a child in the front passen-ger seat, the front passenger front airbagmust always be disabled ››› page 72. If thepassenger seat has a height adjustment op-tion, move it to the highest, most upright po-sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not installany child restraint system in this location.

● For those vehicles that do not include a keylock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-cle must be taken to a technical service.

● Children up to 12 years old should alwaystravel on the rear seat.

● Children must always be protected with anapproved child restraint system suited totheir height and weight.

● Children must assume the proper sittingposition and be properly belted in while trav-elling.

● Ensure the seat backrest is upright when achild seat is being used on it.

● Do not allow the child's head or other partof his or her body to fall into the deploymentarea of the side airbags.

● Make sure the belt webbing is correctlypositioned.

● Never hold children or babies on your lap orin your arms.

● Only one child may occupy a child seat.

● If you are using a child seat with a base orfoot, always install this base or foot correctlyand safely.

● If the vehicle has a storage compartment inthe footwell in front of the last row of seats,this compartment cannot be used as de-signed; on the contrary: It must be filled us-ing the specially designed accessory so thatthe base or foot is correctly supported by theclosed compartment and the child seat is se-cured properly. If this compartment is notsuitably secured when using a child seat witha base or foot then the compartment covercould rupture in an accident and the child willbe ejected and suffer serious injury.


74


WARNING

An empty or loose child seat could fly uncon-trollably around the vehicle interior andcause injuries in the event of an accident orsudden braking.

● When not in use while the vehicle is in mo-tion, always safely secure the child seat orstore it in the luggage compartment.

Note

Replace the child seat after an accident, as itmay have invisible damage.

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag


Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Child seats and passenger side airbag››› page 76, Use of the child seat on thefront passenger seat.

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› in Introduction on page 68.

● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 71.

Child seats

Safety instructions


WARNING

The lower anchor points for child seats arenot anchors meant to support cargo. Only se-cure booster seats to lower anchor points.

WARNING

Child seats with lower anchor points and withan upper retaining strap must be installed inline with the manufacturer's instructions.Failure to comply could result in severe inju-ries.

● Always secure just one retaining strap froma child seat to a retaining ring (for Top Tether)on the seat backrest on the rear seat in theboot.

● Never fix child seats to the cargo anchors inthe luggage compartment.

● Never secure a child seat to the movable at-tachment elements for vehicles with an at-tachment element and rail system.

WARNING

In general, the rear seat is always the safestplace for correctly belted in children in theevent of an accident.

● A suitable child seat that is correctly instal-led and used on one of the rear seats offerthe most protection possible for babies andsmall children in most accidents.

WARNING

Unbuckling the seat belt while the vehicle isin motion can cause severe or fatal injuries inthe event of an accident or sudden braking.

● The seat belt must not be unfastened untilthe vehicle has come to a standstill.

Note

Other accessories may be required to fit thechild retention system with a base or foot se-curity and safely. Contact a technical servicecentre or specialised workshop.

General information on transportingchildren in the vehicle


Legal regulations and provisions will alwaystake priority over the descriptions of this in-struction manual. There are different regula-tions and provisions for the use of child seatsand their mountings (››› table on page 76).In some countries, for example, the use ofchild seats on certain seats in the vehiclemay be forbidden. »

75

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

The physical principles and the forces actingon the vehicle in the event of a collision orother type of accidents also apply to children››› page 64. However, unlike adults andyoungsters, children do not have fully devel-oped muscle and bone structures. In theevent of an accident, children are subject to agreater risk than adults of sustaining severeinjuries.

Given that children's bodies are not yet fullydeveloped, child restraint systems must beused that are especially adapted to theirheight, weight and constitution. There arelaws in force in many countries that indicatethe use of approved seat systems for trans-porting babies and children.

Only used authorised, approved child seatsthat are suitable for the vehicle. Always con-sult with a technical service centre or a speci-alised workshop should you have anydoubts.

Specific child seat regulations for each coun-try (selection)

Regulation Further information

ECE-R 44a) technical service centre

a) ECE-R: Economic Comission for Europe Regulation.

Categorisation of child seats according toECE-R44

Weightcatego-

ry

Weight ofthe child

Installation of the childseat

Group 0 up to 10 kg Rear-facing. On rear seats,optionally using the ISOFIX

system.Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group 1 9 to 18 kgForward-facing. On rear

seats, optionally using theISOFIX system.

Group 2 15 to 25 kg

Forward-facing. On the outerrear seats or in the centreseat of the second row of

seats and on all seats in thethird row. Optionally with

ISOFIX system.

Group 3 22 to 36 kg Forward-facing.

Not all children fit in the seat of their weightgroup. Nor do all seats adapt to the vehicle.Therefore, always check whether the child fitsproperly in the child seat and whether theseat can be installed safely in the vehicle.

The rear seats are suitable for child seatswith the ISOFIX system specially designedfor this type of vehicle in accordance withregulation ECE-R 44.

Child seats approved under the ECE-R 44 reg-ulation are fitted with the corresponding ap-proval symbol. The sign is an upper-case E ina circle with the identification number belowit.

Use of the child seat on the front pas-senger seat1)

Transporting children on the front passengerseat is not permitted in all countries. Further-more, not all child seats are approved for useon the front passenger seat. Your technicalservice centre has an updated list of all ap-proved child seats. Only used child seats thatare approved for each vehicle.

The front airbag on the front passenger sideis highly dangerous for a child. The front pas-senger seat is life-threatening to a child if heor she is transported in a rear-facing childseat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to thefront passenger seat, an inflating front airbagcan strike it with such great force that severeor fatal injuries may result ››› . Therefore,rear-facing child seats must never be placedon the front passenger seat when the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled.

1) Compliance with current national legislation andthe manufacturer's instructions is required when us-ing or installing child seats.

76


Only use a rear-facing child seat on the frontpassenger seat if the front passenger frontairbag is disabled. When it is disabled, theyellow PASSENGER AIR BAG controllamp on the dash panel will be lit ››› page 72.If you cannot disable the front passengerfront airbag and it remains activated, it isforbidden to transport children on the frontpassenger seat ››› .

Things to note if using a child seat on thefront passenger seat:

● The front passenger front airbag must bedisabled when using a rear-facing childseat ››› page 73.

● The seat backrest of the front passengerseat must be upright.

● The front passenger seat must be moved asfar back as possible.

● The seat backrest of the front passengerseat must be upright.


Suitable child seats

The child seat must be authorised by themanufacturer especially for use on a frontpassenger seat with a front or side airbag.

If the front passenger seat is equipped withretaining rings, the child seat can be securedusing an approved retaining system providedit is approved for this type of vehicle in ac-

cordance with current regulations of thecountry in question.

Universal seats for children of groups 0, 0+,1, 2 or 3 according to the standard ECE-R 44can be mounted on the front passenger seatand the rear seats.

WARNING

If a child seat is mounted on the front passen-ger seat, the risk of the child sustaining se-vere or fatal injuries in the event of an acci-dent increases. Rear-facing child seats mustnever be mounted on the front passengerseat when the front passenger front airbag isenabled. This is life-threatening to the childshould the front airbag deploy, as the childseat would be struck by the inflated airbagand thrown against the seat backrest.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, a child mustbe transported in a rear-facing child seat onthe front passenger seat, strictly observe thefollowing:

● Always disable the front passenger frontairbag and leave it disabled.

● The child seat must be approved by themanufacturer for use on a front passengerseat with front and side airbag.

● Follow the installation instructions of thechild seat manufacturer and observe thewarnings.

● Move the front passenger seat as far backas possible and adjust it to its highest posi-tion to keep as far away as possible from thefront airbag.

● Move the seat backrest to the upright posi-tion.


● Children must always be protected with anapproved child restraint system suited totheir height and weight.

Use of the child seat on the rear seat

If a child seat is mounted on the rear seat,adapt the position of the front passengerseat so that the child has enough space.Therefore, adapt the front passenger seat tothe size of the child seat and the height ofthe child. Ensure the passenger is in the cor-rect position ››› page 57.

Move the second and third rows of seats fullyback and lock them. Place the seat backs in avertical position and fold the head restraintsdown.

ISOFIX child seats approved for rear seats

The rear seats are suitable for child seatswith the ISOFIX system specially designedfor this type of vehicle in accordance withregulation ECE-R 44. »

77

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

ISOFIX child seats are divided into “specificcategories for the vehicle”, “limited” or“semi-universal”.

Child seat manufacturers supply a list of ve-hicles with each ISOFIX seat, which includesthe models for which the ISOFIX child seat inquestion is approved. If the vehicle is inclu-ded in the manufacturer's list and the ISOFIXchild seat belongs to a seat category inclu-ded in the list, then it can be used in your ve-hicle. If necessary, contact the child seatmanufacturer for an updated list of vehicles.

Group(weight

category)

ISOFIX childseat category

Seat position inthe rear seats

Group 0:to 10 kg

E IUFa)

Group 0+:to 13 kg

E IUFa)

D IUFa)

C IUFa)

Group 1:9 to 18 kg

D IUFa)

C IUFa)

B IUFa)

B1 IUFa)

A IUFa)

a) IUF: suitable for “universal” ISOFIX child seats authorised foruse in this group.

WARNING

If child seats are fitted to all the seats in thesecond row then it is possible that the seatsof this row cannot be folded down from thethird row of seats in case of an accident. Inthe event of an emergency, passengers in thethird row of seats will not be able to leave thevehicle or to help themselves.

● Child seats should never occupy all theseats of the second row if other passengersare to occupy the third row of seats.

Integrated child seat

Introduction

The integrated child seat is only suitable forchildren in Group 2 (15-25 kg) and Group 3(22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R44 regula-tion.

WARNING

Child travelling without their seat belt fas-tened or not secured using a suitable re-straint system may sustain fatal injuries ifthe airbag is deployed.

● Children up to 12 years old should alwaystravel on the rear seat.

● Always disable the front passenger frontairbag if, in exceptional cases, you have noalternative but to transport a child in a rear-

facing child safety seat on the front passen-ger seat.

● Children must always be protected with achild restraint system suited to their heightand weight.

● Always fasten children's seat belts correct-ly.

WARNING

Children must travel in a child seat appropri-ate to their weight and height while the vehi-cle is in motion.

● Children must always be protected with achild restraint system suited to their heightand weight.


● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieapproximately on the centre of the shoulder,never across the neck or the arm.

● The seat belt must lie close to the upperpart of the body.

● The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis,not across the stomach, and always fit close-ly.

● Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightlyover the child's seat.

● Never hold children or babies on your lap.

78


● Always use a child seat and the seat beltfor children who are under 1.5 m tall. The nor-mal seat belt could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas.


● Read and follow the information and warn-ings provided by the child seat manufacturer.

● Never leave an unsupervised child alone ona child seat or in the vehicle.

● All modifications to the integrated childseat must be carried out by a specialisedworkshop.

● Replace the child seat or any seat compo-nents damaged or involved in an accident.

WARNING

Loose objects could fly uncontrollably aroundthe vehicle interior and cause injuries in theevent of an accident or sudden braking.

● Do not leave toys or other hard, loose ob-jects on the child seat or on the seat whilethe vehicle is in motion.

Unfolding the integrated child seat

Fig. 93 Integrated child seats. lift up thecushion

Fig. 94 Integrated child seats. install its headsupport.

Lifting the cushion

● Pull the unlock lever ››› Fig. 93 A on thecushion in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 93 1 .

● Fold both sides ››› Fig. 93 B up in the di-rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 93 2 .

● Push the cushion ››› Fig. 93 C back in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 93 3 until it en-gages.

Install the head restraint on the child safetyseat

● Remove the head support and store it safe-ly in the vehicle ››› page 140.

● Make sure that the seat belt guide is instal-led in the head support of the seat for chil-dren on the window side ››› page 80.

● Enter the child seat head support in thecorresponding backrest until it fits correctlyinto place ››› Fig. 94.

● Make sure that the rear seats and backrestsare correctly locked into place, pulling onboth of them.

79

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Seat belt routing on the integratedchild seat

Fig. 95 Integrated child seats. adjusting theseat belt.

Fig. 96 Integrated child seats. seat belt rout-ing with guide handle

Using the guide handle ››› Fig. 96, positionthe seat belt so that the shoulder part of thebelt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder.

Seat belt guide handle

● Secure the seat belt guide handle to theside head restraint on the window side. Theguide handle is secured by a button.

● Open the upper button on the seat beltguide handle and pass the belt webbing be-low the side head restraint and through theguide handle.

● Close the button again.

Adjusting the seat belt

● Guide the automatic three-point seat beltbelow the side head restraint.

● Pull the latch plate and slowly place thebelt webbing across the child's chest andlap.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click.

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

WARNING

The seat belt only offers maximum protectionfrom severe or fatal injuries when it is cor-rectly positioned.


● The shoulder belt must be positionedagainst the middle of the shoulder.

● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly.

● Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightlyover the child's seat.

● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.


Removing the child seat

Fig. 97 Integrated child seats. lowering thecushion

Lowering the cushion

● Pull the unlock lever ››› Fig. 97 A on thecushion in the direction of the arrow 1 .

80


● Push the cushion down through the centralarea B in the direction of the arrow 2 untilit safely engages ››› . The side supports foldaway automatically.

Remove the head restraint on the child safe-ty seat

● Open the guide lever on the seat belt andguide it by hand to pull the belt back in moreeasily and without damaging the trim.

● Lift the child seat head restraint to the top.

● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards››› page 144.

● Remove the head restraint on the childsafety seat.

● Fitting the head restraint.

CAUTION

When lowering the integrated child seat, onlypress on the centre of the cushion ››› Fig. 97

2 . Otherwise the cushion could bend andnot engage properly.

81

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

In case of emergency

First aid kit, warning triangle, reflec-tive vests and fire extinguishers*

Fig. 98 On the rear lid: Warning trianglebracket

Reflective vests

Some vehicles will have a driver door com-partment to store a reflective vest››› page 98.

Warning triangle

With the boot hatch open, rotate the lock 90°››› Fig. 98. Lower the bracket and remove thewarning triangle.

First-aid kit

There is a first aid kit ››› page 163 in the rearleft-hand side storage compartment of theluggage compartment.

The first aid kit must comply with legal re-quirements. Check the expiry date of the con-tents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher

There is a Fire extinguisher underneath thefront passenger seat.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legalrequirements, be ready for use and bechecked regularly. Check the certificationseal on the extinguisher.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be vi-olently thrown in case of a sudden manoeu-vre or braking and especially in accidentscausing serious injury.

● Secure fire extinguishers, first aid kit, re-flective vests and warning triangle securelyto their respective supports.

Vehicle tool kit*

Location

Fig. 99 In the luggage compartment, viewedfrom inside the vehicle: the vehicle tool kit lo-cated in a cavity close to the lock carrier.

When securing the vehicle in case of a break-down, please note the legal requirements foreach country.

Depending on the model, the vehicle toolsmay be kept in the luggage compartment, ina cavity close to the lock carrier ››› Fig. 99.Loosen the safety straps and remove the ve-hicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted withwinter tyres, you will find additional tools in atoolbox located in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be vi-olently fired through the compartment incase of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and

82

Self-help

especially in accidents causing serious in-jury.

● Make sure that the vehicle tools are storedsafely in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.

● Never work with inappropriate or damagedtools.

Note

After use, return the jack to its initial positionusing the handle in order to securely store itin the vehicle.

Components

Fig. 100 Components of the vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicleequipment. The following is a description fora vehicle with all options.

The individual elements of the vehicle toolkit ››› Fig. 100

Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recom-mend you carry the wheel bolt adapter inthe vehicle tool kit at all times. The codenumber of the anti-theft wheel bolt isstamped on the front of the adapter. Incase it is lost, another adapter can be or-dered using this number. Note the anti-theft bolt code for the wheels and keep itin a place other than the vehicle.

Towline anchorage, removable.

Wheel spanner.

Jack crank handle. The crank handleneeds to be folded away before returningit to the tool kit.

Jack. Before storing the jack in the toolkit, fold its hook.

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in thehandle for screwing and unscrewing thewheel bolts. The screwdriver bit is inter-changeable. The screwdriver may befound underneath the wheel spanner.

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover,integral hubcaps and the wheel boltcaps.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Note

The jack does not generally require any main-tenance. If required, it should be greased us-ing universal type grease.

Folding wheel chocks*

Fig. 101 To unfold the foldable wedges.

The folding chocks are in the tool kit››› Fig. 100.

Assemble the folding chocks

● Lift the base plate ››› Fig. 101 1 .

● Insert the two “tabs” of the mounting plateinto the long openings on the base plate 2 .

Correct use

The folding chocks may be used to block thewheel diagonally opposite to the wheel beingchanged. »

83

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

The chocks should be placed directly in frontand behind the wheel and only be used onfirm ground.

WARNING

If the folding chocks are assembled or usedincorrectly, an accident may occur and seri-ous injury caused.

● Never use damaged chocks.

● Never use chocks to immobilize the vehicleon a slope.

Changing a wheel*

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully››› page 45

All Alhambra models have TMS (Tyre MobilitySystem).

If a tyre needs to be changed the tools neces-sary are available at spare parts dealers:

● Jack,

● box spanner for wheel bolts,

● tool to remove wheel bolt caps

The tyres mounted on the vehicle are anti-puncture. The wheels should only bechanged when switching from summer towinter tyres or vice-versa. See ››› page 290

The vehicle only comes with the necessarytools for changing wheels if factory suppliedwith winter tyres. If this is not the case, youneed to go to a specialised workshop to getthe wheels changed.

You should only change the wheels yourself ifthe vehicle is parked in a safe place, you arefamiliar with the procedure and safety stand-ards and you have all the necessary tools!Otherwise, you should seek professional as-sistance.

WARNING

Changing a wheel can be dangerous, espe-cially on the hard shoulder. Please observethe following rules to minimise the risk of in-jury:

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park at a safe distance from surrounding traf-fic to change a wheel.

● When changing a wheel, keep all passen-gers, and particularly children, a safe dis-tance away from the work area.

● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.

● Ensure the ground on which you park is flatand solid. If necessary, support the jack on awide solid base.

● If you are changing a wheel yourself, youshould be familiar with the required proce-dure. Otherwise, you should seek professio-nal assistance.

● Only use suitable tools that are not dam-aged when changing a wheel.

● Always stop the engine, turn on the elec-tronic parking brake and place the gear selec-tor lever in position P, for an automatic gear-box, or engage a gear for a manual gearbox toreduce the risk of the vehicle moving acciden-tally.

● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a reli-able torque wrench.

WARNING

If the wheel trims are not appropriate or notfitted correctly, they could cause major acci-dents or damage.

● Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may comeoff while driving and endanger other roadusers.

● Damaged trims must never be mounted onthe wheels.

● Always ensure that the brake ventilationand cooling is not cut off or blocked. This isalso valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If thereis not enough air, you may require signifi-cantly longer braking distances.

CAUTION

Remove and remount wheel trims taking careto avoid damage to the vehicle.

84

Self-help

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*


The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

Once the sealant is in the tyre, make sure tocheck the pressure after 10 minutes driving.

If the vehicle has more than one damagedtyre, seek professional assistance. The tyremobility system is designed for filling onetyre.

Only use the tyre mobility system if the vehi-cle is properly parked, you know how to do itand the necessary safety measures, and ifyou have the right kit! Otherwise, you shouldseek professional assistance.

The tyre sealant should not be used in thefollowing cases:

● If the wheel is damaged.

● The outside temperature is lower than-20°C (-4°F).

● If the tear or puncture on the tyre is over 4mm wide.

● If you have driven with very low pressure ora flat tyre.

● If the expiry date on the bottle of tyre seal-ant has passed.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre at theroadside. Please observe the following rulesto minimise the risk of injury:

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park it at a safe distance from surroundingtraffic to fill the tyre.

● Ensure the ground is flat and firm.

● All occupants, and especially children,should always be at a safe distance outsidethe work area.

● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.

● Use the tyre mobility system only if you arefamiliar with the necessary procedures. Oth-erwise, you should seek professional assis-tance.

● Only use the tyre mobility system in theevent of an emergency to get to the nearestworkshop.

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-bility set as soon as possible.

● The sealant is hazardous for your healthand if it touches your skin, it must be imme-diately washed off.

● Keep children away from the tyre mobilitysystem.

● Never use a jack even if it is approved forthe vehicle.

● To reduce the risk of the vehicle possiblymoving on its own, always turn off the en-gine, set the electronic parking brake and putthe selector lever in position P or put intogear if the gearbox is a manual.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.

● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering.

● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.


Once used or expired, dispose of the sealantaccording to legal provisions.

Note

● Sealant bottles can be purchased fromSEAT dealers.

● Observe the usage instructions provided bythe snow chain manufacturer.

85

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility system*

Fig. 102 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The tyre mobility system is located under-neath the floor covering in the boot. It in-cludes the following components ››› Fig. 102:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ON/OFF switch

Air bleed screw1)

Tyre pressure monitoring1)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Tube for inflating tyres

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare insert for valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

WARNING

When inflating the tyre, the air compressorand the inflator tube may become hot.

● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

● Do not place the air compressor or inflatortube onto flammable materials while they arehot.

● Before storing the equipment, let it cool.

● If a minimum pressure of 2.0 bar(29 psi / 200 kPa) cannot be reached, the tyreis badly damaged. In this instance, the seal-ant will not be able to seal the tyre. Do notcontinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

The air compressor should be turned off aftera maximum of 8 minutes since otherwise itwill overheat. Before switching it on again, letit cool for a few minutes.

8

9

10

11

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 102 8 againand check the tyre pressure on the gauge 7 .

Equal to or below 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa):

● Stop driving! The tyre could not be suffi-ciently sealed with the tyre mobility system.

● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

Equal to or above 1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa):

● Correct the tyre pressure until the correctlevel is reached ››› page 284.

● Carefully head to the nearest specialisedworkshop at a maximum speed of 80 km/h(50 mph).

● Ask the workshop to change the damagedtyre.

WARNING

Driving with a tyre that cannot be sealed isdangerous and may lead to accidents and se-rious injury.

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressureis 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) or lower.

● Seek specialist assistance.

1) An inflator tube may also be included.86

Self-help

Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades


The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, thenoise of the water as it is wiped across thewindscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-larly. If the wipers scrape across the glassthey should be changed if they are damaged,or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

Damaged wiper blades should be replacedimmediately. These are available from quali-fied workshops.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibilityand increase the risk of accident and seriousinjury.

● Always replace damaged or worn blades orblades which do not clean the windscreencorrectly.

CAUTION

● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers couldscratch the glass.

● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.

● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.

● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it mayhelp to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-ers in service position ››› page 54.

● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.

● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Tow-starting and towing

Introduction


When towing, always respect legal require-ments.

For technical reasons, it is not possible totow a vehicle if the battery is flat.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles withthe Keyless Access system, the steeringwheel could lock ››› .

WARNING

A vehicle with a flat battery should never betowed.

● Never remove the key from the ignitionlock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lockcould suddenly lock. The vehicle would notbe controlled and a serious accident couldensue.

WARNING

When towing the vehicle, the handling andbraking efficiency change considerably.Please observe the following instructions tominimise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:

● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

– The brake must be depressed must hard-er as the brake servo does not operate. »

87

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Always remain aware to avoid collisionwith the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not op-erate when the engine is switched off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:

– Accelerate gently and carefully.

– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

– Brake well in advance than usual andbrake gently.

CAUTION

● Carefully fit and remove the towline anchor-age and its cover to avoid damage to the ve-hicle (e.g. paintwork).

● When towing, fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and cause damage!

Note

● The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-tronic parking brake and steering lock are de-activated. If the vehicle has no power supplyor there is an electric system fault, the en-gine must be started using jump leads to de-activate the electronic parking brake andelectronic steering lock.

● Vehicles with the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system should only be towedwith the ignition connected since, otherwise,the electronic steering lock will not unlock.

Fitting the front towline anchorage

Fig. 103 On the right-hand side of the frontbumper: Screw in the towline anchorage.

The location for the removable towline an-chorage is on the right-hand side of the frontbumper ››› Fig. 103.

The towline anchorage should always be keptin the vehicle.

Note the instructions for towing››› page 50.

To fit the towline anchorage

● Take the towline anchorage from the vehi-cle tool kit ››› page 82.

● Press on the upper cover and carefully re-move it forwards. Allow the cover to hang.

● Screw in the towline anchorage into its po-sition anticlockwise as far as it will go››› Fig. 103 ››› . Use a suitable tool to firmlytighten the towline anchorage in its location.

● After towing, remove the towline anchorageby turning it clockwise and put the coverback in place.

CAUTION

The towline anchorage must always be com-pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, itcould be released while towing and tow-start-ing.

Fitting the rear towline anchorage

Fig. 104 On the rear bumper, to the righthand side: Towline anchorage in position

The location for the removable towline an-chorage is on the right-hand side of the rearbumper ››› Fig. 104. For vehicles with a facto-ry fitted towing bracket, there is no fitting be-hind the cover to insert the towline anchor-age. For towing, fit and use the tow hitch››› page 234, ››› .

88

Self-help

Note the instructions for towing››› page 50.

Fitting the towline anchorage to the rear forvehicles without factory fitted tow hitch

● Take the towline anchorage from the vehi-cle tool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 82.

● Press on the upper cover and carefully re-move it back. This may require somestrength. Allow the cover to hang.

● Screw in the towline anchorage into its po-sition anticlockwise as far as it will go ››› .Use a suitable tool to firmly tighten the tow-line anchorage in its location.

● After towing, remove the towline anchorageby turning it clockwise and put the coverback in place.

CAUTION

● The towline anchorage must always becompletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise,it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

● Vehicles with a factory fitted towing brack-et, can only be used for towing with a towbar, specially designed to fit on a tow hitchball. Otherwise, the tow hitch ball and the ve-hicle may be damaged. Otherwise, a tow ropeshould be used.

Towing advice

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the techniquerequired for towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain.

While driving, avoid excessive traction forcesand jerking. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloadingand damaging the anchorage points.

If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warn-ing lights on and the ignition switched on,the turn signal may be used to indicatechanges of direction. Simply operate the turnsignal lever as usual. Meanwhile, the hazardwarning lights will go off. When the turn sig-nal lever is returned to the rest position, thehazard warning lights will be turned on auto-matically.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

● Leave the ignition on to avoid locking thesteering wheel, to release the electronicparking brake and to activate the turn sig-nals, the horn as well as the window wipersand window washers.

● As the power assisted steering does notwork if the engine is not running, you willneed more strength to steer than normally.

● The brake must be depressed must harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.

● Note the instructions and information con-tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi-cle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

● Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid sud-den manoeuvres.

● Brake well in advance than usual and brakegently.

● Note the instructions and information con-tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi-cle to be towed.

Emergency locking and unlock-ing

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully››› page 8, ››› page 10,››› page 13

The doors, rear lid and panoramic slidingsunroof can be locked manually and partiallyopened, for example if the key or the centrallocking is damaged. »

89

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.

● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped in thecar in an emergency and will not be able toget themselves to safety.

● Depending on the time of the year, temper-atures inside a locked and closed vehicle canbe extremely high or extremely low resultingin serious injuries and illness or even death,particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the pan-oramic sliding sunroof is dangerous and canlead to serious injury.

● Open and close the doors and the panor-amic sliding sunroof only when nobody is inthe way.

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergency,carefully disassemble components and thenreassemble them carefully to avoid damageto the vehicle.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Vehicle fuses


Due to the constant updating of vehicles,fuse assignments based on equipment andthe use of the same fuse for various electricalcomponents, it is not possible to provide anup-to-date summary of the fuse positions forthe electrical components at the time ofprinting this manual. For detailed informationabout the fuse positions, please consult atechnical service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system cangive serious electrical shocks, causing burnsand even death!

● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-tion system.

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-age (same colour and markings) and size.

● Never repair a fuse.

● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, stapleor similar.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electricsystem, before replacing a fuse always turnoff the ignition, the lights and all electricalelements and remove the key from the igni-tion.

● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to another partof the electrical system.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as they candamage the electrical system.

● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-ers and refit them correctly to avoid problemswith your vehicle.

90

Fuses and bulbs

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoidthe entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage tothe electrical system.

Note

● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. These shouldonly be changed by a specialised workshop.

● One component may have more than onefuse.

● Several components may run on a singlefuse.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain amount ofmanual skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom-mends that you consult a technical service orrequest assistance from a specialist. In gen-eral, a specialist is required if other vehiclecomponents must be removed or if the dis-charge bulbs must be replaced.

You should store spare light bulbs in the ve-hicle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbsmay be obtained from the technical services.In some countries, it is a legal requirement tocarry spare bulbs in the vehicle.

Driving with faults and blown bulbs on thevehicle exterior lighting is against the law.

Additional bulb specifications

The specifications of some headlamp bulbsand bulbs for the rear lamps fitted at the fac-tory may be different to those of conventionalbulbs. Bulb information is displayed on thebulb socket or on the bulb itself.

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle isnot clearly visible to other drivers, there is arisk of accident.

WARNING

Failure to replace bulbs correctly may causeserious accidents.

● Before carrying out any work in the enginecompartment please read and observe thewarnings ››› page 268. In any vehicle, the en-gine compartment is a hazardous area andcould cause severe injury.

● Discharge lamps work with high-voltageand can cause serious or fatal injury if han-dled incorrectly.

● H7 and discharge bulbs are highly pressur-ised and could explode when being changed.

● Only replace the bulbs concerned whenthey have cooled.

● Never replace bulbs alone if you are not fa-miliar with the operations necessary. If you

are not sure about procedures then visit aspecialised workshop to carry out the neces-sary work.

● Never touch the bulb glass directly. Finger-prints will be evaporated by the heat of theoperating bulb thus “fogging” up the reflec-tor.

● The headlamp frameworks in the enginecompartment and the rear lamps containsharp elements. Always protect your handswhen changing bulbs.

CAUTION

● After changing a bulb, if the rubber coversare not replaced correctly on the headlampframework, the electrical installation may bedamaged, especially if water is allowed to en-ter.

● Remove the ignition key before working onthe electric system. Otherwise, a short circuitcould occur.

● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.

● Take good care to avoid damaging any com-ponents.

91

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Control lamp

It lights up

A vehicle exteriorlighting bulb is notworking.

Replace the faulty bulb.


Checking the bulbs of a trailer

For vehicles with the factory fitted towingbracket, certain trailer lights are also control-led if the power socket is correctly connected.

A fault on a trailer turn signal is indicated onthe instrument panel by the turn signal blink-ing twice as fast ( or ) ››› page 128.

● General fault of all turn signals on one side.

● Fault in one rear light (on some models, al-so the registration light).

● Fault in two brake lights.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Controland warning lamps on page 105.

Note

A fault in the LED on the rear lights will not beindicated. However, if the fault affects all theLEDs then this will be indicated by the controllamp .

To replace halogen headlight bulbs

Fig. 105 In the engine compartment: left-hand side headlight lining. A dipped beamheadlights, B daytime driving lights and C

main beam headlights and side lights

Fig. 106 Left headlight.

There is no need to remove the headlight toreplace bulbs.

Complete operations only in the sequencegiven:

Turn signals (small bulb holder)

1. Open the bonnet ››› page 268.

2. Rotate the bulb holder 1 to the left all the wayand pull it out backwards together with the bulb.

3. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed di-rectly from the bulb holder or it may need to be ro-tated and then removed.

4. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb.

5. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotateto the right all the way.

Dipped beam A and daytime lights B


92

Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam A and daytime lights B

2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the head-light.

3. Rotate the bulb holder to the left all the way andpull it out backwards together with the bulb.



6. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotateto the right all the way.

7. Insert the rubber cover.

Main beam head-lights C

Side lights C


2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the head-light.

3. Press the wire clipdownwards and pull thebulb holder 2 out to-gether with the bulb.

Pull the bulb holder 3

out backwards togetherwith the bulb.



Main beam head-lights C

Side lights C

6. Place the bulb holder inthe headlight and pullthe wire clip upwardsuntil it clicks into place.

Place the bulb holder inthe headlight and insertcompletely.

7. Insert the rubber cover.

Note

The images show the left hand headlightfrom behind. The structure of the right handside headlight is symmetric.

To replace the xenon headlight bulb

Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: turn sig-nal indicator cover.

Fig. 108 Turn signal bulb holder 1 and turn-ing light 2 .

There is no need to remove the headlight toreplace bulbs.


Turn signals 1 Turning lights 2


2.Rotate the cover ››› Fig. 107 in the direction of the

arrow and remove it.

3.

Rotate the bulb holder1 ››› Fig. 108 to the

left all the way and pullit out backwards to-gether with the bulb.

Press the wire clipdownwards and pull thebulb holder 2

››› Fig. 108 out togetherwith the bulb.

4.Depending on the model, the bulb is removed di-rectly from the bulb holder or it may need to be ro-

tated and then removed.

5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. »

93

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Turn signals 1 Turning lights 2

6.

Place the bulb holder inthe headlight and ro-tate to the right all theway.

Place the bulb holder inthe headlight and pullthe wire clip upwardsuntil it clicks into place.

7.Rotate the cover ››› Fig. 107 in the opposite direc-

tion to the arrow as far as it will go.

Always seek the help of a specialist whenchanging the Xenon dipped beam and mainbeam headlamps ››› in Introduction onpage 91.

Note

The illustrations show the left hand head-light. The structure of the right hand sideheadlight is symmetric.

Replacing the front bumper bulbs

Fig. 109 On the right-hand side of the frontbumper: removing the headlights.

Fig. 110 Changing the bulbs in the head-lights


1.Pull the cover forwards, in the direction of the ar-row ››› Fig. 109.

2.Unscrew the attachment screw ››› Fig. 109 1 us-ing the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit››› page 82.

3.Tilt the headlight slightly forward and extract itfrom its lateral attachments ››› Fig. 110 (small ar-rows).

4.Release the connector ››› Fig. 110 1 and removeit.

5.Rotate the bulb holder ››› Fig. 110 2 to the left allthe way, in the direction of the arrow, and pull itout backwards together with the bulb.


7.Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotateto the right all the way.

8.Insert the connector ››› Fig. 110 1 on the bulbholder 2 . The connector must audibly click intoplace.

9.Place the headlight into its position ››› Fig. 110(small arrows) and tilt it backwards.

10.Tighten the attachment screw ››› Fig. 109 1 us-ing the screwdriver.

11. Replace the cover on the bumper ››› Fig. 109.

94

Fuses and bulbs

Replacing the rear lid bulbs

Fig. 111 On the rear lid: Remove the cover.

Fig. 112 On the rear lid: remove the bulb-holder.


1. Open the rear lid ››› page 122.

2.Extract the cover carefully using the flat part of thescrewdriver from the vehicle tool kit as a lever(››› Fig. 100) on the indent ››› Fig. 111 1 .

3.Release the bulb holder connector by pulling onthe red connector block.

4.Press on the attachment tabs in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 112 and pull out the bulb holder.


6.Install the bulb holder. The attachment tabs shouldaudibly click into place.

7. Insert the cover. The cover should lock into place.

Replacing the rear bulbs in the body

Fig. 113 On the side of the luggage compart-ment: removing the left and right hand siderear lights. 1 remove the cap; 2 attach-ment screw »

95

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Fig. 114 Rear lights in the body: Remove thebulb holder. 1 to 4 : Attachment tab

Complete operations only in the sequencegiven.

Removing the rear light units


Rear light, left Rear light, right

1. Open the rear lid ››› page 122.

2.

Open the storage com-partments on the left-hand side of the lug-gage compartment››› page 163.

Move the 12 V powersocket support bypressing gently down-wards ››› Fig. 113 B

(arrow).

3.Rotate the cap 1 90°in the direction of thearrow and remove it.


4.Unscrew the attachment screw ››› Fig. 113 2 us-

ing the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit››› page 82. The bolt is secured in its position.

5.Extract the rear light from the bodywork by careful-

ly pulling backwards.

6.Pull the red strip on the connector and extract the

connector.

7.Disassemble the tail light unit and place it on a

flat, clean surface.

To change the bulb

8.To release the bulb holder, press on the attach-ment tabs ››› Fig. 114 1 to 4 in the direction ofthe arrow.

9. Remove the bulb holder from the rear light unit.


11.Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit. The at-tachment tabs should audibly click into place.

12.Insert the connector and press the red attachmentstrip in so that the connector is locked into place.

Assembling the rear light units



13.Carefully insert the tail light unit into the openingin the bodywork. To do this, insert the upper rear

light unit guide into the attachment ring.

14.Tighten the white attachment screw using the

screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit.

15.Ensure that the tail light unit has been correctly

fitted and is firmly secured.

16.

Replace the cap››› Fig. 113 1 and ro-tate it 90° in the oppo-site direction of the ar-row.

Move the 12 V powersocket support up-wards gently until it iscorrectly closed.

17.Close the storage com-partment.

18. Close the rear lid ››› page 122.

96

Fuses and bulbs

Changing the number plate light

Fig. 115 On the rear bumper: number platelights

Fig. 116 Number plate light: Remove the bulbholder.


Fixed number plate

lightBolted number plate

light

1.

Press the flat part of thescrewdriver included inthe vehicle on-boardtools (››› Fig. 100) in thedirection of the arrow,in the groove of thenumber plate light››› Fig. 115.

Unscrew the numberplate light screws usingthe screwdriver fromthe vehicle tool kit(››› Fig. 100).

2. Detach the number plate light.

3.

Press on the connectorlock in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 116

1 and pull out theconnector.

Separate the attach-ment tabs from the rearpanel of the numberplate light by pressing.

4.

Rotate the bulb holderin the direction of thearrow ››› Fig. 116 2

and extract it togetherwith the bulb.

Take the bulb holderout of the number platelight.


6.

Insert the bulb holderinto the number platelight and rotate all theway in the opposite di-rection to the arrow››› Fig. 116 2 .

Insert the bulb holderinto the number platelight.

7.Plug the connector intothe bulb holder.

Press on the attach-ment tabs. The bulbholder must be firmlyattached to the numberplate light.

Fixed number plate

lightBolted number plate

light

8.Insert the number plate light carefully into the

opening on the bumper. Ensure that the numberplate light is in the correct position.

9.

Insert the number platelight into the bumperuntil it audibly clicks in-to place.

Tighten the attachmentscrews for the numberplate light using thescrewdriver.

97

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Fig. 117 Dash panel.

98

General instrument panel

Operation


Instrument panel

Interior door release lever . . . . . . . . . 119

Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . 112

Switch for adjusting the exteriormirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

– Exterior mirror adjustment

– Heated exterior mirrors

– Folding exterior mirrors

Instrument panel controls and light-ing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Headlamp range adjustment . . . 128

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

– Light off --

– Automatic dipped beam head-light control --

– Side/dipped lights

– Fog lights

Lever for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

– Main beam headlights

– Headlight flasher

– Turn signals

– Parking lights

Instrument panel:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

– Digital display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

– Warning and indication lamps . . . 105

Steering wheel with horn and

– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

– On-board computer controls . . . . 26

– Controls for radio, telephone,navigation and speech dialoguesystem ››› Booklet Radio

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 195

Windscreen wiper/ windscreenwash lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

– Windscreen wipers –

– Intermittent wipe

– “Brief wipe” x

– Windscreen wipers

– Automatic windscreen wash/wipe

– Rear window wiper

– Automatic rear windowwash/wipe

– Lever with buttons for controllingthe SEAT information system - ,/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Left seat heating controls . . . . . . . 144

Radio or navigation system (fittedat factory) ››› Booklet Radio or››› Booklet Navigation system

9

10

11

12

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Hazard warning lights switch . . . 82

Switches for:

– Electronic manual air condition-ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

– Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Right seat heating controls . . . . . 144

Button for:

– Anti-slip regulation (ASR) . . 187

– Start-Stop operation . . . . . . . . . . 205

– Parking distance warning system(Park Pilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

– Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 211

– Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . 231

– Dynamic chassis control (DCC)

– Opening the rear lid . . . . . . . . . 122

– Opening and closing of electricsliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Locking lever to open glove com-partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Position of passenger front airbagon the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Key-operated switch in glove com-partment for deactivating front pas-senger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Passenger front airbag off warninglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Lever for: »

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

99

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

12 volt power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Auto Hold Switch - . . . . . . . . 205

Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-cess closing and start-up system)

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

23

24

25

26

27

28

Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Fuse box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Lever for:

– Cruise Control System (CCS) – – – – – . . 219

Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Controls for:

– Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

– Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

29

30

31

32

33

Note

● Some of the items of equipment listed hereare fitted only on certain model versions orare optional extras.

● In versions with the steering wheel on theright, the layout of the control elements issomewhat different. But the symbols as-signed to the controls correspond to the sym-bols used in the versions with the steeringwheel on the left

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 118 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 118: Clock set button1).1 – Press button to select the hour orminute display.

100


– To continue setting, press 0.0 / SET

››› Fig. 118 7 . Hold button down toscroll through the numbers quickly.

– Press button again to end the clocksetting.

Rev counter (with the engine running, inthousands of revolutions per minute).

Together with the gear-change indicator,the rev counter offers you the possibilityof using the engine of your vehicle at asuitable speed. The start of the red area››› Fig. 118 indicates the maximum en-gine speed working at operating temper-ature. However, it is advisable to changeup a gear or move the selector lever to D(or lift your foot off the accelerator) beforethe needle reaches the red zone ››› . Werecommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations onthe gear-change indicator. Consult theadditional information in ››› page 196.

Engine coolant temperature display ››› page 274.

Displays on the screen ››› page 101.

Fuel reserve display ››› page 261.

Speedometer.

Reset knob for trip recorder (trip).

2

3

4

5

6

7

– Press button 0.0 / SET to reset to zero.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in the redzone for a short period of time.


Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-sumption and noise.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 118 4 , de-pending on the vehicle equipment:

● Warning and information text.

● Mileage.

● Time.

● Outside temperature.

● Compass.

● Selector lever positions ››› page 192.

● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)››› page 192.

● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus fordifferent setting options ››› page 26.

● Service interval display ››› page 103.

● Second speed display (menu Configura-tion) ››› page 26.

● Start-Stop operation indicator ››› page 102.

Warning and information texts

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults in the operation are displayed on thescreen using red and yellow symbols andmessages on the instrument panel display(››› page 105) and, in some cases, with audi-ble warnings. The display may vary accordingto the type of instrument panel fitted. »

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is alsopossible to set the time using the settings menuon the instrument panel display ››› page 30.

101

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Control andwarning lamps on page 105 !Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings.A function fault, or fluids which are below the correctlevels may cause damage to the vehicle ››› in Controland warning lamps on page 105 !Check the faulty operation as soon as possible. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.

Mileage

The odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distancetravelled since the last odometer reset. Thelast digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4°C(+39°F), the symbol “ice crystal” (warning ofrisk of freezing) is also displayed next to the

temperature. At first this symbol flashes andthen it remains lit until the outside tempera-ture rises above +6°C (+43°F) ››› .

When the vehicle is at a standstill, with theauxiliary heating on (››› page 177), or whentravelling at very low speeds, the tempera-ture displayed may be higher than the trueoutside temperature, as a result of the heatproduced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys-tem on, the cardinal point corresponding tothe vehicle's direction of travel is displayedon the instrument panel ››› page 103.

Selector lever positions

The range of engaged gears of the selectorlever is shown on the side of the lever, andon the instrument panel display. In positionsD and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corre-sponding gear is also displayed.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuelis displayed on the instrument panel whileyou are driving ››› page 192.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speedcan also be displayed in a different unit ofmeasurement (in miles or in km per hour). Tochange the units, in the Settings menu, se-lect the option Second speed››› page 26.

Vehicles without menu display on the instru-ment panel

● Switch on the engine.

● Press button three times. The odometerdisplay flashes on the instrument panel dis-play.

● Press button 0.0 / SET once. “mph”or “km/h” is displayed briefly instead of theodometer.

● This activates the second speed display. Toswitch it off, repeat the procedure.

This option cannot be deactivated in modelsdestined for countries in which the secondspeed must always be visible.

Start-Stop operating display.

Updated information relating to the status isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 205.

WARNING


102


WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are abovefreezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.

● At outside temperatures above +4°C(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”is not visible, there may still be patches of iceon the road.

● Do not rely on the outside temperature in-dicator!

Note

● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versions andinstructions on the display may vary. In thecase of displays without warning or informa-tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively bythe warning lamps.

● When several warnings are active at thesame time, the symbols are shown succes-sively for a few seconds and will stay on untilthe fault is rectified.

Compass*

Fig. 119 Magnetic zones

The compass does not require calibration invehicles for which the navigation system wasmounted at the factory. The option compassdisappears.

The compass in vehicles in which the naviga-tion system was not mounted at the factory,is permanently and automatically calibrated.If electronic or metal accessories (mobilephone, television) are subsequently mountedin the vehicle, the compass should be recali-brated manually.

Adjusting the magnetic zone


● Select the Settings menu followed by theoption Compass and Zone.

● Select the magnetic zone corresponding tothe position of the vehicle ››› Fig. 119.

● Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone(1-15).

Calibrating compass

To calibrate the compass you must be in oneof the valid magnetic zones with sufficientspace to be able to trace a circumferencewith the vehicle.


● Select the Settings menu followed by theoption Compass and Calibrate.

● Confirm the message Describe a com-plete circumference to calibratethe compass with OK and then trace acomplete circumference driving at approxi-mately 10 km/h (6 mph).

When the corresponding cardinal point is dis-played, the calibration is complete.

Service interval display

The service indication is shown on the dashpanel display ››› Fig. 118 4 .

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (Interval Service) and serv-ices without engine oil change (InspectionService). The service interval display onlygives information for service dates which in-volve an engine oil change. The dates for the »

103

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

other services (e.g. the next Inspection Serv-ice or change of brake fluid) are listed on thelabel attached to the door strut, or in theMaintenance Programme.

In vehicles with Services established by timeor mileage, the service intervals are alreadypre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Technicalprogress has made it possible to considera-bly reduce servicing requirements. The tech-nology used by SEAT ensures that your vehi-cle only has an Interval Service when it isnecessary. To establish when the IntervalService is due (max. 2 years), the vehicle'sconditions of use and individual drivingstyles are considered. The service pre-warn-ing first appears 20 days before the date es-tablished for the corresponding service. Thekilometres (miles) remaining until the nextservice are always rounded up to the nearest100 km (miles) and the time is given in com-plete days. The current service message can-not be viewed until 500 km after the lastservice. Prior to this only lines are visible onthe display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, whenthe ignition is switched on a Service remind-er is displayed.

In vehicles without text messages, a spanneris displayed on the instrument panel witha figure given in km. The number of kilome-tres shown is the maximum number that maybe driven until the next service. After a fewseconds, the display mode changes. A clocksymbol appears and the number of days untilthe next service appointment is due.

In vehicles with text messages, Service in--- km (miles) or --- days is dis-played on the instrument panel.

Service due

After the service date, an audible warning isgiven when the ignition is switched on andthe spanner displayed on the screen flashesfor a few seconds . In vehicles with textmessages, Service in --- km or ---days is displayed on the instrument panel.

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

● Press the button on the instrument pan-el several times until the spanner symbol isdisplayed .

● OR: select the Settings menu.

● From the Service submenu, select the op-tion Info.

When the service date has past, a minus signis displayed in front of the number of kilome-tres or days. In vehicles with text messagesthe following is displayed: Service ---km (miles) or --- days ago.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a techni-cal service centre, the display can be reset asfollows:

In vehicles with text messages:

Select the Settings menu.

In the submenu Service, select the option Reset.

Confirm with OK when requested to do so by the sys-tem.

In vehicles without text messages:

Switch the ignition off.

Press and hold the 0.0 / SET button.

Switch the ignition back on.

Release the 0.0 / SET button and, press for the next20 seconds.

Do not reset the indicator to zero betweentwo intervals, otherwise the display will beincorrect.

If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For this

104


reason we recommend that the service inter-val display be reset by a SEAT authorisedservice ››› Booklet Maintenance schedule.

Note

● The service message disappears after a fewseconds, when the engine is started or whenOK is pressed.

● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnected fora long period of time, it is not possible to cal-culate the date of the next service. Thereforethe service interval display may not be cor-rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximumservice intervals permitted in the ››› Book-let Maintenance Programme.

Control lamps



The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-tions. Some control and warning lamps comeon when the ignition is switched on, andswitch off when the engine starts running, orwhile driving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrument

panel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 100, Instruments.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or maycause accidents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-sure that there are no highly flammable ma-terials under the vehicle that could come intocontact with the exhaust system (e.g. drygrass, fuel).

● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users. Ifnecessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-vise other drivers.

● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.

● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is ahazardous area and could cause severe inju-ries ››› page 268.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

105

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Communications and multimedia

Steering wheel controls*

Operating the audio system + telephone

Fig. 120 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to controlthe audio, telephone and radio/navigation

functions without needing to distract thedriver.

● control of the available audio functions (ra-dio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) andthe Bluetooth system from the steeringwheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

ATurn: Turn volume up/down

Press: MuteTurn: Turn volume up/down

Press: PauseTurn: Turn volume up/down



Press: Mute

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.106


Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

B

Short press: access to the tele-phone menu on the dash pan-

ela).Hold down: rediala)





Short press: answer/hang upcalls, enable/open the tele-

phone menu.Hold down: reject incoming

call/switch to private mode orreturn to hands-free mode/re-

dial



C Search for last stationShort press: switch to the previ-

ous songHold down: quick rewind

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex-cept AUX )

D Search for the next stationShort press: switch to the next

songHold down: fast forward

No function No functionb) Radio/media functionality (ex-cept AUX )

E , FChange menu on instrument

panelChange menu on instrument




panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

H

Turn: Next/previous presetc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Next/previous songc)

Press: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the instrumentpanel menu depending on posi-

tionPress: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the instrumentpanel menu depending on po-

sitionPress: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

Turn: Acts upon the instrumentpanel menu depending on po-

sitionPress: Acts on the MFD or con-firms the menu option of thedash panel depending on the

menu option

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

107

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 121 Front centre armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-put.

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connec-tion.

The USB/AUX-IN input is in the front centrearmrest ››› Fig. 121.

The operating description is located in the re-spective Instruction Manuals of the audiosystem or the navigation system.

Comfort mobile phone

Fig. 122 The phone holder used for connect-ing the mobile phone to the car aerial is loca-ted in the front centre armrest.

Depending on the special features and thecountry, the vehicle may have the Comfortmobile phone system, with a connection tothe vehicle's external aerial ››› Booklet MediaSystem Plus.

This system is located in the front centre arm-rest compartment.

Three button unit in headliner

Three button unit*

Fig. 123 Three button unit in headliner: con-trols for the telephone management system.

Function

Press it briefly: to accept or end a call.Press the button: to reject a call.

Press it briefly: to start or stop the voice con-trol function, for example, to make a call.a)

Press the button for more than 2 seconds: toobtain information about the SEAT brand andselected additional services related to trafficand travel.

108


Function

Press the button for more than 2 seconds: toobtain help from the network of SEAT dealersin the event of a breakdown.

a) Not operational if a SEAT Media system 2.2 navigation systemwith voice control is fitted.

Information and assistance calls

Communication with the SEAT Customer CareService is established using the and but-tons of the three button unit1). The systemwill automatically connect you with the Assis-tance Centre of the relevant country. You willonly be able to make calls if your mobile isturned on and connected to the pre-installedBluetooth.

Information call

The Information call button offers in-formation on the SEAT brand and selectedadditional services related to traffic and yourtravel.

To establish communication, press the but-ton for more than 2 seconds.

In countries where there is no information tel-ephone number, an information call is madeafter pressing the button.

Assistance call

The assistance call button gives im-mediate help in case of a breakdown. To thisend, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobileassistance vehicles, is at your disposal.

To establish communication, press the button for more than 2 seconds.

Note

Calls made with the and buttons take pri-ority over normal calls. If the or button ispressed during a normal telephone call, thiscall will be cut off and a connection will bemade to the information or assistance centre.

Note

Any call made to the information service willbe interrupted if the assistance button ispressed. The connection to the assistanceservice will then be made (and vice versa).

Note

Mobile phone coverage must be available toplace a call to the information and assistanceservices. This service might not be availablein some countries.

Activating and deactivating

Switching on the speech control system

● Press the button on the multi-functionsteering wheel.

● OR: press the button in the three buttonunit in the headliner .

● Wait for the acoustic signal.

● Give the command.

● Follow the dialogue instructions (extendeddialogue).

Ending voice control

● Press the button on the multi-functionsteering wheel.


Interrupting the instructions

● During the instructions, press the buttonon the multi-function steering wheel.


● You will be able to give a command imme-diately afterwards.

1) Depending upon country.109

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Opening and closing

Vehicle key set

Vehicle key

Fig. 124 Vehicle keys

Fig. 125 Vehicle key for vehicles with electricsliding doors

Vehicle keys

With the vehicle key ››› Fig. 124 or ››› Fig. 125the vehicle may be locked or unlocked re-motely.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-teries. The receiver is in the interior of the ve-hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re-mote control and new batteries is several me-tres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi-cle using the remote control key, this shouldbe re-synchronised ››› page 112 or the bat-tery changed ››› page 111.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Folding the key shaft in and out

When the button is pressed A , the key shaftis released and unfolds.

To fold it press button A and fold the keyshaft in until it locks in place.

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip andbe coded with the data from the vehicle elec-tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not workif it does not contain a microchip or the mi-crochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a technical service centre, aspecialised workshop or approved key serv-ice qualified to provide this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchron-ised before use ››› page 112.

WARNING

Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys mayresult in severe injury and accident.

● Always take all the keys with you wheneveryou leave the vehicle. Children and unauthor-ised individuals could lock the doors or theboot hatch, start the engine or turn on the ig-nition, activating electrical systems, the elec-tric windows, for example.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped in thecar in an emergency and will not be able toget themselves to safety. For example, de-pending on the time of the year, tempera-tures inside a locked and closed vehicle canbe extremely high or extremely low resultingin serious injuries and illness or even death,particularly for young children.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. The steering maylock and it will not be possible to turn thesteering wheel.

110

Opening and closing

CAUTION

All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com-ponents. Protect them from damage, impactsand humidity.

Note

● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing the but-ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlockthe vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos-sible even when you are outside the radius ofaction.

● Key operation can be greatly influenced byoverlapping radio signals around the vehicleworking in the same range of frequencies(e.g. radio transmitters, mobile telephones).

● Obstacles between the remote control andthe vehicle, bad weather conditions anddraining batteries can considerably reducethe range of the remote control.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

Fig. 126 Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 126 (arrow)once briefly. If the button is pressed andheld, the indicator blinks several times (e.g.for the convenience opening function).

When the control lamp does not light uponpushing a button, the batteries of the keymust be changed ››› page 111.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 127 Vehicle key: battery compartmentcover

Fig. 128 Vehicle key: removing the battery

SEAT recommend having the batterieschanged in a specialised workshop.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover ››› Fig. 127.

When changing the battery, use another bat-tery of the same model and observe the po-larity when fitting it ››› . »

111

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

To change the battery

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 110.

● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 127 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .

● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 128.

● Place the new battery in the compartment,pressing in the direction of the arrow asshown ››› Fig. 128 ››› .

● Fit the battery compartment cover, pressingin the direction of the arrow as shown››› Fig. 127 until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● If the battery is not changed correctly, thevehicle key may be damaged.

● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.


● Please dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environment.

● The vehicle key battery may contain per-chlorate. Observe the legal requirements fortheir disposal.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the vehicle key mustbe synchronised once more as follows:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 110.

● Remove the cover from the driver door han-dle ››› page 89.

● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.

● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key shaft.

● Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key.The key has been synchronised.

● Replace the driver door handle cover.

Central locking and lockingsystem

Introduction


Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut.If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access closingand ignition system, it may only be lockedwith the ignition off and the driver's doorclosed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked fora long period (e.g. in a private garage) mayrun down and fail to start the motor.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the central locking sys-tem may cause serious injuries.

● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individual fromopening the doors and accessing the vehicle.Nevertheless, in case of emergency or acci-dent, locked doors will complicate access tothe vehicle interior to help the passengers.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central locking but-ton can be used to lock all the doors fromwithin. Therefore, passengers will be lockedinside the vehicle. Individuals locked in thevehicle can be exposed to very high or verylow temperatures.


● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

112

Opening and closing

Description of the central locking sys-tem

The central locking system allows all doorsand the rear lid to be locked and unlockedcentrally.

● From outside, using the vehicle key.

● From outside with the Keyless Access sys-tem ››› page 115,

● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 114.

In the submenu Convenience in the Con-figuration menu, or by visiting a special-ised workshop, special functions of the cen-tral locking system can be switched on or off››› page 26.

In case of a vehicle key fault or central lock-ing system fault, all doors can be locked orunlocked manually.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)

In this instance, the vehicle locks automati-cally when moving at speeds above approx.15 km/h (10 mph) ››› page 26. When thevehicle is locked, the control lamp of thecentral locking button ››› Fig. 130 lights up inyellow.

Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)

When the key is removed from the ignitionslot, here the vehicle unlocks all doors andthe boot automatically ››› page 26.

Locking the vehicle after the airbags havebeen deployed

If the airbags are deployed due to an acci-dent, the vehicle will be automatically andcompletely unlocked. Depending on theamount of damage, it can be locked follow-ing an accident in the following ways:

Function Action

Lock the vehicleby pushing thecentral lockingbutton:

– Switch off the ignition.– Open a door of the vehicle andclose it again.– Push the central locking button .

Lock the vehiclewith the vehiclekey:

– Disconnect the ignition button.OR: remove the key from the igni-tion.– Open a door once.– Lock the vehicle with the key.

Note

If the vehicle key buttons are pressed››› Fig. 129 or one of the central locking but-tons is pressed ››› Fig. 130 several times inquick succession, the central locking featureis disabled briefly to protect from overload-ing. The vehicle will then remain unlocked foraround 30 seconds. If no door nor the boot is

opened during this time, the vehicle will thenautomatically unlock.

Unlocking and locking the vehiclefrom outside

Fig. 129 Buttons on the vehicle key

Function Handling the buttons onthe vehicle

Unlocking the vehicle. Press button . Keep itpushed for the convenienceopening.

Lock the vehicle. Press button . Keep it push-ed for the convenience lock-ing function. »

113

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Function Handling the buttons onthe vehicle

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button .

Open the sliding door. ››› page 119.

Please note: depending on the selected func-tion in the central locking submenu Conven-ience, you may push the button twice ››› page 26 to unlock all doors and theboot hatch.

The vehicle key only locks and unlocks thevehicle if it is within range of the vehicle andif the batteries have enough power. Whenlocking, the vehicle's turn signals will blink.

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the key. If you unlock the vehi-cle without opening any doors or the rear lid,it will lock again automatically after a fewseconds. This function prevents the vehiclefrom remaining unlocked if the unlockingbutton is pressed by mistake.

Convenience open/close function

● See "Electric windows: functions"››› page 125.

● See "Panoramic sliding sunroof: operation"››› page 126.

Unlocking and locking the vehiclefrom inside

Fig. 130 In the driver door: central lockingbutton

Push the ››› Fig. 130 button:

Unlocking the vehicle.

Locking the vehicle.

The central locking button is still operativewhen the ignition is switched off.

The central locking button is only deactivatedif the deadlock is activated ››› page 117.

Please note the following when you use thecentral locking button to lock your vehicle:

● Do not turn on the deadlock ››› page 117.

● Do not turn on the anti-theft alarm.

● It will not be possible to open the doors orthe rear lid from the outside. This may offer

extra safety, for example when stopped attraffic lights.

● The doors can be opened and unlocked in-dividually from the inside by pulling the in-side door handle. If necessary, pull the doorrelease lever twice.

● The driver door cannot be locked whenopen. This avoids locking the vehicle key in-side the vehicle when there is nobody inside.

114

Opening and closing

Locking and unlocking the vehiclewith Keyless Access

Fig. 131 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: in the proximity of the car.

Fig. 132 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: sensor surface A for unlocking in-side the door handle and sensor surface B

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. For this, only a

valid vehicle key is required to be in an areanear ››› Fig. 131 the vehicle and one of thesensor surfaces to be touched on the doorhandles ››› Fig. 132.

General information

If a valid key is located in the proximity of thecar ››› Fig. 131, the Keyless Access lock andignition system gives the key entry as soonas one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles is touched or the push button on theboot hatch is operated. The following fea-tures are then available without having touse the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle withthe handles on the four doors or the buttonlocated on the boot hatch.

● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. Forthis to occur, there has to be a valid key in-side the vehicle and the ignition push buttonneeds to be pressed ››› page 182.

● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle withone of the four door handle.

The central locking and locking systems oper-ate in the same way as a normal locking andunlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; lockingby a single flash.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry)

● Grip the door handle. In doing this, thesensor surface ››› Fig. 132 A (arrow) istouched on the handle and the vehicle un-locks.

● Open the door.

On vehicles without a "safe" system: lockingand unlocking doors (Keyless-Exit)


● Close the driver's door.

● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow)on the door handle. The door being operatedmust be closed.

On vehicles with a "safe" security system:locking and unlocking doors (Keyless-Exit)


● Close the driver's door.

● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow)on the door handle. The vehicle locks withthe "safe" security system ››› page 117. Thedoor being operated must be closed.

● Touch the sensor surface B twice (arrow)on the door handle to lock the vehicle with-out the "safe" security system ››› page 117. »

115

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto-matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 131there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.

Open or close the hatch normally››› page 122.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically.In the following instances, the rear lid doesnot lock automatically after closing:

● If the entire vehicle is unlocked.

● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. Allvehicle indicator lights flash four times. Thevehicle will lock again after a few seconds ifno door or boot hatch are opened.

Locking the vehicle with a second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a secondvehicle key, the key inside the vehicle isblocked for engine ignition ››› page 182. Inorder to enable engine ignition, the button on the key inside the vehicle needs to bepressed ››› Fig. 129.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensor onthe passenger door is automatically disa-bled.

If the exterior sensor on the door handle isoften activated unusually with the vehicle

locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rub-bing against it), all proximity sensors are dis-abled for a time. If this only happens with theexterior sensor on the driver's door, only thissensor is disabled.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.

● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.

● OR: if the boot is opened.

Convenience functions

To close all electric windows, the sun roofand electric tilting panoramic roof with theconvenience feature, keep your finger for afew seconds on the lock sensor surface››› Fig. 132 B located on the exterior part ofthe driver or passenger door handle until thewindows and roof close.

Opening the doors by touching the sensorsurface on the handle takes places in accord-ance with the settings activated on the menuConfiguration - Convenience››› page 26.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehicle keyin the nearby area. If at least one of the win-dows is open and the sensor surface B on

one of the handle permanently activates, allwindows will close. If the water jet or steamis briefly moved away from the sensor sur-face A on one of the handles and then poin-ted at it again, all the windows will probablyopen ››› page 116, Convenience functions.

Note

● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-ly out of charge, it is likely that the vehiclewill not be able to be lock or unlocked withthe Keyless Access system. The vehicle canbe unlocked or locked manually ››› page 89.

● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle orthe system fails to detect one, a warning willdisplay on the dash panel screen. This couldhappen if any other radio frequency signal in-terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-bile device accessory) or if the key is coveredby another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-er of salt, how the sensors on the door han-dles operate may be affected. If this is thecase, wash the vehicle ››› page 250.

● If the vehicle is equipped with an automaticgearbox, it may only be locked in the gearstick is in position P.

116

Opening and closing

"Safe" security system

Function Necessary operations

Locks the vehicle withthe "Safe" security sys-tem.

Press the button once onthe vehicle key.

Locks the vehicle with-out the "Safe" securitysystem.

Press the button twice onthe vehicle key.

Touch the Keyless Accessclose and ignition lock sensorsurface located on the exteri-or part of the door handletwice ››› page 115.

Press the central locking but-ton on the driver dooronce.

Depending on the vehicle, when disablingthe ignition, a warning on the dash panelscreen may display stating that the "safe" se-curity system is activated (Lock SAFE orSAFELOCK).

Disabling the "safe" security system

The "safe" security system may be disable inone of the following ways:

● Press the button on the vehicle keytwice.

● Touch the Keyless Access close and igni-tion lock sensor surface located on the exteri-or part of the door handle twice ››› page 115.


● Press the ignition push button of theKeyless Access lock and ignition system.

When the “safe” security system is disabled,the following needs to be taken into account:

● The vehicle can be opened and unlockedfrom the inside using an inside door handle.

● The anti-theft alarm is activated.

● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe anti-tow system are disabled.

WARNING

Careless use of the “Safe” security systemcan cause serious injury.

● Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if ithas been locked using the key. When the"Safe" security system is activated, doorscannot be opened from the inside!

● When the doors are locked, it is difficult toget to passengers in the vehicle interior incase of an emergency. Passengers could re-main trapped inside and unable to unlock thedoors in case of an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds accompanied by opticalwarning signals for about five minutes whenthe vehicle is locked and the following unau-thorised actions are taken:

● When the door is mechanically unlockedusing the vehicle key without turning the ig-nition within the following 15 seconds.

● A door is opened.

● The bonnet is opened.

● The rear lid is opened.

● When the ignition is switched on with anon-authorised key.

● When the vehicle battery is disconnected.

● When there is movement inside the vehicle(vehicles with interior monitoring).

● When the vehicle is towed (vehicles withanti-tow system)

● When the vehicle is lifted (vehicles with an-ti-tow system).

● Transporting the vehicle on a ferry or byrailroad (vehicles with an anti-tow system orinterior monitoring).

● Unhitch a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm ››› page 234.

How to turn OFF the alarm

Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking buttonon the key or turn on the ignition with a valid »

117

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

key. On vehicles with the Keyless Access sys-tem, the alarm can also be disabled by grasp-ing the door handle ››› page 115.

Note

● The alarm will be triggered once more whenanybody enters the same zone of surveillanceor any other zone. If, for example, after open-ing a door, the rear lid is also opened.

● The anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked from within using thecentral locking button .

● If the driver door is unlocked mechanicallywith the key, only the driver door is unlocked,the rest of the doors remain locked. Onlywhen the ignition has been turned on will theother doors be available - but not unlocked -and the central locking button will be activa-ted.

● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-rectly.

Vehicle interior monitoring systemand anti-tow system*

Fig. 133 On the roof console: interior moni-toring sensors

The interior monitoring system triggers thealarm if the vehicle is locked and movementis detected inside the vehicle. The anti-towsystem triggers the alarm if the vehicle islocked when the system detects the vehicleis being raised.

Switching on the interior monitoring and theanti-tow systems

Close the storage compartment ››› Fig. 1331 on the roof console, otherwise the interior

monitoring function (arrow) is not guaran-teed to work freely.

Use the key to lock the vehicle. If the anti-theft alarm is turned on, the interior monitor-ing and the anti-tow systems are also activa-ted.

Switching off the interior monitoring and theanti-tow systems

The interior monitoring is switched off bypressing the remote control lock button twice.

● Lock all doors and rear lid.

● Use the key to lock the vehicle. The interiormonitoring and / or anti-towing alarm areswitched off until the next time the vehicle islocked.

To turn off the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems before unlocking the vehicle, forexample in the following situations:

● When leaving animals inside the vehicle ››› page 112.

● When the vehicle must be loaded.

● When the vehicle is being transported, forexample, by ferry.

● When the vehicle must be towed with theaxle raised.

Risk of false alarms

The interior monitoring system will only oper-ate correctly if the vehicle is completelyclosed. Observe legal requirements. Thealarm may be accidentally triggered in thefollowing cases:

● When a window is completely or partiallyopen.

118

Opening and closing

● If the sunglasses storage compartment inthe roof console is open.

● When the panoramic sliding sunroof iscompletely or partially open.

● When suspended objects are hung fromthe interior mirror (air freshener) or there areloose papers in the vehicle.

● If the separation net is fitted and moves(due to heating).

● Due to a vibrating mobile telephone insidethe vehicle.

Note

Upon activating the alarm, if any door or therear lid is open, only the anti-theft alarm willbe activated. The interior monitoring and an-ti-tow systems will only be activated whenthe doors and rear lid are fully closed.

Doors

Introduction

WARNING

If a door is not correctly closed, it could openunexpectedly when driving and cause seriousinjuries.

● Always stop immediately and close thedoor.

● When closing, ensure that the door hasclosed correctly. A closed door should beflush with the corresponding parts of thebodywork.

● Open and close doors only when nobody isin the way of the door.

WARNING

A door held open by its retainer could beblown closed by the wind or close if the vehi-cle is on a hill, causing injury.

● When opening and closing doors, alwaysuse the door handle.

Warning lamp

It lights up

At least one vehi-cle door is open ornot correctly shut.

Stop driving immediately!Open the corresponding door andclose it immediately.


If a door is open or incorrectly closed, thewarning lamp or on the instrument pan-el will light up.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-bol may be displayed on the dash panel

screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-cation is also visible when the ignition isswitched off. The indication disappearsaround 15 seconds after the vehicle hasbeen locked.

Sliding doors

Introduction

WARNING

If a sliding door is not correctly closed, itcould open unexpectedly when driving andcause serious injuries.

● Stop immediately and close it.

● When closing, ensure that the sliding doorhas closed correctly. A closed sliding doorshould be flush with the corresponding partsof the bodywork.

● Only open and close sliding doors when nobody is in the way of the door.

WARNING

If a sliding door is not fully open, it couldclose unexpectedly and cause serious inju-ries.

● Always open the sliding door fully. »

119

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Opening sliding doors while driving is dan-gerous. These doors may be pushed open orclosed when the vehicle accelerates or brakesand cause serious injuries.

● Never open the sliding doors when the ve-hicle is in movement.

Manually opening and closing thesliding door

Fig. 134 On the sliding door. door handle 1


Open the slidingdoor from the in-side.

When the sliding door is released,open the door fully by pulling on theoutside handle.


Opening thesliding doorfrom the inside.

When the sliding door is released,open the door fully by pulling on itsinterior handle ››› Fig. 134 1 .

Closing the slid-ing door.

Pull on the inside or outside doorhandle and close the sliding door bypushing gently. Make sure that it iscompletely closed.

Electric opening and closing of thesliding door*

Fig. 135 On the dash panel, on the remotecontrol key and on the interior lining of thesliding door: button for opening and closingthe electric sliding door.

All of the electric sliding doors can beopened and closed manually using moreforce.


Opens thesliding doorelectrically.

Press the ››› Fig. 135 button on the dashpanel, on the remote control key and onthe interior lining of the sliding door. Thesliding door opens with the rollback anti-trap function as long as the button is notpressed again.

Pull briefly on the interior or exterior han-dle the door. The sliding door opens au-tomatically.

Closing thesliding doorelectrically.

Press the ››› Fig. 135 button on the dashpanel, on the remote control key and onthe interior lining of the sliding door. Thesliding door closes with the rollback anti-trap function as long as the button is notpressed again. As it closes, a warningsound is given.

Pull briefly on the interior or exterior doorhandle. The sliding door closes with theroll-back function. As it closes, a warningsound is given.

Note

● When the fuel tank flap is open, the right-hand side electric sliding door is locked andcan only be opened manually.

● If the window of a sliding door is loweredthem this door cannot open fully.

120

Opening and closing

Rollback anti-trap function of the elec-tric sliding doors

The rollback anti-trap function of the electricsliding doors can reduce the risk of injurywhen opening and closing the sliding doors››› .

If an object gets in the way of the slidingdoor while it is closing, it will open again.

If an object gets in the way of the slidingdoor while it is opening, the door will be im-mobilised at this point.

● Check the reason for which the sliding doordoes not open or close.

● Try to open or close the sliding door again.

To close the sliding door without the rollbackanti-trap function

● Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.

● Press and hold the ››› Fig. 135 button.The sliding door closes with full force.

WARNING

Closing the electric windows without the an-ti-trap function can cause serious injury.

● Always close the sliding doors carefully.

● Nobody should ever get in the way of theelectric sliding doors, especially when clos-ing without the anti-trap function.

● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-gers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame and caus-ing injury.

Electric child safety lock

Fig. 136 In the driver door: electric child safe-ty locks buttons

The electric child safety lock avoids openingand locking of the sliding door and its elec-tric windows from the inside so that childrencannot accidentally open the door while thevehicle is being driven. Using the left-hand››› Fig. 136 1 or right-hand side 2 button,the childproof lock is activated on the left- orright-hand side respectively.

Turning on and off the electric child safety


To switch sys-tem on:

Press the button ››› Fig. 136 1 or2 .

To switch sys-tem off:

Press the button again.

The yellow control lamp indicates that thefeature is on for the corresponding button.

WARNING

When the electric child safety function is acti-vated, the sliding door can be opened fromthe outside only.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle if the doors are to belocked. Therefore, passengers will be lockedinside the vehicle. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not be ableto get themselves to safety. Individualslocked in the vehicle can be exposed to veryhigh or very low temperatures.


121

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Rear lid

Introduction


WARNING

Careless and unsuitable locking, opening andclosing of the rear lid can cause accidentsand serious injury.

● Open and close the rear lid only when no-body is in the way.

● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it downwith your hand on the rear window. Thiscould break and cause injury.

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing,otherwise, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving. A closed rear lid should be flush withthe corresponding parts of the bodywork.

● Always keep the rear lid closed while driv-ing to avoid toxic gases entering the vehicleinterior.

● Do not open the rear lid when there is aload carrier installed. Likewise, the boothatch cannot be opened when a load is at-tached to it, for example bicycles. An openrear lid could close itself if there is an addi-tional weight on it. If necessary, press downon the rear lid and remove the load.

● Close and lock both the rear lid and all theother doors when you are not using the vehi-

cle. Ensure that nobody remains inside thevehicle.

● Never allow children to play inside oraround the vehicle without supervision, espe-cially if the rear lid is open. Children couldenter the luggage compartment, close therear lid and become trapped. Depending onthe time of the year, temperatures inside alocked and closed vehicle can be extremelyhigh or extremely low resulting in serious in-juries and illness or even death, particularlyfor young children.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. If the vehicle key or thecentral locking button is used, they may belocked in the vehicle.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless unlocking and openingof the rear lid could cause serious injuries.

● If there is a loaded luggage carrier on therear lid, it could be unlocked or open but notrecognised as such. An unlocked or open rearlid could open unexpectedly while driving.

CAUTION

Before opening the rear lid, ensure that thereis sufficient free space to open and close it,for example if you are towing a trailer or in agarage.

Warning lamp

It lights up

The rear lid is openor not correctlyshut.

Stop driving immediately!Open the rear lid and close itagain.


A warning lamp appears on the dash panel if the boot hatch is open or not properlyclosed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-bol may be displayed on the dash panelscreen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-cation is also visible when the ignition isswitched off. The indication disappearsaround 15 seconds after the vehicle hasbeen locked.

WARNING

If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it couldopen unexpectedly when driving and causeserious injuries.

● Always stop immediately and close the rearlid.

● Ensure that the rear lid has been locked in-to place by the element on the lock carrierwhen you close it.

122

Opening and closing

Note

At outside temperatures of less than 0°C(+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannot al-ways automatically lift the rear lid. In thiscase, open the rear lid manually.

Closing the rear lid

Fig. 137 Rear lid open: hand grip


● Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid››› Fig. 137 (arrow).

● Push the rear lid downwards until it locksinto place in the lock.

● Ensure that it is correctly closed by pullingon it firmly.

Locking the rear lid

If you unlock the vehicle without opening anydoors or the rear lid, it will lock again auto-

matically after 30 seconds. This function pre-vents the vehicle from remaining unlocked ifthe unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

Locking is only possible when the rear lid iscorrectly and fully closed.

● The rear lid is also locked by a central lock-ing.

● If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlockedusing the button, when it is closed oncemore it will lock automatically.

● A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au-tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h(7 mph).

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking ofthe rear lid could cause serious injuries.

● Never leave the vehicle unattended, or al-low children to play inside or around the vehi-cle without supervision, especially if the rearlid is open. Children could enter the luggagecompartment, close the rear lid and becometrapped. A locked vehicle can be subjected toextremely high and low temperatures, de-pending on the time of year, thus causing se-rious injuries/illness and even death.

Note

Before closing the rear lid, make sure that thekey has not been left inside the luggage com-partment.

Opening the rear lid electronically

Fig. 138 Button with rear lid open

Opening the rear lid

● Press and hold the button on the vehi-cle key until the rear lid opens automatically.

● OR: press and hold the button on thecentre console for approximately 1 second››› Fig. 6.

● OR: press the ››› Fig. 7 boot hatch but-ton (arrow).

In case of difficulty or obstruction, automaticopening of the rear lid is interrupted.

Electronically opening the rear lid does notwork when a trailer is electrically connectedand hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch››› page 234.

The rear lid can be opened manually by ap-plying more force. »

123

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation


● Press and hold the button on the vehi-cle key for approximately 1 second.

● OR: press and hold the button on thecentre console for approximately 1 second››› Fig. 6.

● OR: press the ››› Fig. 7 boot hatch but-ton (arrow).

● Press the button on the open rear lid››› Fig. 138 ››› .

● Manually push the rear lid down to close it.

The rear lid will move down to the closed po-sition to close and lock itself automaticallyusing the power-close feature ››› .

In case of difficulty or obstruction, automaticclosing of the rear lid is interrupted and it willopen slightly.

Check why the rear lid could not close.

Attempt to close it once more.

Interrupting the opening and closing process

Rear lid opening and closing can be stoppedby pressing one of the buttons. Each timeone of the buttons is pressed, the rear lidmoves to its initial position.

Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. Todo this, apply a little more force.

Memorising the opening angle

The rear lid must be at least half open tomemorise an opening angle.

● Stop automatic opening in the opening po-sition required ››› page 124.

● Hold down the button ››› Fig. 138 with therear lid open for at least three seconds. Theopening angle is memorised.

Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of thehazard warning lights and an audible warn-ing.

To fully open the boot hatch again, the open-ing angle must be memorised once more.

● Release the rear lid and open it to thememorised height.

● Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this,apply a little more force.

● Hold down the button ››› Fig. 138 with therear lid open for at least three seconds.

● The opening angle is reset to the originalfactory setting.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking ofthe rear lid could cause serious injuries.

● Never leave the vehicle unattended, or al-low children to play inside or around the vehi-cle without supervision, especially if the rearlid is open. Children could enter the luggage

compartment, close the rear lid and becometrapped. A locked vehicle can be subjected toextremely high and low temperatures, de-pending on the time of year, resulting in seri-ous injuries/illness or even death.

WARNING

It is possible that the rear lid does not opencompletely or, if it is open, closes alone if alarge amount of snow has built up on it or if aluggage rack is fitted. In this case, the rear lidmust be supported.

CAUTION

● When using a trailer, ensure that there issufficient space to open and close the rearlid.

● Before opening the rear lid, any kind ofequipment carrier should be removed, for ex-ample a bicycle carrier.

CAUTION

In case of repeated short-term use, the sys-tem is turned off to avoid overheating.

● When it has cooled, it may be used onceagain. During this time, the rear lid may bemanually opened or closed applying a littlemore effort.

● If the vehicle battery is disconnected or thefuse blows when the rear lid is open, the rearlid system must be re-initialised. To do this,close the rear lid.

124

Opening and closing

Note

Before closing the rear lid, make sure that thekey has not been left inside the luggage com-partment.

Electric windows

Electric windows: functions


After turning off the ignition, the windowscan be opened and closed for a short timeusing the buttons on the door as long as thedriver door or passenger side door is notopen. When the key is removed from the igni-tion and the driver door is open, all of theelectric windows can be opened or closed atthe same time keeping the button on thedriver’s door pressed down. After a few sec-onds, the convenience opening or closingfunction will begin ››› page 125.

One-touch opening and closing

The one-touch automatic opening and clos-ing is used to open or close the windowscompletely. It will not be necessary to holdthe button of the corresponding electric win-dow.

For the one-touch closing function: pull thebutton for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

For the one-touch opening function: push thebutton for the corresponding window down-wards until it reaches the second position.

To stop the one touch function: push or pullon the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

The one-touch opening and closing functionis not active after the vehicle battery hasbeen disconnected or is flat and will have tobe reset.

● Close all windows and doors.

● Pull the button of the corresponding win-dow and hold it for one second in this posi-tion.

● Release the button and pull upwards andhold again. The one-touch function is nowready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windowscan be reinitialised individually or several ata time.

Convenience opening/closing

The electric windows can be opened orclosed from outside using the vehicle key:

● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but-ton pressed. All windows which function elec-trically will be either opened or closed.

● To interrupt the function, release the lock-ing or unlocking button.

During convenience closing, first the win-dows and then the sliding sunroof will beclosed.

In the Configuration - conveniencemenu, there are different settings for operat-ing the windows ››› page 26.

WARNING

Careless use of the electric windows cancause serious injury.

● Only operate the electric windows whennobody is in the way.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle if the doors are to belocked. The windows cannot be opened incase of an emergency.

● Always take all the keys with you wheneveryou leave the vehicle. After turning off the ig-nition, the windows can be opened andclosed for a short time using the buttons onthe door as long as the driver door or passen-ger side door is not open.

● When transporting children in the rearseats, always deactivate the rear electric win-dows with the child safety lock so that theycannot be opened and closed. »

125

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

The one-touch function and roll-back functionwill not work if there is a malfunction in theelectric windows. Visit an authorised work-shop.

Roll-back function on electric win-dows

The anti-trap function of the electric windowscan reduce the risk of injury when openingand closing the electric windows ››› . If awindow is not able to close because it is stiffor because of an obstruction, it will automati-cally open again.

● Check why the window does not close.

● Attempt to close the window again.

● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes with difficulty or thereis an obstruction once again, the one-touchclosing will stop working for 10 seconds.

● If the window is still obstructed, it will stopat the corresponding position. When the but-ton is operated within 10 seconds, the win-dow will close without the anti-trap function››› .

To close windows without the anti-trap func-tion

● Attempt to close the corresponding electricwindow within 10 seconds after by holdingthe button. The window is closed without theanti-trap function, deactivated for a shorttime.

● After more than 10 seconds, the anti-trapfunction is reactivated. The window will stoponce again if there is another difficulty or ob-stacle.

● If the window will still not close, visit a spe-cialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the electric windows without the an-ti-trap function can cause serious injury.

● Always close the electric windows careful-ly.

● Nobody should be in the way of the electricwindows, especially when the anti-trap func-tion is deactivated.


Note

The anti-trap function also operates if thewindows are closed from the outside of thevehicle using the ignition key for convenienceclosing ››› page 125.

Panoramic sliding sunroof*

Panoramic sliding sunroof: operating


The panoramic sliding sunroof will only workwith the ignition on. It can be opened orclosed for a few minutes after the ignitionhas been switched off, provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

Convenience open/close function

The panoramic sliding sunroof can beopened or closed from outside the vehicleusing the vehicle key:

● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but-ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroofis adjusted or closes.

● Release the unlock or lock button to stopthe function.

During convenience closing, first the win-dows and then the panoramic sliding sunroofwill be closed.

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoram-ic sliding sunroof can cause serious injuries.

126

Opening and closing

● Only close the panoramic sliding sunroofand the sun blind when nobody is in the way.

● Always take all the keys with you wheneveryou leave the vehicle.

● Never leave children or disabled persons inthe vehicle, particularly if they have access tothe keys. Uncontrolled use of the key couldlock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on theignition and operate the panoramic slidingsunroof.

● The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper-ated for up to about ten minutes after the ig-nition has been switched off, provided thedriver door and the front passenger door arenot opened.

Note

● In case of a fault in the operation of thepanoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap func-tion will not operate correctly. Visit a special-ised workshop.

● The rotary button of the panoramic slidingsunroof remains in the last position selectedif the roof is closed using convenience clos-ing from outside the vehicle, and will have tobe re-positioned the next time you drive.

Opening or closing the sun blind

Fig. 139 On the interior roof lining: switchesfor the sun blind


To open com-pletely (automat-

ic):Press button ››› Fig. 139 1 briefly.

To stop automaticoperation:

Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 1391 o ››› Fig. 139 2 .

To set the inter-mediate position:

Hold the button ››› Fig. 139 1

or ››› Fig. 139 2 until the requiredposition is reached.

To close com-pletely (automat-

ic):Press button ››› Fig. 139 2 briefly.

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operat-ed for up to about ten minutes after the igni-tion has been switched off, provided the driv-er door and the front passenger door are notopened.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsliding sunroof and the sun blind

The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in-jury when opening and closing the panoram-ic sliding sunroof and sun blind ››› . Whenthey encounter an obstacle while closing,they reopen.

● Check why the panoramic sliding sunroofor the sun blind did not close.

● Attempt to close the panoramic slidingsunroof or sun blind once again.

● If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sunblind is still obstructed, it will stop at the cor-responding position. Close it without the an-ti-trap function.

Closing without the roll-back function

● The switch ››› Fig. 13 should be in the“closed” position 1 .

● Panoramic sliding sunroof: within five sec-onds of triggering the anti-trap function, pullthe control all the way back ››› Fig. 13 (ar-row 5 ) until the panoramic sliding sunroofcloses fully.

● Sun blind: Within 5 seconds of triggeringthe anti-trap function, push button››› Fig. 139 2 until the sun blind closes com-pletely.

● The panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blindcloses without the anti-trap function. »

127

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannotbe closed, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sunblind without the anti-trap function can causeserious injuries.

● Always close the panoramic sliding sunroofcarefully.

● Nobody should be in the way of the panor-amic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especiallywhen they are closed without the anti-trapfunction.


Note

The anti-trap function is activated if the win-dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof areclosed from the outside of the vehicle usingthe ignition key for convenience closing››› page 125.


Lights

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally orpartially faulty.

Replace the corresponding bulb››› page 91.If all the bulbs are OK, the vehi-cle should be taken to a speci-alised workshop if necessary.

Fault in adaptivelight.

››› page 130.

Flashes

Fault in the adaptivelight system.

Contact a specialised workshop››› page 129.

It lights up

Rear fog light switch-ed on.

››› page 24.

It lights up

Front fog lightsswitched on

››› page 24.

It lights up

Left or right turn sig-nal.The control lampflashes twice as fastwhen a vehicle ortrailer turn signal isfaulty.

If necessary, check the vehicleand trailer lighting.

It lights up

Main beam on orflasher on.

››› page 129.

It lights up

Headlight adjustment(Light Assist) on.

››› page 129.


WARNING


Switching lights on and off


128


The legal requirements regarding the use ofvehicle lights in each country must be ob-served.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

In vehicles with tow hitch fitted as standard:if the trailer is connected electrically and isfitted with a rear fog light, the vehicle’s foglight is automatically switched off.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this is a remind-er to turn off the lights.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 129.

● When the light switch is in position .

WARNING

The side lights or daytime driving lights arenot bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road users areable to see you.

● Always use your dipped beam head lights ifit is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and themain beam is not used correctly, there is arisk of dazzling or distracting other roadusers. This could result in a serious accident.

● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

● Never use the main beam or headlightflasher when it can dazzle others on the road.

Turn signal and main beam lever


Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The control turn signals are switched on andoff from the menu Lights & Visibilityon the instrument panel display››› page 26. This function can be discon-nected at a specialised workshop for thosevehicles which do not have the menuLights & Visibility.

Note

● If the convenience turn signals are operat-ing (three flashes) and the other convenience

turn signals are switched on, the active partstops flashing and only flashes once in thenew part selected.

● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off ››› page 82.

● If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer isfaulty, the warning lamp flashes twice as fastas usual.

● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.

Lights and visibility: functions

Parking light

When the parking light is switched on, (rightor left turn signal), the front side light andthe rear light on the corresponding side ofthe vehicle stay lit. The parking lights will on-ly work with the ignition off.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights reduce the risk ofaccidents by increasing the visibility of thevehicle. These are independent lights thatare built into the headlights and come oneach time the ignition is turned on if the lightswitch is in position or 0. »

129

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

When the light switch is in position , aphoto sensor automatically turns the instru-ment and switch lighting on and off.

Automatic dipped beam control

The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on and off automatical-ly in the following situations ››› :

Automatic switchingon

Automatic switchingoff or switch to day-time running lighting

The photo sensor detectsdarkness, for example,when driving through atunnel.

When adequate lighting isdetected.

The rain sensor detectsrain and activates thewindscreen wipers.

When the windscreen wip-er has been inactive for afew minutes.

Adaptive headlights (AFS)

The adaptive headlights only operate whenthe dipped beam is on and at speeds of over10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adaptiveheadlights automatically improve lighting onthe road ahead.

The adaptive headlights can be switched onand off from the infotainment system.

Static cornering lights

When turning slowly to change direction orgoing round a tight bend, the static corneringlights automatically come on. The static cor-nering lights only work at speeds of less than40 km/h (25 mph).

The static cornering lights may be incorpora-ted into the fog lights or the front headlights,depending upon the equipment.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road userscannot see the vehicle well enough or at all,accidents may occur.

● The automatic dipped beam control ()only switches on the dipped beam whenthere are no changes in brightness, and not,for example when it is foggy.

● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lighting con-ditions. Daytime lights do not provideenough light to illuminate the road properlyor be seen by other road users.

● The rear lights do not come on with thedaytime driving light. A vehicle which doesnot have the rear lights on may not be visibleto other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain-ing or in conditions of poor visibility.

Headlight adjustment

Headlight adjustment (Light Assist)

The headlight adjustment automatically con-nects and disconnects these lights depend-ing on the environmental and traffic condi-tions and on the speed, within the limitationsof the system ››› . This is monitored by asensor located on the inside of the wind-screen, above the interior rear vision mirror.

The automatic headlight adjustment auto-matically switches on the lights dependingon the vehicles travelling in front and in theopposite direction, and on other environmen-tal and traffic conditions from an approxi-mate speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) and turnsthem off again at speeds below approximate-ly 30 km/h (18 mph).

Switching on and off

Action

Switch-ing on:

– With the ignition on, turn the lights controlto the position and put the turn signaland main beam lever in the main beam posi-tion ››› page 129. When the headlight adjust-ment (automatic lights also) is activated, thewarning lamp lights up in the dash paneldisplay .

130


Switch-ing off:

– Disconnect the on button.– OR: turn the lights control to a different po-sition to ››› page 128.– OR: place the turn signal and main beamlever in the headlight flasher or main beamposition ››› page 129.

The following conditions can cause the head-light adjustment to fail to turn off the mainbeam or fail to do so in time:

● On roads with insufficient lighting with veryreflective signs

● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g.pedestrians or cyclists.

● On closed curves, when the traffic in theopposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-nounced slopes

● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-tion and with a central reservation barrierwhere the driver can see through gaps orover it e.g. lorry drivers.

● If the camera is damaged or if the powersupply has been cut off

● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain

● In the event of dust or sand storms

● If the windscreen is damaged by the impactfrom a stone in the camera's field of vision

● If the camera's field of vision is misted up,dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.

WARNING

The greater comfort that the headlight ad-justment provides (automatic also) must notcause you to take risks. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.

● Always monitor the lights yourself and ad-just them depending on the light, visibilityand traffic conditions.

● The headlight adjustment (automatic also)may not correctly detect all situations and incertain situations may only provide limitedfunction.

● If the windscreen is damaged or modifica-tions are made to the vehicle lighting, thismay harm the functioning of the headlightadjustment (automatic lights also), for exam-ple, if additional headlight are fitted.

Note

Main beam and flashed headlights can beturned on and off manually at any time withthe turn signal and main beam lever››› page 129.

“Coming home” and “Leaving home”function (guidance lights)

The “Coming home” function should beswitched on manually. However the “Leav-ing home” function is automatically control-led by a photo sensor.

“Coming home”: necessary operations

To switchsystem on:

– Switch off the ignition.– Briefly flash the headlights for approxi-mately one second ››› page 129.The “Coming home” lighting comes onwhen the driver door is opened. The delayin switching off the headlights is countedfrom when the last door or boot hatch isclosed.

To switchsystem off:

– Automatically at the end of the delay pe-riod.– Automatically, if 30 seconds after com-ing on, a vehicle door or the boot hatch re-mains open.– When the light switch is turned to posi-tion .– When the ignition is switched on.

“Leaving home”: necessary operations

To switchsystem on:

– Unlock the vehicle when the light switchis in position and the photo sensordetects darkness.

To switchsystem off:

– Automatically, at the end of the delayperiod.– When the vehicle is locked.– When the light switch is turned to posi-tion .– When the ignition is switched on.

Lighting around the exterior mirrors

The lighting around the exterior mirrors illu-minates the door area on entering and leav-ing the vehicles. It comes on when the vehi-cle is unlocked, when the vehicle door is »

131

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

opened and when the “Coming home” or“Leaving home” function is switched on. Ifthe equipment includes the light sensor, thelighting around the exterior mirrors onlycomes when it is dark.

Note

● The time taken for the headlights to go offcan be changed in the Lights & Visibil-ity menu and the function can be switchedon or off ››› page 26.

● When the “Coming home” function is on, ifthe vehicle door is opened there is no audiblewarning signal to advise that the light is stillon.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 140 In the centre of the dash panel: pushbutton for hazard warning lights.


Always fulfil legal requirements for securing abroken down vehicle. In a number of coun-tries it is now obligatory, for example, to turnon the hazard warning lights and use a re-flective safety vest ››› page 82.

When being towed with the hazard warninglights on, a change in direction or traffic lanecan be indicated as usual using the turn sig-nal lever. The hazard lights will be interrup-ted temporarily.

If your vehicle breaks down:

Park the vehicle a safe distance fromtraffic and on suitable ground ››› .

Turn on the hazard warning lights withthe button ››› Fig. 140.

Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 187.

Move the selector lever to its intermedi-ate position or to P ››› page 192.

Stop the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition ››› page 182.

Have all occupants leave the vehicle andmove to safety, for example behind aguard rail.

When leaving the vehicle, take all keyswith you.

Place an emergency warning triangle toindicate the position of your vehicle toother road users.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Allow the engine to cool and check if aspecialist is required.

If the hazard warning lights are not working,you must use an alternative method of draw-ing attention to your vehicle. This methodmust comply with traffic legislation.

WARNING

A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk ofaccident for the driver and for other roadusers.

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park the vehicle a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to lock all the doors in case ofan emergency. Turn on the hazard warninglights to warn other road users.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle if the doors are to belocked. In case of an emergency, passengerswill be trapped inside the vehicle. Individualslocked in the vehicle can be exposed to veryhigh or very low temperatures.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reachvery high temperatures. This could cause afire and considerable damage.

● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact withflammable materials (such as dried grass orfuel).

9.

132


Note

● The vehicle battery will discharge and rundown if the hazard warning lights remain onfor too long (even with the ignition turnedoff).

● In some vehicles, the brake lights will flashwhen braking abruptly at speeds of approxi-mately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn vehiclestravelling behind. If braking continues, thehazard warning lights system will automati-cally be turned on at a speed of less than ap-proximately 10 km/h (6 mph). The brakelights remain lit. Upon accelerating, the haz-ard warning lights will be automaticallyturned off.

Adhesive strips for headlights or ad-justing headlights

In those countries where vehicles drive onthe other side of the road to the home coun-try, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzledrivers of oncoming vehicles. Therefore,when driving abroad, adhesive strips shouldbe attached to the headlights or the head-lights should be adjusted accordingly.

The direction of the headlights can be adjus-ted from the instrument panel, in the Tou-rist light submenu of the Configura-tion menu ››› page 30.

For those vehicles in which it is not possibleto adjust the headlights from the menu, ad-

hesive strips are used to cover certain partsof the headlamp cover or the headlights maybe adjusted at a specialised workshop. Forfurther information, please refer to a special-ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting atechnical service.

Note

Use of the Tourist light option and theadhesives on the headlights is only allowed ifthey are to be used for a short period of time.To modify the direction of the headlights per-manently, please take the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting atechnical service centre.

Headlight range control, lighting ofthe instrument panel and controls

Fig. 141 Next to the steering wheel: instru-ment and switch lighting control 1 andheadlight range control 2

1 Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights are switched on, thebrightness of the instruments and switchlighting can be regulated by turning theswitch ››› Fig. 141 1 .

2 Headlight range control

The headlight range control ››› Fig. 141 2 ismodified according to the value of the head-light beam and the vehicle load status. Thisoffers the driver optimum visibility and theheadlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 141 2 :

Value Vehicle load statusa)

–Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

1All seats occupied, luggage compartmentempty

2All seats occupied, luggage compartmentfull With trailer and minimum drawbar load

3Driver only, luggage compartment full Withtrailer and maximum drawbar load

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in thetable, it is possible to select intermediary positions. »

133

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Dynamic headlight range control

The control 2 is not mounted in vehicleswith dynamic headlight range control. Theheadlight range is automatically adjusted ac-cording to the vehicle load status when theyare switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the back of vehicle maycause headlight dazzle and distract otherdrivers. This could result in a serious acci-dent.

● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other drivers.

Interior and reading lights


Storage and luggage compartment lighting

When the glove compartment and the rear lidare opened and closed, a light automaticallyswitches on or off.

Ambient lighting

The ambient lighting in the front covering ofthe ceiling lights up the controls on the cen-tre console from above when the side light ordipped beam lights are on.

In addition, the lever on the door mouldingcan also be illuminated.

Note

The reading lights go out when the vehicle islocked, or a few minutes after the key is re-moved from the ignition. This prevents thevehicle's battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 142 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors:

● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.

● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 142 1 .

● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-gitudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror light

There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, onthe rear of the sun visor. When the cover isopened ››› Fig. 142 2 a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNING

Sun visors and sun blinds may reduce visibili-ty when open.

● Always roll or fold sun blinds and visorsaway when not in use.

Note

The light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

134


Rear side window sun blinds

Fig. 143 On the rear right-hand window: sunblind

The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fit-ted in the side panels of the windows.

● Pull the sun blind by the handle ››› Fig. 143A up to the top.

● Hook both rings of the fastening rod in thespaces provided B . Check that the sun blindis securely hooked into the spaces providedwhen it has been lowered B .

● To put the sun blind away, unhook it at thetop and lower by hand ››› .

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the blind or the interiortrim, do not lower the sun blind “quickly”.

Windscreen wiper and windowwiper systems

Control lamp

It lights up

Windscreen wip-er fluid level toolow

Top up the windscreen wiper reser-voir as soon as possible››› page 280.


Window wiper lever


WARNING

Water from the windscreen washer water bot-tle may freeze on the windscreen if it doesnot contain enough anti-freeze, reducing for-ward visibility.

● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.

● In cold conditions, you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you have warmedthe windscreen with the ventilation system.

The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreenand reduce visibility.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibilityand increase the risk of accident and seriousinjury.

● Always replace damaged or worn blades orblades which do not clean the windscreencorrectly.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the wiperblades are not frozen to the glass before us-ing the wipers for the first time. In coldweather, it may help to leave the vehicleparked with the wipers in service position››› page 54.

CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off while the wind-screen wipers are on, the windscreen wiperscarry on wiping at the same level when theignition is switched back on. Ice, snow andother obstacles may damage the windscreenwiper and the respective motor.

Note

● The windscreen wipers will only functionwhen the ignition is switched on and the re-spective bonnet or rear lid are closed. »

135

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● The interval wipe speed varies according tothe vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle ismoving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.

● The rear wiper is automatically switched onwhen the windscreen wiper is on and the caris in reverse gear.

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wiper performance in different sit-uations

If the vehicleis at a stand-still

The activated position provisionallychanges to the previous position.

During auto-matic wipe

The air conditioner comes on for ap-proximately 30 seconds in air recircula-tion mode to prevent the smell of thewindscreen washer fluid entering theinside the vehicle.

For the inter-val wipe

Intervals between wipes depend on thevehicle's speed. The higher the vehiclespeed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets

The heating only thaws the frozen jets, itdoes not thaw the water in the washer hoses.The heated windscreen washer jets automati-cally adjust the heat depending on the ambi-ent temperature when the ignition is switch-ed on.

Headlight wash/wipe system

The headlight washers/wipers clean theheadlight lenses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first andevery fifth time the windscreen washer isswitched on, the headlights are also washed.Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever shouldbe pulled towards the steering wheel whenthe dipped beam or main beam are on. Anyincrusted dirt (such as insects) should becleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-rectly in winter, any snow which has got intothe bumper jet supports should be cleanedaway. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-icing spray.

Note

The wiper will try to wipe away any obstaclesthat are on the windscreen. The wiper willstop moving if the obstacle blocks its path.Remove the obstacle and switch the wiperback on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 144 Windscreen wiper lever: adjustingthe rain sensor A

Fig. 145 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending onthe amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of therain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man-ual wipe ››› page 135.

136


Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 144:

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

– Set control to the right: highly sensi-tive.

– Set control to the left: less sensitive.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travel-ling at more than 4 km/h (2 mph).

Rain sensor modified behaviour

Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 145 ofthe rain sensor include:

● Damaged blades: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activationtime, reduce the washing intervals or resultin a fast and continuous wipe.

● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.

● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in theroads may cause an extra long wipe when thewindscreen is almost dry.

● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

0

1

A

reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.

● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects thereduction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen-sor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.

● If necessary, switch on the wipers manuallywhen water on the windscreen obstructs visi-bility.

Note

● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen-sor regularly and check the blades for dam-age ››› Fig. 145 (arrow).

● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.

Rear vision mirror

Introduction

WARNING

The automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorcontains an electrolytic fluid which may leakif the mirror is broken. This could cause irrita-tion to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs.

● The electrolytic fluid may cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs, partic-ularly in individuals suffering from asthma orother illnesses. Make sure that adequatequantities of fresh air enter and leave the ve-hicle if it is not possible to open all the doorsand windows.

● If the electrolytic fluid comes into contactwith eyes or skin, wash the area for at least15 minutes with plenty of water, and seekmedical advice.

● If the electrolytic fluid comes into contactwith shoes or clothing, wash the area for atleast 15 minutes with plenty of water. Washshoes and clothing before wearing themagain.

● If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, washyour mouth with plenty of water for at least15 minutes. Do not try to provoke vomitingunless recommended by a Doctor. Seek medi-cal advice immediately. »

137

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

CAUTION

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluidmay leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces.Therefore, it should be cleaned as fast aspossible with a damp sponge or similar.

Interior rear vision mirror

Fig. 146 Manual anti-dazzle function for rearvision mirror

Fig. 147 Automatic anti-dazzle function forrear vision mirror

The driver should always adjust the rear vi-sion mirror to permit adequate visibilitythrough the rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rearvision mirror

● Basic position: point the lever at the bot-tom of the mirror forwards.

● Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function ››› Fig. 146.

Automatic anti-dazzle function for interiormirror

Key to Fig. 147:

Control lamp

Control

Light incidence sensor

1

2

3

This function can be activated and deactiva-ted by pressing the rear-view mirror switch››› Fig. 147 2 . When it is activated, the warn-ing lamp lights up 1 .

When the ignition is on, the sensor 3 auto-matically moves the rear vision mirror to theanti-dazzle position depending upon the in-cidence of the light from behind.

The automatic anti-dazzle function is deacti-vated when reverse gear is engaged or the in-terior or reading lights are on.

Note

If the light is obstructed or prevented fromreaching the sensor, e.g. by the sun blinds,the rear vision mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate correctly.

138


Exterior mirrors

Fig. 148 In the driver door: exterior mirrorcontrols


Turn the knob to the required position:

Electric folding exterior mirrors ››› .

Switch on the exterior mirror heating This onlyheats up if the ambient temperature is lessthan +20°C (+68°F).

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror by turningthe knob forward, backward, to the right or tothe left.

Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror by turningthe knob forward, backward, to the right or tothe left .

Zero position. Exterior mirror unfolded, exteriormirror heating off, adjustment of exterior mir-ror not possible.

Synchronised mirror adjustment

● In the Settings - Convenience menu,select whether or not the mirrors shouldmove in synchronisation ››› page 26.

● Turn the knob to position L.

● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).

● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust-ment may need correcting. turn the control toposition R.

Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driverside

The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror iscontrolled in the same way as the automaticanti-dazzle rear vision mirror ››› page 138.

Store the reverse settings for the passengerexterior mirror

● Select the vehicle key in which the settingis to be stored.

● Use this key to unlock the vehicle.

● Connect the automatic parking brake.

● Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R(passenger side).


● Move the gear lever to neutral.

● Access the Settings menu on the instru-ment panel display using the multifunction

steering wheel buttons and select Conven-ience.

● Select the Rear vision mirror ad-justment function (if it is already checked,uncheck it and check the option again).

● Select reverse gear.

● Adjust the front passenger side exteriormirror so that you can see, for example, thekerb area.

● The new position of the mirror will be stor-ed automatically and allocated to the vehiclekey that was used to unlock the vehicle. Forvehicles with seat memory, please see››› page 144.

Activating the passenger exterior mirror set-tings

● Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R.

● With the ignition switched on, select re-verse gear.

● The stored position of the passenger exteri-or mirror for reverse gear is deleted whendriving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if theknob is turned from position R to another po-sition.

WARNING

Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries.

● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror whenthere is no-one in the way of the mirror. »

139

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and the mir-ror bracket.

WARNING

Failure to correctly estimate the distance ofthe vehicle behind could lead to serious acci-dent.

● Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors in-crease the field of vision, however objects ap-pear smaller and further away in the mirrors.

● The use of these mirrors to estimate thedistance to the next vehicle when changinglane is imprecise and could result in seriousaccident.

● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es-timate distances to vehicles behind you or inother circumstances.

● Make sure that the rear visibility is ade-quate.

CAUTION

● Before entering a car wash, always ensurethat the exterior mirrors are correctly foldedin.

● Electrically-folding exterior mirrors shouldnot be folded and unfolded mechanically asthis may damage the electrical operation.


The exterior mirror heating should be switch-ed off when it is no longer needed. Other-wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note

● The exterior mirror heating initially heatsup with a high power, after two minutes theheat will depend upon the ambient tempera-ture.

● In the event of a fault, the electric exteriormirrors can be adjusted manually by pressingthe edge of the mirror surface.

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seats and headrestraints

Manual adjustment of seats


WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains importantinformation, tips, suggestions and warningsthat you should read and observe for yourown safety and the safety of your passengers››› page 56.

WARNING

● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● Be careful when adjusting the seat height.Careless or uncontrolled adjustment cancause injuries.

● The front seat backrests must not be re-clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts andthe airbag system might not protect as theyshould in the case of an accident, increasingrisk of injury.

140


Electric driver's seat adjustment*


WARNING

Using the front electric seats in a careless oruncontrolled manner may lead to severe inju-ries.

● The front seats can also be electrically ad-justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev-er leave children or disabled people alone inthe vehicle.

● In the event of an emergency, stop electri-cal adjustment by pressing any button.

CAUTION

So as not the damage the electrical compo-nents of the front seats, do not kneel on theseats or apply specific pressure to one pointof the seat or seat backrest.

Note

● It may not be possible to electrically adjustthe seat if the vehicle battery is very low.

● Seat adjustment is stopped when the en-gine is started.

Adjusting the rear seats

Fig. 149 Adjusting rear seats


1 Adjusting theseat backrest.

Pull the lever and adjust the seatbackrest to the required position››› . The seat backrest must beengaged when the lever is re-leased! There is a handle insteadof the lever on the third row ofseats and on the central seat ofthe second row. It is used in thesame manner as the lever.

2 On the secondrow of seats only:move the seatbackwards or for-wards.

Pull the lever and move the seatforwards or backwards. The seatmust be engaged when the leveris released!

CAUTION

● Tilting the seat backrest of the second rowof seats fully back could damage the luggage

compartment tray. Remove the tray beforeadjusting the seat backrest.

● Objects in the luggage compartment couldcause damage when moving the rear seatsforwards or backwards.

141

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Adjustment of the head restraints

Fig. 150 A: Adjust the head restraints with nopossibility of lengthways direction adjust-ment; B: Adjust the head restraints withlengthways direction adjustment

Fig. 151 Adjust the head restraints in the sec-ond or third row of seats


All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Adjusting height

● Raise the head restraint in the direction ofthe arrow or lower it ››› Fig. 150 or ››› Fig. 151

1 with the button pressed ››› in Removingand installing the head restraints onpage 144.

● The head restraint must engage securely inposition. There are three possible positionson the second row of seats and two possiblepositions on the third row of seats.

Adjusting the front head restraints

● Push the head restraint forward in the di-rection of the arrow or backward ››› Fig. 150

1 B with the button pressed.

● The head restraint must engage securely inposition.

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the same lev-el as the top of your head and under no cir-cumstances below eye level. Keep the backof your neck as close as possible to the headrestraint.

Adjusting the head restraint for short people

Lower the head restraint completely, even ifyour head is below its upper edge. When thehead restraint is at its lowest, it is possiblethat a small gap remains between it and theseat backrest.

Adjusting the head restraint for tall people

Raise the head restraint completely.

142


Removing and installing the head re-straints

Fig. 152 A: Fitting the head restraints with nopossibility of lengthways direction adjust-ment; B: Fitting the head restraints withlengthways direction adjustment

Fig. 153 Fitting the head restraints in the sec-ond or third row of seats

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Removing the front head restraints in vehi-cles without the lengthways direction ad-justment of the head restraints

● If necessary, adjust the seat backrest sothat the head restraint can be fitted.

● Push the head restraint up as far as it willgo ››› .

● Pull out the head restraint pressing the but-ton completely ››› Fig. 152 1 A.

Fitting the front head restraints in vehicleswithout the lengthways direction adjustmentof the head restraints

● Correctly place the head restraint into theguides on the seat backrest and insert it.

● Completely press the button 1 A and pushthe head restraint downwards.

● Adjust the head restraint according to thecorrect seat position and secure it››› page 142.

Removing the front head restraints in vehi-cles with the lengthways direction adjust-ment of the head restraints

● If necessary, adjust the seat backrest sothat the head restraint can be fitted.

● Push the head restraint up and backwardas far as it will go ››› .

● Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card 2 B,on both sides between the seat backrest cov-er and the end protector of the seat backrestretaining bar and unlock the retaining barswith a little pressure.

● Completely pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the front head restraints in vehicleswith the lengthways direction adjustment ofthe head restraints

● Pull out the two retaining bars from thehead restraint as far as possible.

● Correctly place the head restraint into theguides on the seat backrest and insert it.

● Push the head restraint down as far as pos-sible until the two retaining bars are secured.

● Adjust the head restraint according to thecorrect seat position and secure it››› page 142. »

143

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Removing the head restraints from the sec-ond and third row of seats


● Push the head restraint up as far as it willgo ››› .

● Pull out the head restraint ››› Fig. 153 1

with the button pressed.

● Fold the backrest of the rear seat back-wards until it is engaged.

Fitting the head restraints in the second andthird row of seats


● Insert the head restraint into the guides onthe seat backrest.

● Push the head restraint down while press-ing the button 1 .

● Fold the backrest of the rear seat backwardagain until it is engaged.

● Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 142.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere or fatal injuries in the event of acci-dents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

● Always fit and adjust the head restraintproperly whenever a person is occupying aseat.

● Refit any removed head restraints immedi-ately so that passengers are properly protec-ted.

● All vehicle occupants must correctly adjustthe head restraint according to their height toreduce the risk of back injuries in the event ofan accident. The upper edge of the head re-straint must be as close as possible to thesame level as the top of your head and underno circumstances below eye level. Keep theback of your neck as close as possible to thehead restraint.

● Never adjust the head restraint while thevehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

When removing and fitting the head restraint,make sure it does not hit the headliner of thevehicle or the front seat backrest. Otherwise,the interior roof and other parts of the vehiclecould be damaged.

Seat functions

Seat heating*

Fig. 154 Detailed view of the centre console:front seat heating controls, here with the sec-ond temperature level set

Fig. 155 Detailed view of the centre console:controls for the front seat heating in vehiclesequipped with Climatronic

144


The seat cushions can be heated electricallywhen the ignition is switched on. The back-rest is also heated in some versions.

Switch off seat heating if there is nobody inthe seat.

Function Action ››› Fig. 154, ››› Fig. 155

Activate Press button . Seat heating isswitched on fully.

Adjusting theheating output

Keep pressing button until the re-quired intensity is set.

Deactivating Keep pressing button until all ofthe lights are switched off››› Fig. 154, ››› Fig. 155.

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions cancause severe injuries.

● Assume the proper sitting position beforeyour trip and remain in it throughout. This al-so applies to the other occupants.

● Only adjust the seat position memory whenthe vehicle is stationary.

● Only switch the lumbar massage functionon and off when the vehicle is stationary.

● Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbsaway from the seat operating and adjustmentradius.

WARNING

People whose pain and temperature thresh-old has been affected by some kind of medi-cine, paraplegia or chronic illness (e.g. diabe-tes) may sustain burns to the back, buttocksand legs from using the seat heaters thatmay lead to a long healing process or thatmay never completely heal. Seek medical ad-vice if you have doubts regarding your health.

● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.

CAUTION

● To avoid damaging the heating elements ofthe seat heaters, please do not kneel on theseat or apply sharp pressure to a single pointon the seat cushion or backrest.

● Liquids, sharp objects and insulating mate-rials on the seat could damage the seat heat-ing.

● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have the unit in-spected by a specialised workshop.


The seat heating should remain on only whenneeded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuelwaste.

Lumbar massage function*

Fig. 156 On the side of the front seat: lumbarmassage function switch.

During the massage operation, the lumbarsupport will move in a way that massages thelumbar area of the back. While it is operat-ing, the arch of the lumbar support can beadjusted using the corresponding controlbased on your personal preferences››› page 57.

Connection

● Press the button in the control panel ofthe seat.

Disconnection

● Press the button again in the controlpanel of the seat. »

145

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Automatic off

● The lumbar massage will disconnect auto-matically after approx. 10 minutes.

Seat with position memory*

Fig. 157 Memory buttons on the outside ofthe driver seat

Memory buttons

Individual settings for the driver seat and theexterior mirror can be assigned to each mem-ory button.

Storing exterior mirror settings for drivingforwards




● Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir-rors.

● Keep the SET button held down for morethan one second ››› Fig. 157.

● Press the required memory button for thefollowing 10 seconds. An audible warningconfirms the settings have been stored.

Storing front passenger exterior mirror set-tings for driving in reverse gear




● Press the required memory button.


● Adjust the front passenger side exteriormirror so that you can see, for example, thekerb area.

● The new position of the mirror will be stor-ed automatically and allocated to the vehiclekey that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating exterior mirror settings

● With the driver door open and the ignitionturned off, push the memory button of thecorresponding door briefly.

● OR: with the ignition switched on, hold inthe corresponding memory button until thememorised position is reached.

To activate the memory function of the vehi-cle key

Important: a position must be memorised inthe memory.

● Open the driver-side door.

● Press and hold any memory button.

● Within the following three seconds, pushthe button to open the vehicle on the vehi-cle key. An audible warning confirms the set-tings have been activated.

Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving andassigning driver seat settings to a vehiclekey

● Activate the memory function of the vehiclekey

● Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir-rors.

● Lock the vehicle. The settings are assignedto the vehicle key.

To deactivate the memory function of the ve-hicle key

Important: a position must be memorised inthe memory.

● Press and hold the SET button.

● Within the following 10 seconds, push theopen button on the vehicle key. An audi-ble warning confirms the settings have beendeactivated.

146


Initialising the seat position memory

The position memory system must be restar-ted if, for example, the driver seat has beenchanged.

Restarting deletes all memories and assign-ments for the seat with position memory. Thememory buttons can then be reprogrammedand the vehicle keys re-assigned.

● Open the driver door and do not get intothe vehicle.

● Operating the seat settings from outsidethe vehicle.

● Move the angle of the seat backrest com-pletely forwards.

● Release the control to set the angle andthen press again until an audible warning isheard.

Note

The front passenger side exterior mirror auto-matically changes from the position storedfor reversing as soon as the vehicle movesforward at a speed of at least 15 km/h(9 mph) or when the gear selection lever ischanged to a position other than R.

Convenient entry function for the thirdrow of seats

Fig. 158 Second row of seats: convenient en-try function controls

The outer seats of the second row can be fol-ded to make it easier to get in and out of thethird row of seats.

Folding down the second row seats

● If necessary, open the belt loop and windup the seat belt by hand.

● If necessary, remove the side head restraintof the integrated child seat ››› page 78.

● If necessary, raise the armrests.

● Remove any objects located in the footwellof the second row of seats, where applicable››› .

● Push the head restraint down as far as itwill go ››› page 57.

● Push the lever ››› Fig. 158 1 forwards andfold the backrest of the rear seat. This seatfolds forward completely ››› and can stillbe moved further forward.

● Always take care when entering and leav-ing the vehicle ››› .

Repositioning the seat in the second row

● Lift the backrest of the rear seat in an up-right position. The entire seat folds back-wards ››› .

● Make sure that the rear seat is securely en-gaged so that the seat belts can provideproper protection in the rear seats. The redmark ››› Fig. 158 2 should no longer be visi-ble ››› in Folding down rear seats to createload space on page 154.

Emergency exit function

If the lever ››› Fig. 158 1 does not work, e.g.after an accident, the seats on the secondrow can be folded forwards from the third rowto allow vehicle occupants of the third row ofseats to get out of the vehicle ››› .

● Pull the handle ››› Fig. 158 3 back andfold the backrest of the rear seat. The com-plete rear seat folds forward ››› . »

147

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the conven-ient entry assistant may result in severe in-jury and accident.

● Never use the convenient entry functionwhen the vehicle is in motion.

● Avoid trapping or damaging the seat beltwhen folding the rear seats back.

● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and otherbody parts out of the hinges and the seatlocking mechanism when folding and unfold-ing.

● Mats or other objects can be caught in thehinges of the seat backrests or rear seat. Thiscould prevent the seat backrest from lockingsafely when positioned upright.

● All seat backrests must engage correctly forthe seat belts on the rear seats to work prop-erly. When the seat backrest of an occupiedseat is not correctly locked in place, the pas-senger can be thrust forward with the seatbackrest in case of sudden braking, suddenmanoeuvres or an accident.

● A red mark on the side of the seat››› Fig. 158 2 indicates that the seat back-rest is not engaged. The mark is no longervisible when it is correctly engaged.

● If the seat backrest or seat are folded downand are not correctly locked in place, no pas-senger should use them.

● When getting in or out, never lean or holdonto the folded seat on the second row ofseats.

WARNING

If child seats are fitted to all the seats in thesecond row then it is possible that the seatsof this row cannot be folded down from thethird row of seats in the event of an accident.In the event of an emergency, passengers inthe third row of seats will not be able to leavethe vehicle or to help themselves.

● Child seats should not occupy all the seatsof the second row if other passengers are tooccupy the third row.

CAUTION

● Before folding down the rear seat backrestfor returning it to its position, adjust the frontseats so that the head restraints and seatbackrests do not hit each other when foldingand unfolding.

● Any objects located in the footwell of thesecond row of seats may be damaged on fold-ing the rear seat forwards. Remove any ob-jects before folding the seat down.

Folding the backrest of the front pas-senger seat*

Fig. 159 Folding the backrest of the front pas-senger seat

Fig. 160 Unlocking the folding backrest of thefront passenger seat

The backrest of the front passenger seat canbe folded and locked horizontally.

148


The front passenger front airbag must be dis-abled ››› page 18 if objects are beingtransported on the folded front passengerseat.

Folding the backrest of the front passengerseat

● Remove any objects from the front passen-ger seat cushion ››› .

● Adjust the front passenger seat to its low-est position ››› page 57.


● Unlock the backrest of the front passengerseat in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 159

1 .

● Fold the backrest of the front passengerseat forwards in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 159 2 until it is horizontal.

● The backrest of the front passenger seatmust engage safely in its folded position.

Lifting the backrest of the front passengerseat

● Check that there are no objects or parts ofthe body in the hinge area.

● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seatby first unlocking it again ››› Fig. 160.

● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seatuntil it is upright. The seat backrest must beengaged.

● The upright backrest of the front passengerseat must safely engage.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the backrest of the frontpassenger seat uncontrollably or withoutpaying attention may lead to severe injuries.

● Only fold and lift the backrest of the frontpassenger seat when the vehicle is station-ary.

● While the backrest of the front passengerseat is folded, the front airbag must remaindisabled and the PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF light on.


● Mats or other objects can be caught in thehinges of the backrest of the front passengerseat. This could prevent the seat backrestfrom locking safely when positioned upright.

● The upright backrest of the front passengerseat must engage. If the backrest of the frontpassenger seat is not locked, it may suddenlymove and cause severe injuries.

WARNING

Seat anchors and hinges exposed when thebackrest of the front passenger seat is foldedmay lead to severe injuries in the event of anaccident or sudden braking.

● Never carry people or children on the frontpassenger seat when the seat backrest is fol-ded.

● When the backrest of the front passengerseat is folded, only the outer seat behind thedriver on the second row of seats may be oc-cupied. This also applies to children sitting ina child seat.

Centre armrest

Fig. 161 Front centre armrest

To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 161, settingby setting.

To lower the centre armrest, pull it down-wards. Then lower the centre armrest. »

149

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

The centre armrest may limit the freedom ofmovement of the driver's arm and cause a se-rious accident.

● Keep the centre armrest compartmentsclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

● The centre armrest is not designed for chil-dren to sit on! Sitting in this incorrect posi-tion can cause severe injuries.

Transport and practicalequipment

Transporting objects

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggagecompartment and place the seat backs in avertical position. Always use the anchors pro-vided with suitable rope to secure heavy ob-jects. Never overload the vehicle. Both thecarrying capacity as well as the distributionof the load in the vehicle affect driving be-haviour and braking ability ››› .

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects cancause serious injury in case of a sudden ma-noeuvring or breaking or in case of an acci-dent. This is especially true when objects arestruck by a detonating airbag and firedthrough the vehicle interior. To reduce therisks, please note the following:

● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Alwayskeep equipment and heavy objects in the lug-gage compartment.

● Always secure objects with suitable rope orslings so that they cannot enter the areasaround the front or side airbags in case ofsudden braking or an accident.

● Always ensure that objects inside the vehi-cle cannot move into the area of the airbagswhile driving.

● While driving, always keep object compart-ments closed.

● Remove all objects from the front passen-ger seat when it is folded down. When theseat backrest is folded down, it presses onsmall and light objects and these are detec-ted by the weight sensor on the seat; thissends false information to the airbag controlunit.

● While the backrest of the front passengerseat is folded, the front airbag must remaindisabled and the PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF light on.

● Objects secured in the vehicle should neverbe placed in such a way as to make passen-gers sit in an incorrect position.

● If secured objects occupy a seat, this seatshould not be occupied or used by anyone.

WARNING

The driving behaviour and braking abilitychange when transporting heavy and largeobjects.

● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi-bility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

● Accelerate gently and carefully.

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

● Brake early.

150

Transport and practical equipment

Transporting a load

Secure all objects in the vehicle

● Distribute the load throughout the vehicle,on the roof and in a trailer as uniformly aspossible.

● Transport heavy objects as far forward aspossible in the luggage compartment andlock the seat backs in the vertical position.

● Secure luggage in the luggage compart-ment with suitable straps on the fasteningrings ››› page 152.

● Check the headlight adjustment››› page 128.

● Use the suitable tyre pressure according tothe load being transported. Read the tyre in-flation information label ››› page 284.

● For vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,change the vehicle load status ››› page 231.

CAUTION

Objects on the shelf could chafe against thewires of the heating element in the heatedrear window and cause damage.

Note

Please note the information about loading atrailer ››› page 234 and the roof carrier sys-tem ››› page 161.

Driving with the rear lid open

Driving with the rear lid open creates an addi-tional risk. Secure all objects and secure therear lid correctly and take all measures possi-ble to reduce toxic gases from entering thevehicle.

WARNING

Driving with the rear lid unlocked or opencould cause serious injuries.

● Always drive with the rear lid closed.

● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Looseitems could fall out of the vehicle and injureother road users or damage other vehicles.

● Drive particularly carefully and thinkahead.

● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking giv-en that this could cause an uncontrolledmovement of the open rear lid.

● When transporting objects that protrudeout of the luggage compartment, indicatethem suitably. Observe legal requirements.

● If objects must project out of the luggagecompartment, the rear lid must never be usedto “secure” or “attach” objects.

● If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, itshould be removed before travelling with therear lid open.

WARNING

Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interiorwhen the rear lid is open. This could causeloss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poi-soning, serious injury and accidents.

● To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle al-ways drive with the rear lid closed.

● In exceptional circumstances, if you mustdrive with the rear lid open, observe the fol-lowing to reduce the entry of toxic gases in-side the vehicle:

– Close all windows and the sliding sun-roof.

– Turn off the air recirculation for the heat-ing and air conditioner.

– Open all of the air outlets in the dashpanel.

– Turn the heating fan and heater to thehighest level.

CAUTION

An open boot hatch changes the length andheight of the vehicle.

Driving with the vehicle loaded

For the best handling when driving a loadedvehicle, note the following:

● Secure all objects ››› page 151.

● Accelerate gently and carefully. »151

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

● Brake early.

● If necessary, read the instructions for driv-ing with a trailer ››› page 234.

● If necessary, read the instructions for driv-ing with a roof carrier system ››› page 161.

WARNING

A sliding load could considerably affect thestability and safety of the vehicle resulting inan accident with serious consequences.

● Secure loads correctly so they do not move.

● When transporting heavy objects, use suit-able ropes or straps.

● Lock the seat backs in vertical position.

Luggage compartment

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggagecompartment and place the seat backs in avertical position. Always use the fasteningrings with suitable rope or straps. Never over-load the vehicle. Both the carrying capacityas well as the distribution of the load in thevehicle have effects on the driving behaviourand braking ability ››› .

WARNING

When the vehicle is not in use or beingwatched, always lock the doors and the rearlid to reduce the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● Do not leave children unwatched, especial-ly when the boot is open. Children couldclimb into the luggage compartment, closethe rear lid from inside and be unable to es-cape themselves. This could lead to seriousinjury or death.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle.

● Never transport people in the luggage com-partment.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects cancause serious injury in case of a sudden ma-noeuvring or breaking or in case of an acci-dent. This is especially true when objects arestruck by a detonating airbag and firedthrough the vehicle interior. To reduce therisks, please note the following:

● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Alwaysplace equipment and heavy objects in theboot.

● Always secure objects with suitable ropesor straps so that they cannot be pushed in-side the cabin and move around the areasaround the front or side airbags in the eventof sudden braking or an accident.


● Do not place hard, heavy or sharp objectsinside the vehicle interior, in open storagecompartments, the rear shelf or on the dashpanel.

● Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects fromclothes and pockets inside the vehicle andstore securely.

WARNING

The transport of heavy object changes vehi-cle handling and increases braking distance.Heavy loads that have not been stored or se-cured correctly could cause loss of controland result in serious injury.

● Vehicle handling changes when transport-ing heavy objects due to a change in the cen-tre of gravity.

● Distribute the load as uniformly and as lowdown on the vehicle as possible.

● Store heavy objects in the luggage com-partment as far from the rear axle as possi-ble.

CAUTION

● Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafethe wires of the heating element and antennaof the rear window and cause damage.

● The side window antenna could be dam-aged due to chafing from objects.

152


Note

The ventilating slits between the heated rearwindow and the shelf must not be covered sothat used air can escape from the vehicle.

Folding down rear seats to create loadspace

Fig. 162 Second row of seats: folding the rearseat A, rear seat as load space B.

Fig. 163 Third row of seats: fold down therear seat to load A then return to position B

Each rear seat can fold down individually toextend the luggage compartment.

Folding the seats in the second row of seatsfor loading


● If required, remove the head restraints fromthe integrated seats for children and refitthem ››› page 78.

● If necessary, raise the armrests.

● Remove objects from the footwell in front ofand behind the rear seat ››› .

● Move the rear seat all the way back.


● In the middle seat, close the drinks carrierin the rear of the centre console, if necessary.

● Pull lever ››› Fig. 162 1 back and fold theseat backrest forwards. The complete rearseat folds forward ››› .

● Fold the seat backrest forwards until itlocks into the load surface position››› Fig. 162 B.

● If necessary, pull on the lever ››› Fig. 163 2

to move the seat to the required position.

● When the seat is folded down, no adults orchildren should travel in it ››› .

Folding the seats in the third row of seats forloading


● Open the rear lid.

● Push the head restraint down as far as itwill go ››› page 57. »

153

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Remove objects from the footwell in front ofand behind the rear seat ››› .

● Remove objects from the space below therear seat.

● Remove the attachment elements and sup-ports for the net from the rail system.

● Pull lever ››› Fig. 163 1 back and fold theseat backrest forwards. The rear seat foldsforward ››› and the cushion also moves for-ward.

● Fold the seat tray forward on top of the fol-ded seat.

● When the seat is folded down, no adults orchildren should travel in it ››› .

Putting the seats in the second row back inplace

● Pull lever ››› Fig. 162 1 upwards and placethe seat backrests in vertical position. Theentire seat folds backwards.

● Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrestto ensure that they are correctly locked inplace and that the seat belt protection isguaranteed for rear seat passengers.

Putting the seats in the third row back inplace


● Pull on the handle ››› Fig. 163 2 to put theseat tray back in position.

● Pull on the handle ››› Fig. 163 3 . The en-tire seat folds backwards.

● Press on the seat tray in the seat backrestuntil it is held in position by its magnets.

● Open the sliding door.

● Put the seat backrest into position andpress firmly until it clicks into place.

● Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrestto ensure that they are correctly locked inplace and that the seat belt protection isguaranteed for rear seat passengers.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the rear seats carelesslywithout paying attention could cause seriousinjury.

● Never fold or lift the seats while driving.

● Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais-ing the seat backrest.


● Mats or other objects can be caught in thehinges of the seat backrests or rear seat. Thiscould prevent the seat or seat backrest fromlocking securely in the vertical position.

● All seat backrests must engage correctly forthe seat belts on the rear seats to work prop-erly. When the seat backrest of an occupiedseat is not correctly locked in place, the pas-senger can be thrust forward with the seat

backrest in case of sudden braking, suddenmanoeuvres or an accident.

● No seat must be occupied if the seat back-rest or seat is folded or not correctly engag-ed.

CAUTION

● Before folding the rear seat backrest, ad-just the front seats so that neither the headrestraint or backrest hit them when folded.

● Objects placed in the footrest area in frontof and behind the rear seats can be damagedwhen seats are folded down or put back intoposition. Remove any objects in the way be-fore folding seats down or repositioningthem.

● Objects placed in the moulding on the backof the third row of seats can be damagedwhen folding down the seats or putting themback into position. Remove any objects in theway before folding seats down or reposition-ing them.

● The attachment elements and supports forthe net partition placed on the rail systemcan be damaged when folding down seatsfrom the third row or putting them back intoposition and these can also damage the seatsthemselves. Before folding down or reposi-tioning the seats, remove the attachment ele-ments and supports for the net from the railsystem.

154


Shelf*

Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: rearshelf

Fig. 165 Remove the shelf supports A thenput them away safely B.

The rear shelf can be fitted behind the sec-ond or third row of seats ››› .

Opening the shelf

● Pull the shelf handle ››› Fig. 164 A back-wards.

● Release the shelf upwards by the side sup-ports and guide it forward.

Closing the shelf

● Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guidebackwards.

● Secure the shelf using the left and rightside supports.

Installing the shelf behind the second row ofseats

● Place the shelf in its position in the sidelining, left-hand side first.

● Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-row ››› Fig. 164 B .

● Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,pressing down.

Installing the shelf behind the third row ofseats

● Remove the shelf from the support in theside lining ››› Fig. 165 A. To do this, press theshelf upwards (arrow) and remove it.

● Open the compartment in the left-handside boot lining ››› page 163 and hook theshelf to the rear of the compartment lid››› Fig. 165 B.

● Close the rear left-hand side lining com-partment.

● Place the shelf in its position in the sidelining, left-hand side first. »

155

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Lift the shelf off in direction of the arrow››› Fig. 164 B .

● Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,pressing down.

Removing the shelf

● Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-row ››› Fig. 164 B and lift it in the directionof the arrow C .

● Remove the shelf from the right-hand sidesupport.

● In addition, when removing the shelf be-hind the third row of seats: cover the side lin-ing supports with their covers.

● Only with 5 places: support the releasedshelf by placing it on the front section of theboot floor ››› page 163.

WARNING

If the shelf is placed on one of the rear seats,this could cause serious injury in case of sud-den braking or an accident.

● Whenever it the third row seats are occu-pied, the shelf should be put behind this row.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects oranimals on the rear shelf could cause seriousinjuries in case of a sudden manoeuvre orbraking or even an accident.

● Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp objects(loose or in bags) on the rear shelf.

● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

Net partition*

Fig. 166 Unfold the net partition 1 then foldit again 2 and 3

Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: installthe net partition behind the second row ofseats.

The net partition can prevent objects in theluggage compartment entering the vehicleinterior / the driver area.

First remove the net from its bag and unfoldit.

Fold out the net partition

Fold out the cross support rods ››› Fig. 166 1

for the net partition fully in the direction ofthe arrow until you hear a “click”.

Installing the net partition behind the sec-ond row of seats

● Hook in the net partition on the left-handside roof support ››› Fig. 167. To do this,guide the rod from up to down.

156


● Hook in the net partition on the rear right-hand side roof support by pressing on therod.

● Secure the net partition hooks into thestraps in the front of the boot ››› Fig. 167 thentighten the belts.

Installing the net partition behind the frontseats

● Hook in the net partition on the front left-hand side roof support ››› Fig. 167. To do this,guide the rod from up to down.

● Hook in the net partition on the rear right-hand side roof support by pressing on therod.

● Secure the hooks of the net partition to theattachment rings in the left and right handside footwells on the second row of seatsthen tighten the straps.

Removing the net partition

● Loosen the net partition straps.

● Release the net partition hooks from therings ››› Fig. 167.

● Unhook the net partition on the right-handside roof support ››› Fig. 167 by pressing onthe rod.

● Unhook the net partition from the left-handside roof support.

Folding in the net partition

● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 166 2

and bend the rod A in the direction of thearrow with the release button pressed.

● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 166 3

and bend the rod B in the direction of thearrow with the release button pressed.

● Store the net partition securely in the vehi-cle.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be vi-olently thrown in case of a sudden manoeu-vre or braking and especially in accidentscausing serious injury.

● Ensure that the rods are correctly locked inplace.

● Even when the net partition is correctly fit-ted, objects must be secured.

● When driving with the net partition, no pas-sengers should be behind it.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: fasten-ing rings

To the front and rear of the luggage compart-ment, there are fastening rings for securingobjects ››› Fig. 168 (arrows). On some mod-els, the fastening rings are located right atthe back, in the area of the lock carrier plate.

There are other fastening rings located to theleft and right hand side of the second rowfootrests.

Some models of fastening rings must be lif-ted to use them.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps maybe released in case of sudden braking or anaccident. As a result, objects may be firedthrough the vehicle interior causing seriousinjury or death. »

157

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Always use suitable ropes and straps ingood condition.

● Secure the ropes and straps to the fasten-ing rings.

● Loose objects in the luggage compartmentcan suddenly slide and change the way thevehicle handles.

● Secure all objects, little and large.

● Never secure a load that is too heavy forthe fastening rings.

● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note

● The maximum load of the fastening rings isapproximately 3.5 kN (3.57 kp).

● You can find suitable transport straps andload securing systems at a specialised work-shop. SEAT recommends taking your car in fortechnical service.

Rails and attachment system*

Fig. 169 In the luggage compartment: systemincluding rails, adjustable attachment ele-ments 1 and adjustable tightening straps

2 .

The rails and attachment system consists offour rails, movable attachment elements,straps to be secured to the rails and a netwith supports to cover baggage ››› page 159.The rail and attachment system is designedto secure light objects. If the seats in thethird row are to be occupied by passengersthen attachment elements should never beplaced in the section of the rails close to theseats ››› .

Installing the attachment elements

● Fit the attachment element with the rutsfacing upwards ››› Fig. 169 1 to the upperpart of the guide and press downwards.

● Move the attachment element to the de-sired position.

● Always ensure that the attachment insertsinto the guide system ››› .

Removing the attachment elements

● Remove the attachment element from theguide and pull downwards.

Securing a load

● Pull the strap through the attachment ele-ment and secure the load ››› .

WARNING

In case of an accident or sudden braking, theattachment elements in the parts of the railsclose to the seats of the third row could in-jure seat occupants.

● Whenever the seats on the third row are tobe occupied, remove the attachment ele-ments from the rails or move them all the wayback.

WARNING

Movable attachment elements that are notsecured correctly can be released from theguide in case of sudden braking or accident.As a result, objects may be fired through thevehicle interior causing serious injury ordeath.

158


● Always ensure that the movable attach-ment elements are correctly inserted into theguides.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps maybe released in case of sudden braking or anaccident. As a result, objects may be firedthrough the vehicle interior causing seriousinjury or death.

● Always use the attachment straps of therail and attachment system.

● Secure the attachment straps firmly to theattachment elements.

● Loose objects in the luggage compartmentcan suddenly slide and change the way thevehicle handles.

● Secure all objects, little and large.

● Never secure a child seat to the attachmentelements.

CAUTION

● The attachment elements placed on the railsystem can be damaged when folding downseats from the third row or putting them backinto position and these can also damage theseats themselves. Before folding down or re-positioning the seats, remove the attachmentelements and supports for the net from therail system.

Baggage net*

Fig. 170 Hook the baggage net A and use itas a bag B.

Fig. 171 Release the baggage net

If the seats in the third row are to be occu-pied by passengers then attachment ele-ments should never be placed in the sectionof the rails close to the seats ››› .

Installing the baggage net supports

● Fit the baggage net support into the guidefrom the back and press downwards.

● Move the baggage net support to the re-quired position.

● Always ensure that the net support insertsinto the rail system ››› .

Hooking the baggage net into the support

Place the attachment rod on the baggage netsupport ››› Fig. 170 1 and rotate 90° to theleft 2 . The red mark on the attachment rodshould not be visible ››› . »

159

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Using the net for bag type baggage

● Fit the baggage net supports to each one ofthe upper rails.

● Fit a movable baggage net attachment ele-ment to each one of the lower guides››› page 158.

● Hook the baggage net into the supports.

● Hook the baggage net attachment strap un-derneath into one of the movable attachmentelements ››› Fig. 170 B.

● Join the baggage net supports to the upperrails as much as possible by pushing them.

● Press the sides of the baggage net togetherso that they are held by the Velcro.

Using the baggage net to separate the lug-gage compartment

● Fit the baggage net supports to each one ofthe upper rails.

● Fit the baggage net supports to each one ofthe lower rails.

● Hook the baggage net into the supports.

To release the baggage net

● Rotate the attachment rod 90° to the right››› Fig. 171 1 until you can see the red markon the rod. Pull the attachment rod upwards

2 .

● Only with 5 places: after removing, placethe baggage net safely in the front compart-ment on the floor of the boot ››› page 163.

Removing the baggage net supports

● Remove the net attachment element fromthe rail and pull it out downwards.

WARNING

In case of an accident or sudden braking, thenet attachment elements in the parts of therails close to the seats of the third row couldinjure seat occupants.

● Whenever the seats on the third row are tobe occupied, remove the attachment ele-ments from the rails or move them all the wayback.

WARNING

Baggage net supports that are not securedcorrectly can be released from the guide incase of the sudden braking or accident. As aresult, objects may be fired through the vehi-cle interior causing serious injury or death.

● Always ensure that the baggage net sup-ports are correctly inserted into the rails; thered mark should not be visible.

● Never secure a child seat to the baggagenet supports.

CAUTION

● The baggage net supports placed on therail system can be damaged when foldingdown seats from the third row or puttingthem back into position and these can alsodamage the seats themselves. Before folding

down or repositioning the seats, remove thebaggage net supports from the rail system.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 172 In the luggage compartment: retain-ing hooks

On the right-hand side of the luggage com-partment, there are folding retaining hooks››› Fig. 172 that can be used to secure lightshopping bags.

● Press the retaining hooks down ››› Fig. 172(arrow) and fold them.

● Hook the bags in place.

● After use, raise the hooks again.

WARNING

Never use these hooks to secure objects. Inthe event of sudden braking or an accident,they could be pulled out.

160


CAUTION

The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg(about 5 lbs).

Luggage net*

Fig. 173 In the luggage compartment: netused on secured baggage

The baggage net can be used to secure light-er items.

Hooking the baggage net into the boot floor

● Hook the baggage net into the fasteningrings ››› Fig. 173 1 and 2 .

Releasing the baggage net

The secured baggage net is taut ››› .

● Carefully unhook the baggage net hooksfrom the fastening rings ››› Fig. 173 1 .

● Carefully unhook the baggage net hooksfrom the fastening rings ››› Fig. 173 2 .

WARNING

The elastic baggage net stretches when it issecured to the luggage compartment fasten-ing rings. The secured baggage net is taut.The hooks on the net can cause injury if thenet is incorrectly hooked or unhooked.

● Always ensure that the hooks do not sud-denly release from the fastening rings whenhooking or un-hooking.

● Always keep your face and eyes protectedat a safe distance to avoid injury should ahook slip while hooking or unhooking.

● Always engage the hooks in the order giv-en. If a baggage net hook springs back thiscan cause injury.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, conven-tional roof carrier systems cannot be securedto the roof water drain channel.

Given that the water drains have been incor-porated into the roof for aerodynamic rea-sons, only the SEAT approved basic supportsand roof carrier systems can be used.

When should the roof carrier system be re-moved?

● When it is not being used.

● When the vehicle is being washed in a carwash.

● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height (e.g. in a garage).

WARNING

The risk of an accident is increased by trans-porting heavy or bulky loads on the roof,which affects the car's handling by shiftingthe centre of gravity and increasing suscepti-bility to cross winds.

● Always secure loads correctly with suitableand undamaged attachment rope or straps.

● Large, heavy, wide and flat loads negativelyaffect the vehicle aerodynamics, centre ofgravity and handling.

● Avoid brusque manoeuvres and suddenbraking.


CAUTION

● Always remove the roof carrier system fromthe roof before entering a car wash.

● The height of your vehicle is changed bythe installation of the roof carrier and theload secured on it. Compare the vehicleheight with the passage height, for examplein underground car parks or for garage doors. »

161

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● The roof antenna, the range of the panor-amic sliding sunroof and the boot hatchshould not be affected by the roof carrier sys-tem and the load being transported.

● Take extra care not to let the hatch strikethe roof load when opening.


The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof car-rier system is fitted.

Fastening the base supports and theroof carrier system

Fig. 174 Attachment points for the basic sup-port and the roof carrier system

The mounts are the basis of a complete roofcarrier system. Special fixtures must then beadded in order to safely transport luggage,bicycles, skis, surf boards, boats, etc. on the

roof. All these system components are availa-ble from a technical service centre.

Securing the base supports and roof carriersystem

Always secure the base supports and roofcarrier system correctly.

The roof carrier system must always be instal-led exactly according to the instructions pro-vided.

The position openings are located on the in-ner side of the side roof rods ››› Fig. 174.

WARNING

If the base supports and the roof carrier sys-tem are incorrectly fitted or used in an unsuit-able manner, the entire system could breakfree causing accident and injury.

● Always take the manufacturer assembly in-structions into account.

● Only use base supports and roof carriersystems that are not damaged and are cor-rectly fitted.

● The base support should only be fitted tothe points indicated in the diagram››› Fig. 174.

● Secure the base supports and roof carriersystem correctly.

● Check the screws and attachments beforedriving and after a short distance. Duringeach long journey, check the attachmentsduring every break.

● Always fit the roof carrier system correctlyfor wheels, skis, surfboards, etc.

● Never modify or repair the basic supportsor roof carrier system.

Note

Read and take into account the instructionsincluded with the roof carrier system fittedand keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier

Loads can only be correctly secured when theroof carrier system is correctly fitted ››› .

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum authorised roof load is 100 kg(220 lbs). The roof load includes the roof car-rier system and the load being transported››› .

Always check the roof carrier system weightand the weight of the load to be transportedand, if necessary, weigh them. Never exceedthe maximum authorised roof load.

If you are using a roof carrier with a lowerweight rating, you cannot transport the maxi-mum roof load. Do not exceed the maximumweight limit for the roof carrier given in thefitting instructions.

162


Distributing a load

Uniformly distribute loads and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachments

After fitting the base supports and the roofcarrier system, always check the attachmentsafter a short trip and at regular intervals.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof loadcan result in accidents and/or vehicle dam-age.

● Never surpass the maximum authorisedweight for the roof, the maximum authorisedweight on the axles and the total maximumauthorised weight of the vehicle.

● Never exceed the capacity of the roof carri-er system even if this is less than the maxi-mum authorised roof load.

● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-ble and, in general, distribute the vehicleload uniformly.

WARNING

Loose and incorrectly secured loads can fallfrom the roof carrier system causing acci-dents and injury.

● Always use suitable ropes and straps ingood condition.

● Always secure loads correctly.

Storage compartments

Introduction

Storage compartments must only be used tostore light or small objects.

In the front centre armrest compartment thefollowing factory-fitted connections are avail-able: USB/AUX-IN.

The factory-fitted CD changer is located in theleft-hand storage compartment of the boot.

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements orturns, loose objects may be thrown aroundthe vehicle interior. This could cause seriousinjuries to passengers and cause the driver tolose control of the vehicle.

● Do not transport animals or place hard,heavy or sharp objects inside the vehicle in:open storage compartments, dash panel, rearshelf, items of clothing or bags.


WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell couldprevent use of the pedals. This could lead thedriver to lose control of the vehicle, increas-ing the risk of a serious accident.

● Make sure the pedals can be used at alltimes, with no objects rolling underneaththem.

● The floor mat should always be secured tothe floor.

● Never place other mats or rugs on top ofthe original mat supplied by the factory.

● Make sure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.

CAUTION

● Objects on the shelf could chafe againstthe wires of the heating element in the heat-ed rear window and cause damage.

● Do not keep heat-sensitive objects, food ormedicines inside the vehicle. Heat and coldcould damage them or render them useless.

● Light-transparent objects placed inside thevehicle, such as lenses, magnifying glassesor transparent suction caps on the windows,may concentrate the sun's rays and causedamage to the vehicle.

Note

The ventilating slits between the heated rearwindow and the shelf must not be covered sothat used air can escape from the vehicle.

163

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

(Sun)glasses case in the roof console

Fig. 175 On the roof console: sunglassesstorage compartment.

To open, press and release the button››› Fig. 175 (arrow).

To close, press the cover upwards until itclicks into place.

To ensure the interior monitoring works cor-rectly, the (sun)glasses case must be closedwhen the vehicle is locked ››› page 118.

Storage compartment in the roof con-sole

Fig. 176 On the roof console: storage com-partment

To open press the button and release it››› Fig. 176.

To close, press the storage compartment up-wards until it clicks into place.

To ensure interior monitoring works properly,the storage compartments must be closedwhen the vehicle is locked ››› page 118.

Compartment on the instrument pan-el*

Fig. 177 Storage compartment on the dashpanel

The storage compartment on the instrumentpanel may have a cover.

To open, press the button on the cover››› Fig. 177 (arrow).

To close, press the cover down until it clicksinto place.

164


Compartment on the centre console

Fig. 178 Compartment in the front centre con-sole.

There is an open compartment on the centreconsole ››› Fig. 178 in which there may be a12 volt power socket ››› page 170.

Compartment in the front central arm-rest

Fig. 179 Storage compartment in the frontcentral armrest.

To open, fully lift the central armrest in the di-rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 179.

To close, lower the central armrest.

WARNING

The centre armrest may limit the freedom ofmovement of the driver's arm and cause a se-rious accident.

● Keep the centre armrest compartmentsclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

The centre armrest is not designed for chil-dren to sit on!

Card compartment*

Fig. 180 Centre console, lower section: cardcompartment

To the bottom of the centre console there is acompartment ››› Fig. 180 1 for coins, cards,car park tickets and similar items.

Note

To avoid theft or use by others, do not use thecompartment to store credit or ATM cards orsimilar.

165

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Glove compartment

Fig. 181 Glove compartment

Fig. 182 Glove compartment open

Opening and closing the glove compartment

Unlock the glove compartment where neces-sary. The glove compartment is locked whenthe key slot is vertical.

Pull the lever to open ››› Fig. 181.

Press the cover upwards to close.

Vehicle wallet compartment

The glove compartment is designed to storethe vehicle documentation.

The vehicle on-board documentation walletshould always be kept in the glove compart-ment. Insert it crosswise in the glove com-partment.

Glove compartment cooling

There is an air vent ››› Fig. 182 A on the rearpanel so that cooled air from the air condi-tioner (this must be connected) is fed intothe glove compartment. Turn the air vent toopen and close it.

WARNING

The risk of serious injuries in the event of anaccident during a sudden braking manoeuvreor turn is increased if the glove compartmentis left open.

● Keep the glove compartment closed whilethe vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

For structural reasons, some model versionswill have gaps behind the glove compartmentinto which small objects may fall. This couldlead to strange noises and damage to the ve-hicle. You should therefore not keep verysmall objects in the glove compartment.

Storage compartments in the rearfootwell*

Fig. 183 Storage compartments in the foot-well of the second row of seats.

Move the mat to one side (where applicable).

To open, pull on the rear centre part of thecover ››› Fig. 183 (arrow).

To close, press the cover down.

WARNING

Make sure children are properly belted in andcorrectly secured to avoid severe or fatal inju-ries while the vehicle is in motion.

● If you are using a child seat with a base orfoot, always install this base or foot correctlyand safely.

● If the vehicle has a storage compartment inthe footwell in front of the last row of seats,

166


this compartment cannot be used as de-signed; on the contrary, it must be filled us-ing the specially designed accessory so thatthe base or foot is correctly supported by theclosed compartment and the child seat is se-cured properly. If this compartment is notsuitably secured when using a child seat witha base or foot then the compartment covercould rupture in an accident and the child willbe ejected and suffer serious injury.


Drawers*

Fig. 184 Drawer under the front seat

There may be a drawer below the front seats.

Opening and closing the drawer

To open, press the button on the drawer han-dle and pull the drawer out.

To close, push the drawer under the seat untilit clicks into place.

WARNING

If the drawer is open it could obstruct use ofthe pedals. This could result in serious acci-dent.

● The drawers must remain closed while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawerand any objects in it could fall into the driv-er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

Folding table*

Fig. 185 Folding table on the front seat

Fold out the table by pulling on it ››› Fig. 185(arrow).

A drink holder is built into the folding table››› page 168.

To fold it back, push the folding table downas far as possible ››› Fig. 185.

WARNING

The folding table must not be folded downwhile the vehicle is in motion to avoid therisk of injuries.

Portable waste bin*

Fig. 186 Left sliding door trim: portable wastebin.

The portable waste bin fits onto the bottleholder on the trim of the left-hand slidingdoor.

WARNING

Do not use the portable waste bin as an ash-tray to avoid the risk of fire.

167

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Other storage compartments

Fig. 187 In the luggage compartment: Sidestorage compartment

Fig. 188 Other compartments in the bootfloor.

Side compartments in the luggage compart-ment

There are other compartments ››› Fig. 187 1

and 2 in the side of the boot. To open thecompartment 1 , turn the catch clockwise. Toopen the compartment 2 , lift the cover.Compartment 1 houses the factory fitted CDchanger. The compartment lid 1 can safelystore the tray support covers.

Compartments in the boot floor

More storage compartments can be found inthe boot floor.


Open the rear com-partment ››› Fig. 188

4 :

Lift the rear of the boot floorusing the handle.

Keeping the rear com-partment open:

Move the hook at the rearright of the boot and hook theboot floor onto it ››› page 152.

Closing the compart-ment:

Push back the hook andpush the rear of the boot floor

4 down.

Other storage compartments:

● in the centre console, front and rear.

● in the door trims, front and rear.

● Coat hooks on the central door pillars andon the rear roof handles.

● Bag hook in the luggage compartment››› page 152.

WARNING

Clothing hung on the coat hooks could re-strict the driver's view and lead to serious ac-cidents.

● Hang the clothes from the hooks so thatdriver's view is not restricted.

● The coat hook is suitable for light items ofclothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharpobjects in the bags.

CAUTION

Keep the CD changer compartment closedwhile the vehicle is in motion to reduce vibra-tions that could damage the changer.

Note

The first aid kit is located in the rear left com-partment of the luggage compartment.

Drink holders

Introduction

Bottle holders

There is a bottle holder in the open compart-ments in the driver and front passengerdoors and in that of the sliding door.

168


WARNING

Improper use of the drink holders can causeinjury.

● Never place hot drinks in the drink holders.During sudden braking or driving manoeu-vres, the hot drink could be spilled and leadto scalding.

● Ensure that no bottles or other object aredropped in the driver footwell, as they couldget under the pedals and obstruct their work-ing.

● Never place heavy containers, food or otherheavy objects in the drink holder. In theevent of an accident, these heavy objectscould be “thrown around” the vehicle interiorand cause serious injuries.

WARNING

Closed bottles inside the vehicle could ex-plode or crack due to the heat or the cold.

● Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle ifthe inside temperature is too high or too low.

CAUTION

Do not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. They couldspill during braking, for example, and causedamage to the vehicle and the electrical sys-tem.

Note

The drink holders can be removed for clean-ing.

Drink holders in front centre console

Fig. 189 Front centre console: drink holder

● To open, move the cover backwards››› Fig. 189.

● To close, move the cover forwards.

Drink holders, rear*

Fig. 190 Centre console, rear section: foldingout the drink holder

Opening and closing the drink holder in therear centre console

● To open, move the drink holder downwardsin the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 190.

● To close, lift the drink holder.

The third row of seats has a drink holder inthe side trim compartment on the rear left.

169

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Ashtray and cigarette lighter*

Ashtray

Fig. 191 Front centre console: ashtray closed

There are ashtrays located on the front of thecentre console ››› Fig. 191 and on the rear lin-ing of the rear door.

Opening and closing the ashtray

● To open, lift the ashtray cover.

● To close, push the ashtray cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

● Remove the ashtray from the drink holderor lining of the door by pulling it upwards.

● After emptying the ashtray, insert it fromabove into the drink holder or door lining.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the ashtray may cause a fireor burns and other serious injuries.

● Never put paper or other flammable objectsin the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter

Fig. 192 Front centre console: lighter

Depending on the vehicle equipment, theremay be a lighter to the front of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 192 or in the compartment tothe front of the centre console.

● Push the button on the cigarette lighter in-wards with the ignition on ››› Fig. 192.

● Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

● Pull out the cigarette lighter and light thecigarette on the glowing coil ››› .

● Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert.

WARNING

Undue use of the cigarette lighter may causea fire or burns and other serious injuries.

● The cigarette lighter must only be used tolight cigarettes or similar.

● Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. The cigarette lighter can be usedwhen the ignition is switched on.

Note

The cigarette lighter can also be used withthe 12 volt power socket ››› page 170.

Power sockets

Introduction

Electrical equipment can be connected to thepower sockets in the vehicle.

All connected appliances should be in per-fect working order without any faults.

WARNING

Improper use of the power sockets or electri-cal devices could lead to a fire and cause seri-ous injuries.

● Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. The power sockets and equipmentconnected to them can be used when the ig-nition is switched on.

170


● Should a connected electrical device over-heat, switch it off and unplug it immediately.

CAUTION

● To avoid damage to the vehicle's electricalsystem, never connect equipment that gener-ates electrical current, such as solar panelsor battery chargers, to the 12 volt powersockets in order to charge the vehicle's bat-tery.

● Only use accessories with approved elec-tromagnetic compatibility according to cur-rent regulations.

● To avoid damage due to voltage variations,switch off all devices connected to the 12 Vpower sockets before switching the ignitionon or off and before starting the engine.

● Never connect an appliance to the 12 voltpower socket that consumes more than thepower indicated in watts. Exceeding the max-imum power absorption could damage the ve-hicle's electrical system.


Do not leave the engine running when the ve-hicle is at a standstill.

Note

● Using devices with the engine stopped andthe ignition switched on will drain the bat-tery.

● Unshielded equipment can cause interfer-ence on the radio equipment and the vehi-cle's electrical system.

● Interference can occur on the radio's AMwaveband if electrical appliances are usednear the rear window aerial.

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 193 Centre console, rear section: 12 voltsocket

Fig. 194 Rear centre console: 230 Volt Europower socket

Depending on your vehicle version, you mayhave a 12-volt power socket and/or a 230volt power socket.

Maximum power consumption

Power sock-et

Maximum power consumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 Watts (300 Watt peak)

The maximum capacity of each power socketmust not be exceeded. The power consump-tion is indicated on the rating plate of eachappliance.

Where two or more appliances are connectedat the same time, the total rating of all theconnected devices must never exceed 190Watts ››› . »

171

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

12 volt power socket

The 12 volt power socket will only work withthe ignition on.

Using electrical appliances with the enginestopped and the ignition switched on willdrain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi-ces connected to the power socket can onlybe used when the engine is running.

To prevent voltage variations from causingdamage, switch off the electrical consumerconnected to the 12 volt power socket beforeswitching the ignition on or off and beforestarting the engine.

12 volt power sockets can be found in the fol-lowing locations in the vehicle:

● Compartment in the centre of the centreconsole.

● Compartment in the front centre console.

● Storage compartment in the front centralarmrest.

● Rear centre console ››› Fig. 193.

● At the rear right of the luggage compart-ment.

230 Volt Euro power socket*

The power socket only works when the en-gine is running ››› .

Connecting an electrical appliance: plug thedevice into the power socket as far as possi-ble to unlock the built-in childproof lock. The

current only flows when the childproof lock isunlocked.

LED on the power socket ››› Fig. 194

Steady green light: The childproof lock is un-locked. The power socket cannow be used.

Flashing red light: There is some kind of fault(e.g. disconnection due to ex-cess current or temperature).

Heat protection

The 230 Volt Euro power connector converterswitches off automatically when a certaintemperature is exceeded. This disconnectprevents overheating in the event of an in-crease in power consumption of the connec-ted appliance and where the atmospherictemperature is too high. The inverter willswitch on again automatically after it hascooled down. Appliances that are switchedon and connected to the power socket willstart up again. Therefore, switch off all elec-trical appliances connected to the powersocket when the current converter switchesoff due to overheating.

WARNING

High voltage in the electrical installation!

● Liquids must not be spilt over the powersocket.

● Do not plug adapters or extension cords in-to the 230 Volt Euro power connector. Other-wise, the built-in child safety device willswitch off and the connector will become live.

● Do not plug current conductors such as aknitting needle into the 230 Volt Euro powerconnector.

CAUTION

● Always follow the operating instructions forthe appliances to be connected!

● Never exceed the maximum power rating asthis could damage the vehicle's general elec-trical system.

● 12 volt power socket:

– Only use accessories with approved elec-tromagnetic compatibility according tocurrent regulations.

– Never power the socket.

● 230 Volt Euro power socket:

– Do not plug in devices or connectors thatare too heavy (e.g. a transformer) into thepower socket.

– Do not connect lamps which contain a ne-on tube.

– Only plug appliances with a voltage thatmatches the power socket voltage intothe power socket.

– Where devices have with a high start-upcurrent, surge protection prevents themfrom switching on. In this case, unplug

172

Air conditioning

the device and try plugging it back in af-ter around 10 seconds.

Note

● Some appliances may not work properly inthe 230 Volt Euro power connector due to alack of power (Watts).

● The 230 Watt Euro power connector can bemodified for 115 Watt appliances and viceversa. Consult a specialist shop for advice onaccessories to adapt the connector. SEAT rec-ommends taking your car in for technicalservice.

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Introduction

Viewing Climatronic information

The factory-fitted radio or navigation systemscreen briefly displays information relating toClimatronic.

The units of temperature measurement is dis-played on the factory-installed radio or navi-gation system and, depending on the vehicleequipment, can be set using the Configu-ration menu on the instrument panel.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.

● Ensure that all windows are free of ice andsnow and that they are not fogged up pre-venting a clear view of everything outside.

● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows quickly is only available whenthe engine has reached its normal runningtemperature. Only drive when you have goodvisibility.

● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioner and heated rear window to maintaingood visibility.

● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system is

switched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist over veryquickly, considerably limiting visibility.

● Switch air recirculation mode off when it isnot required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-duce driver concentration possibly resultingin a serious accident.

● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will not berefreshed.

CAUTION

● Switch the air conditioner off if you think itmay be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checked bya specialised workshop.

● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec-ommends taking your car in for technicalservice.

● Do not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condition-er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-ing system vaporiser and on the activatedcharcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-ter, leading to a permanently unpleasantsmell. »

173

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried. Toavoid fogging up the windows, SEAT recom-mends leaving the cooler (compressor) on. Todo this, press the A/C button. The buttonlamp should light up.

● If the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle, this iscompletely normal and there is no need tosuspect a leak.

● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-sure heating and cooling are not impaired,and to prevent the windows from mistingover.

Controls


To switch a function on or off, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

Some Climatronic controls may also be onthe air conditioner control panel located inthe rear centre console. These controls are

used to make the appropriate settings for therear seats.

Note

● Not all Climatronic buttons are operationalin REAR mode.

● The REAR button is locked in defrost mode.

Controls in the rear seats

Fig. 195 Centre console: details of the con-trols in the rear seats

Rotary con-trol

››› Fig. 195Description

A Temperature selector

B Air flow regulator

Air conditioning user instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the electric slidingpanoramic roof closed. However, if the vehi-cle has heated up after standing in the sunfor some time, the air inside can be cooledmore quickly by opening the windows andthe sliding electric panoramic sunroof briefly.

Setting for conditions of optimal visibility

When the air conditioning is switched on, thetemperature and the air humidity in the vehi-cle interior drop. In this way, when the out-side air humidity is high, the windows do notmist over and comfort for the vehicle occu-pants is improved.

Electronic manual air conditioning

● Switch off the air recirculation ››› page 176.

● Set the fan to the required setting.

● Turn the temperature control to the centreposition.

● Open and direct all the air outlets in thedash panel ››› page 176.

● Turn the air distribution control to the re-quired position.

174

Air conditioning

With Climatronic

● Press the AUTO button.

● Set the temperature to +22°C (+72°F).

● Open and direct all the air outlets in thedash panel ››› page 176.

Climatronic: Switching the measuring unitsfor temperature on the radio display or thenavigation system installed with the defaultsettings

Switching the temperature indication fromCelsius to Fahrenheit on the radio display orthe navigation system is carried out in themenu on the instrument panel››› page 30.

The cooling system does not switch on

If the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.

● The fan is switched off.

● The air conditioning fuse is blown.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).

● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.

● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special features

If the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe vaporiser in the cooling system and forma pool underneath the vehicle. This is normaland does not indicate a leak!

Note

After starting the engine, any residual humid-ity in the air conditioner could mist over thewindscreen. Switch on the defrost function assoon as possible to clear the windscreen ofcondensation.

175

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Air vents

Fig. 196 Air vents in the dash panel

Air vents

Never close the air vents ››› Fig. 196 A com-pletely to ensure heating, cooling and venti-lation inside the vehicle.

● Turn the thumbwheel in the required direc-tion to open and close the air vents. Whenthe thumbwheel is in the position, the cor-responding air vent is closed.

● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other air vents that cannot be ad-justed on the dash panel B , in the footwelland in the rear area of the interior.

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other heat-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Beingheat-sensitive, they may be damaged ormade unsuitable for use by the air comingfrom the air vents.

Note

The air from the vents flows through the vehi-cle interior and out through the outlets belowthe rear window. The slots must not be cov-ered with items of clothing or other objects.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is press-ed or the air distributor turned to ››› .

Switching the recirculation mode on and offmanually on the air conditioning (Electronicmanual air conditioning)

Switching on: press the button until thelamp on the button lights up.

176

Air conditioning

Switching off: press the button until thelamp on the button switches off.

Switching the recirculation mode on and offmanually on the Climatronic

Switching on: press the button until thelamp on the button lights up.

Switching off: press the button until thelamp on the button switches off.

Automatic air recirculation mode

Fresh air enters the vehicle interior in posi-tion . If the system detects a high con-centration of hazardous substances in theambient air, air recirculation mode is switch-ed on automatically. When the level of impur-ities drops to within a normal range, recircu-lation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

With the following outside temperatures andconditions the air recirculation does notswitch on automatically:

● The cooling system is switched on (the AC

button is lit up) and the outside temperatureis below +3°C (+38°F).

● The cooling system and the windscreenwipers are switched off and the outside tem-perature is below +10°C (+50°F).

● The cooling system is switched off and theoutside temperature is below +15°C (+59°F).The windscreen wiper is switched on.

Switching the automatic air recirculationmode on and off

Switching on: press the button until theright lamp on the button lights up.

Switching off: press the button until allthe lamps on the button are switched off.

Switching the automatic air recirculationmode off temporarily

● Press the button once to temporarilyswitch to manual air recirculation mode inthe event of unpleasant smells from outside.The left indicator lamp turns on.

● After more than two seconds, press the button again to restart automatic air recircu-lation. The right indicator lamp turns on.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 173.

● If the cooling system is switched off and airrecirculation mode switched on, the windowscan mist over very quickly, considerably limit-ing visibility.

● Switch air recirculation mode off when it isnot required.

CAUTION

Do not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condition-er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-ing system vaporiser and on the activatedcharcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-ter, leading to a permanently unpleasantsmell.

Note

Climatronic: air recirculation mode switcheson to prevent exhaust gas from entering thevehicle interior when it is in reverse andwhile the automatic windscreen wipers areworking.

Auxiliary heater* (additionalheater)

Introduction

The auxiliary heater is powered by fuel fromthe vehicle's fuel tank and can be used whilethe vehicle is in motion and at a standstill.Select the mode required (heat or fan)››› page 179 on the dash panel.

In winter, the auxiliary heater can be used inheat mode before switching on the ignitionto remove any ice, mist or snow from thewindscreen (thin layers only). »

177

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon di-oxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas.Carbon monoxide can cause people to loseconsciousness. It can also cause death.

● Never switch on the auxiliary heater orleave it running in places that are enclosed orunventilated.

● Never program the independent heatingsystem to be activated and operated inclosed, unventilated areas.

WARNING

The components of the auxiliary heater ex-haust system heat up a great deal. This couldcause a fire.

● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact withflammable materials (such as dried grass).

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other heat-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food,medicines and other heat-sensitive objectsmay be damaged or made unsuitable for useby the air coming from the air vents.

Switching the auxiliary heater on andoff

Switching the auxiliary heater on:

Manually using the instant on/offbutton.

››› page 174

ONManually using the remote control. ››› page

178

Automatically at the programmedand enabled on time.

››› page 179

Switching the auxiliary heater off:

Manually using the instant on/offbutton for the air conditioner.

››› page 174

OFFManually using the remote control. ››› page

178

Automatically after the programmedtime.

››› page 179

Automatically when the light comeson (fuel reserve).

››› page 261

Automatically when the battery pow-er drops to a very low level.

››› page 280

Special feature

After switching the auxiliary heater off, it con-tinues to run for a short period to completelyburn any fuel remaining in the auxiliary heat-

er. The exhaust gases are also extracted fromthe system.

Remote control

Fig. 197 Auxiliary heater: remote control

Fig. 197 Meaning

ON Switch the auxiliary heater on.

OFF Switch the auxiliary heater off:

A Aerial.

B Light.

The auxiliary heater may accidentally switchon if a button is pressed on the remote con-trol by mistake. This may also occur outsidethe range of the remote control or if the lightflashes.

178

Air conditioning

Remote control light

The remote control light provides users withdifferent information at the push of a button:

Battery lightFig. 197 B

Meaning

Lights up green foraround two seconds.

The auxiliary heater has beenswitched on using the ON but-ton.

Lights up red foraround two seconds.

The auxiliary heater has beenswitched off using the OFF but-ton.

Slowly flashes greenfor around two sec-onds.

No ona) signal has been re-ceived.

Quickly flashes greenfor around two sec-onds.

The auxiliary heater is locked.Possible causes: the fuel tankis almost empty, the batterycharge is very low or there is afault.

Flashes red foraround two seconds.

No offa) signal has been re-ceived.

Lights up orange foraround two seconds,then green or red.

The remote control battery isalmost flat. However, the on oroff signal has been received,respectively.

Lights up orange foraround two seconds,then flashes green orred.

The remote control battery isalmost flat. The on or off signalhas not been received, respec-tively.

Battery lightFig. 197 B

Meaning

Flashes orange foraround five seconds.

The remote control battery isflat. The on or off signal hasnot been received, respective-ly.

a) Within its range, the remote control might not receive the sig-nal sent by the vehicle receiver. In this case, the remote controlwill send an error message whether the auxiliary heater is on oroff. Come closer to the vehicle and press the corresponding but-ton on the remote control once again.

Replacing the remote control battery

If the light ››› Fig. 197 B on the remote con-trol does not come on when the button ispressed, the remote control battery shouldsoon be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover on theback of the remote control. Turn the slot tothe left using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a coin).When changing the battery, use another bat-tery of the same model and observe the po-larity when fitting it ››› .

Range

The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle.The remote control, when fitted with new bat-teries, has a range of several hundred me-tres. Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditions anddischarged batteries can considerably reducethe range of the remote control.

An optimum range is obtained by keepingthe remote control vertical, with the aerial››› Fig. 197 A pointing upwards. When doingso, do not cover the aerial with your fingersor with the palm of your hand.

There must be a minimum distance of 2 me-tres between the remote control and the vehi-cle.

CAUTION

● The radio frequency remote control con-tains electronic components. Therefore, avoidgetting it wet and being knocked and protectit from direct sunlight.

● Use of inappropriate batteries may damagethe remote control. For this reason, always re-place the used battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.


● Please dispose of old batteries so that theydo not harm the environment.

● The remote control battery may containperchlorate. Observe the legal requirementsfor their disposal.

Programming the auxiliary heater

The heater or ventilation inside the vehiclecan be programmed for a certain period. »

179

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Before programming, check that the day iscorrectly set in the Auxiliary heater -day of the week menu ››› .

Enabling the Auxiliary heater menu onthe instrument panel

● From the main menu, select the Auxili-ary heater submenu and press the OK

button on the windscreen wiper lever.

● OR: press the or arrow buttons on themultifunction steering wheel until the Aux-iliary heater menu is displayed.

Menu op-tions

Description

SwitchingonSwitchingoff

The auxiliary heater can be set to comeon automatically if required. To do so,select a timer:– The timer is displayed marked with a.– Only one timer can be selected. If atimer has been selected, Prog. ONwill be displayed on the screen. If notimer has been selected, the dashpanel display will show Prog. OFF.– To modify the programmed timer, se-lect another timer or select the Offoption.

Timer 1Timer 2Timer 3

Three different timers (hh.mm) can lat-er be selected using the On option. Ifthe auxiliary heater is to be switchedon for just a certain day of the week,select the day of the week and thetime for the auxiliary heater to comeon.

Menu op-tions

Description

DurationThe operating time may vary between10 and 60 minutes and can be set to5-minute intervals.

Operatingmode

Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle in-terior when the auxiliary heater isswitched on.

Day Set the current day of the week.

Factorysettings

The predefined factory values for thefunctions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the main menu.

Checking programming

If the timer has been switched on afterswitching the ignition off, the light on button will remain lit for around 10 seconds.

WARNING

Never program the independent heating sys-tem to be activated and operated in closed,unventilated areas. The auxiliary heaterfumes contain carbon dioxide, an odourlessand colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxidecan cause people to lose consciousness. Itcan also cause death.

Operating instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system locatedbelow the vehicle must be kept clear of snow,mud and other objects. The exhaust gasesmust not be obstructed in any way. The ex-haust gases generated by the auxiliary heaterare removed via an exhaust pipe fitted under-neath the vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending onthe outside temperature the warm air is firstdirected at the windscreen and then to therest of the vehicle interior through the airvents. If the air vents are turned towards thewindows, for example, the form of air distri-bution may be affected.

Depending on the outside temperature, thetemperature at which the auxiliary heaterwarms the vehicle interior may be somewhathigher if the heating or air conditioner tem-perature control is set to maximum beforeswitching the heating on.

Depending on the engine, vehicles with aux-iliary heater may be fitted with a second bat-tery in the luggage compartment that is re-sponsible for powering the auxiliary heater.

When will the auxiliary heater will not switchon?

● The auxiliary heater requires about asmuch power as the dipped beam headlights.

180

Driving

If the battery charge is low, the auxiliary heat-er will switch off automatically or will noteven switch on. This avoids problems whenstarting the engine.

● The heater will switch on just once eachtime. The timer will also have to be switchedback on every time it is required.

Note

● Noise will be heard while the auxiliaryheater is running.

● When the air humidity is high and the out-side temperature low, the heating systemmay evaporate condensation from the auxili-ary heater. In this case, steam may be re-leased from underneath the vehicle. This iscompletely normal and there is no need tosuspect a fault!

● If the auxiliary heater runs several timesover a prolonged period, the vehicle batterymay run flat. To re-charge the battery, drivethe vehicle for a long distance. As a generalrule, drive for as much time as the auxiliaryheating was working.

Driving

Address

Introduction

The power steering is not hydraulic but elec-tromechanical. The advantage of this steer-ing system is that it disposes of hydraulictubes, hydraulic oil, the pump, filter and oth-er components. The electromechanical sys-tem saves fuel. While a hydraulic system re-quires oil pressure to be maintained, electro-mechanical steering only requires energywhen the steering wheel is turned.

With the power steering system, the assistedsteering function automatically adjusts ac-cording to the vehicle speed, the steering tor-que and the wheel turning angle. The powersteering only works when the engine is run-ning.

WARNING

If the power steering is not working then thesteering wheel is much more difficult to turnand the vehicle more difficult to control.

● The power steering only works when theengine is running.

● Never allow the vehicle to move when theengine is switched off.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn thesteering wheel.


It lights up red

Power steering faul-ty.

The steering system should bechecked by a specialised work-shop as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Power steering op-eration reduced.

The steering system should bechecked by a specialised work-shop as soon as possible.If, after restarting the engine anddriving for a short distance, theyellow warning lamp no longercomes on, it will not be necessa-ry to take the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop.

The vehicle batterywas disconnectedand has been recon-nected.

Drive for a short distance at15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).

Flashes red

Fault in the steeringcolumn electroniclock.

Do not drive on!Seek professional advice. »

181

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

It flashes yellow

Steering column de-viation.

Gently turn the steering wheel toand fro.

Steering wheel notunlocked or locked.

Remove the key from the ignitionand then switch the ignitionback on. Check the messagesdisplayed on the instrumentpanel at the same time.Do not drive on, if the steeringcolumn remains locked after theignition has been switched on.Seek specialist assistance.


WARNING


Information on the steering

Steering column electronic lock

Vehicles with Keyless Access: the steeringcolumn locks when the driver's door isopened and the ignition is switched off.Therefore, the vehicle should be at a stand-still and, where applicable, the selector leverin position P.

If the driver door is opened before the igni-tion is switched off, the steering column elec-tronic lock is activated via the ignition key orthe sensor built into the door handle.

Steering column mechanical lock

To prevent theft, we recommend you lock thesteering before leaving the vehicle.

Please engage steer-ing lock

Unlocking the steering

Parking the vehicle››› page 187.

Turn the steering wheelslightly to release thesteering lock.

Remove the key from theignition.

Insert the key in the igni-tion lock.

Turn the steering wheelslightly until you hear thesteering lock.

Hold the steering wheel inthis position and switchon the ignition.

Electromechanical power steering

With the power steering system, the assistedsteering function automatically adjusts ac-cording to the vehicle speed, the steering tor-que and the wheel turning angle. The powersteering only works when the engine is run-ning.

You should remember that you will need con-siderably more power than normal to steerthe vehicle if the power steering is not work-ing correctly or not at all.

Counter steering assistance system

The counter steering assistance system helpsthe driver in critical situations. Additionalsteering power helps the driver when countersteering.

WARNING

The counter steering assistance system com-bined with ESC helps the driver to steer thevehicle in critical driving conditions. At alltimes, it is the driver who steers the vehicle.The counter steering system does not steerthe vehicle.

Stopping and starting the en-gine

Introduction

Immobiliser display

When an invalid key is used or in the event ofa system fault, or Immobiliser on isdisplayed on the instrument panel. The en-gine cannot be started.

Pushing or towing

For technical reasons, the vehicle must notbe push- or tow-started. Jump starting is pref-erable.

182

Driving

WARNING

Turning off the engine while driving will makestopping the vehicle difficult; this could evenresult in the loss of control causing an acci-dent with serious consequences.

● The assisted braking and steering systems,the airbag system, seat belts and certainsafety equipment are only active while theengine is running.

● The engine should only be switched offwhen the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING

While the engine is running or starting itcould help reduce the risk of serious injury.

● Never start or leave the engine running inpoorly ventilated or closed spaces. Exhaustgas contains carbon monoxide, a toxic, col-ourless and odourless gas. Carbon monoxidecan cause people to lose consciousness. Itcan also cause death.

● Never leave the vehicle unattended if theengine is running. The vehicle could move offsuddenly or something unexpected couldhappen resulting in damage and serious in-jury.

● Never use start boosters. Cold start sprayscould explode or increase the engine speedunexpectedly.

WARNING


● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact withflammable materials (such as wood, leaves,dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.).

● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata-lytic converter, heat shields or the diesel par-ticulate filter.

Ignition lock

Fig. 198 Vehicle key positions


Vehicle keys ››› Fig. 198

No key in the ignition lock: The steering lock maybe activated.

1 Ignition off, all electrical devices disconnected.Key can be removed from the vehicle.

2 Ignition is switched on. Pre-heating of diesel en-gine. The steering lock can be unlocked.

3 Switch on the engine. Release the key when theengine has started. When it is released, the keyreturns to position 2 .

Key not authorised for the vehicle

If a key which is not authorised for this vehi-cle is inserted in the ignition lock, it can beremoved as follows:

● Automatic gearbox: the key cannot be re-moved from the ignition lock. Press and re-lease the selector lever locking button. Keycan be removed from the vehicle.

● Manual gearbox: remove the key from theignition.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle keycould result in serious injury.

● Always take all the keys with you wheneveryou leave the vehicle. If not, the engine couldaccidentally be started and electrical equip-ment such as the windows could accidentally »

183

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

be operated which may result in serious in-jury.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. Passengers could be trappedin the car in an emergency and not be able toget themselves to safety. For example, de-pending on the time of the year, tempera-tures inside a locked and closed vehicle canbe extremely high or extremely low resultingin serious injuries and illness or even death,particularly for young children.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. The steering maylock and it will not be possible to turn thesteering wheel.

Note

● If the key is left in the ignition lock with theengine off for long periods, the vehicle bat-tery will run flat.

● For automatic gearbox vehicles, the key canonly be removed from the ignition lock if thegear selector lever is in position P. In thiscase, press and release the selector leverlocking button.

Starter button

Fig. 199 In the centre console: start-up pushbutton for the Keyless Access lock and start-up system. The layout in right-hand drive ve-hicles is symmetrical.

Fig. 200 Emergency ignition in vehicles withKeyless Access.

The start-up button may only be used if thereis a valid key in the vehicle.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled››› page 181.

Switching the ignition on/off

● Briefly push the start-up button ››› Fig. 199without touching the brake or clutch ped-al ››› .

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low orflat:

● Immediately after pushing the start-up but-ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steeringcolumn ››› Fig. 200.

● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not stop after briefly press-ing the start-up button, an emergency dis-connect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec-ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds››› .

● The engine turns off automatically.184

Driving

Engine restart feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicleafter the engine stops, you will only have 5seconds to restart it. A warning will displayon the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key insidethe vehicle.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle couldresult in serious injury.

● When pressing the start-up button, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, this way theengine will start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.

● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-ised person could lock the vehicle, start theengine or connect the ignition and, in thisway, operate electronic equipment (e.g. thewindows).

Note

In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Accesssystem, there may be a delay in the enginestarting if it requires preheating.

Starting the engine


Vehicles withoutKeyless Access

Vehicles withKeyless Access

1.Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is per-

formed.

1a.In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press andhold the clutch down until the engine starts.

2.Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector

lever in position P or N.

3.

Only in vehicles withdiesel engines: for pre-heating, turn the key inthe ignition lock to po-sition ››› Fig. 198 2 . Acontrol lamp lights upon the dash panel .

4.

Turn the key in the igni-tion lock to position

››› Fig. 198 3 ; do notpress the accelerator.

Press the starter button››› Fig. 199; do not

press the accelerator.There needs to be a

valid key inside the ve-hicle for the engine to

start.

5.Once the engine starts,release the key in the

ignition lock.

Once the engine starts,release the start-up

button.



6.

If the engine does notstart, stop and wait foraround 1 minute to try

again.

If the engine does notstart, stop and wait foraround 1 minute to try

again. If necessary,perform an emergency

start ››› page 184.

7.Disconnect the electronic parking brake when you

are about to start driving ››› page 187.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the en-gine is running. The vehicle could move offsuddenly, especially if it is in gear, resultingin an accident and serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause asudden increase in the engine speed.

● Never use start boosters.

CAUTION

● An attempt to start the engine while drivingor starting the engine immediately after turn-ing it off can cause damage to the engine orstarter motor.

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not make theengine work hard. »

185

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Do not push or tow start the engine. Un-burnt fuel could damage the catalytic con-verter.


Do not warm the engine at idle speed; startdriving immediately if the visibility is OK.This helps the engine reach operating tem-perature faster and reduces emissions.

Note

● For example, if the key battery is very wornor flat, the engine cannot be started with thestarter button. In this case, remove the igni-tion button from the lock and insert the key.

● Electrical devices with a high power con-sumption are switched off temporarily whenthe engine starts.

● When the engine is started cold, there maybe strong vibrations for a few moments fortechnical reasons. This is quite normal, andno cause for concern.

● At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F),smoke may be given off below the vehiclewhen the additional heater is connected.

Stopping the engine




1. Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .

2.Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4 is

performed.

3.If the vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the

selector lever in position P.

4. Connect the electronic parking brake ››› page 187.

5.Turn the vehicle key inthe ignition lock to po-sition ››› Fig. 198 1 .

Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 199. Ifthe engine fails toswitch off, perform anemergency disconnect››› page 184.

6.If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox,

put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicleis moving. You may lose control of the vehicleand there is a risk of serious accident.

● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.

● The brake servo does not work with the en-gine off. To stop, the brake pedal must bepressed with more force.

● As the power steering does not work if theengine is not running, you will need morestrength to steer than normally.

● If the key is removed from the ignition, thesteering may lock and it will not be possibleto steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on. Make sure that the igni-tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.

● If the engine has been driven at high speedfor a prolonged period of time, it may over-heat when turned off. To avoid engine dam-age, allow the engine to run for approximate-ly two minutes in neutral before switching itoff.

Note

● In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the keycan only be removed when the selector leveris in position P.

● After stopping the engine, the engine com-partment fan may continue running for a fewminutes, even when the ignition has beenswitched off or the key removed. The radiatorfan is automatically switched off.

Electronic immobiliser

The gear lock prevents the engine from beingstarted with an unauthorised key and the ve-hicle being moved.

186

Driving

The vehicle key has a chip that automaticallydisables the immobilizer when the key isplaced in the ignition lock.

The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock. For vehicles withthe Keyless Access system, the key has to beoutside the vehicle ››› page 115.

For this reason, the vehicle can only be usedwith a genuine SEAT key with the correctcode. Coded keys can be purchased fromyour technical service centre ››› page 110.

If an unauthorised key is used, the messageSAFE or Immobiliser active is displayedon the instrument panel. The vehicle cannotbe started in this case

Note

The correct operation of the vehicle is onlyguaranteed when original SEAT keys areused.

Braking and parking

Introduction

The assisted braking systems include the an-ti-lock braking system (ABS), the brake assistsystem (BAS), the electronic differential lock(EDL), the traction control system (ASR) andthe electronic stability control (ESC).

WARNING

Driving with worn brake pads or a faultybrake system may lead to serious accident.

● If lights, alone or accompanied by awarning message on the instrument paneldisplay, please go immediately to a special-ised workshop to check the brake pads and toreplace them if they are worn.

WARNING

Careless parking can cause serious injury.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. The steering lockmay engage and lock the steering wheel mak-ing the vehicle impossible to control.

● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact withflammable materials (such as wood, leaves,dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.).

● Always apply the electronic parking brakewhen you leave your vehicle and when youpark.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. They could release theelectronic parking brake, activate the selec-tor lever or gear stick and start the vehiclemoving. This could result in a serious acci-dent.

● Always take all the keys with you wheneveryou leave the vehicle. The engine could acci-dentally be started and electrical equipmentsuch as the windows could accidentally beoperated resulting in serious injury.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped in thecar in an emergency and will not be able toget themselves to safety. For example, de-pending on the time of the year, tempera-tures inside a locked and closed vehicle canbe extremely high or extremely low resultingin serious injuries and illness or even death,particularly for young children.

CAUTION

● Special care should be taken when parkingin areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Ob-jects protruding from the ground may dam-age the bumper or other parts of the vehicleduring manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stopbefore the wheels touch the barrier or kerb.

● Special attention is required when drivingthrough entrances, over ramps, kerbs or oth-er objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers,mudguards and running gear, and the engineand exhaust system could be damaged asyou drive over these objects.


It lights up red

Together with thecontrol lamp onthe button: Elec-tronic parking brakeon.

››› page 189 »

187

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

It lights up red

Fault in the brakesystem

Stop the vehicle!Seek professional assistance!››› page 191.

Brake fluid level in-adequate.

Do not drive on!Check brake fluid level››› page 279.

Together with theABS control lamp: ABS fault.

Contact a specialised workshop.The vehicle can be braked with-out ABS.

It lights up red

Brake pedal notpressed!

Press brake pedal to the floor.

It lights up yellow

Front brake padsworn.

Contact a specialised workshopimmediately. Inspect all thebrake pads and replace as nec-essary.

It lights up yellow

ESC disconnectedby the system.

Switching the ignition on and offIf necessary, drive for a short dis-tance.

Fault in the ESC. Contact a specialised workshop.

Together with theABS control lamp: Fault in the ABS.

Contact a specialised workshop.The vehicle can be braked with-out ABS.

It lights up yellow

The battery hasbeen reconnected.

››› page 280

It lights up yellow

ASR manually deac-tivated.

Switch on ASR ››› page 205. ASRis automatically activated whenthe ignition is switched on or off.

It lights up yellow

Together with theESC control lamp :Fault in the ABS. Contact a specialised workshop.

The vehicle can be braked with-out ABS.Together with the

warning lamp or: ABS fault.

It lights up yellow

Together with thewarning lamp flashing: electronicparking brake faul-ty.

Contact a specialised workshop.

It lights up green

Brake pedal notpressed.

Press the brake pedal to select agear range.

Press the brake pedal to discon-nect the electronic parking brake››› page 189.

Flashes red

Electronic parkingbrake faulty. Thecontrol lamp maylight up at the sametime or the controllamp may flashon the button.

Contact a specialised workshop,as it may not be possible to parkthe vehicle in safety.

It flashes yellow

ESC or ASR regulat-ing.

Take your foot off the accelera-tor. Adjust your driving style tothe road conditions.


WARNING


WARNING

Driving with brakes in bad condition could re-sult in a serious accident.

● If the brake warning lamp does not goout, or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too low or there

188

Driving

is a fault in the brake system. Obtain profes-sional assistance immediately ››› page 278,Checking the brake fluid level.

● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS warning lamp , theregulation function of the ABS could be mal-functioning. As a result, the rear wheels canlock relatively easily when braking. If the rearwheels lock this could result in loss of vehiclecontrol! If possible, reduce your speed anddrive carefully to a specialised workshopclose by to check the brake system. Duringthe following journey, avoid sudden brakingand manoeuvres.

● If the ABS warning lamp does not go outor if it lights while driving, the ABS is mal-functioning. The vehicle can only be stoppedusing normal braking without ABS. The pro-tection provided by the ABS is not available.Visit a specialised workshop as soon as pos-sible.

● If lights, alone or accompanied by awarning message on the instrument paneldisplay, please go immediately to a special-ised workshop to check the brake pads and toreplace them if they are worn.

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 201 Detailed view of the centre console:electronic parking brake switch

Applying the electronic parking brake

The parking brake can be applied wheneverthe vehicle is at a standstill, even when theignition is switched off. Always apply theparking brake when you leave your vehicleand when you park.

● Pull button until the control lamp onthe button lights up.

● The parking brake is applied when the con-trol lamp lights up on the instrument pan-el ››› page 187.

Disengaging the electronic parking brake


● Press button . At the same time, pressthe brake pedal hard or gently press the ac-celerator pedal with the engine switched on.

● The control lamps on the button and on the instrument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic parkingbrake on starting the engine

The electronic parking brake is automaticallyreleased when the vehicle starts moving, ifthe driver door is closed and the driver iswearing his/her seat belt. In addition, in ve-hicles with a manual gearbox the clutch ped-al should also be pressed to the floor beforestarting the engine so that the system recog-nises that the parking brake should be re-leased.

Emergency braking function

Only use the emergency braking function ifthe vehicle cannot be stopped with the brakepedal ››› !

● Pull button hard to stop the vehicle. Thewarning display will be accompanied by thecorresponding audible warning.

● To stop the braking process, release thebutton or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the electronic parkingbrake may result in serious accident.

● Never use the electronic parking brake tobrake the vehicle except in an emergency.The braking distance is considerably longer, »

189

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

because braking is only applied to the rearwheels. Always use the foot brake.

● Never accelerate from the engine compart-ment with the engine running and a gear or agear range engaged. The vehicle could move,even if the parking brake is applied.

Note

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: whenthe clutch pedal is released and the accelera-tor pressed at the same time, the electronicparking brake is automatically released.

● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic parkingbrake. Use the jump-start ››› page 51.

● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.

● If the electronic parking brake has not beenused for a long while, the system sometimesperforms automatic and audible checks whilethe vehicle is at a standstill.

Parking

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

To park the vehicle

Complete operations only in the sequencegiven.

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .

● Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve-hicle comes to a standstill.

● Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 189.

● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-tor lever to position P.

● Switch off the engine and release the brakepedal.

● Remove the key from the ignition.

● If necessary, turn the steering wheel slight-ly to lock the steering.

● With a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear onflat ground and slopes, or even reverse gearon hills, and release the clutch pedal.

● Ensure that all passengers leave the vehi-cle, especially children.

● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

● Lock the vehicle.

Additional information for steep ascents anddescents

Before switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.

● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centreof the road.

WARNING


● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact withflammable materials (such as wood,leaves,dried grass, or spilled fuel).

CAUTION

● Special care should be taken when parkingin areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Ob-jects protruding from the ground may dam-age the bumper or other parts of the vehicleduring manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stopbefore the wheels touch the barrier or kerb.

● Special attention is required when drivingthrough entrances, over ramps, kerbs or oth-er objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers,mudguards and running gear, and the engineand exhaust system could be damaged asyou drive over these objects.

Information on the brakes

For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and need tobe “run in” first ››› . The slightly reducedbraking effect can be compensated for by in-creasing pressure on the brake pedal. Whilerunning in, the full braking distance or

190

Driving

emergency braking distance is larger thenwhen the brake pads have been run in. Whilerunning in, avoid full power braking or situa-tions requiring braking performance. For ex-ample, in heavy traffic.

The rate of wear of the brake pads dependsto a great extent on the conditions in whichthe vehicle is used and the way the vehicle isdriven. If the vehicle is used frequently in citytraffic or for short trips or driven sport style,visit a specialised workshop regularly, morefrequently than advised in the MaintenanceProgramme, to have the brake pads checked.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-ter crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfallor even after washing the car, the effect ofthe brakes is lessened as the brake discs arewet or even frozen (in winter). At higherspeed, “dry” the brakes as quickly as possi-ble by braking gently several times. Only dothis without endangering vehicles behindyou or any other road users ››› .

A layer of salt on the discs and brake padswill reduce the effectiveness of the brakesand increase braking distance. If you drive fora prolonged period on salted roads withoutbraking then brake carefully several times toeliminate the layer of salt on the brakes ››› .

If the vehicle remains parked for considera-ble lengths of time, is used little, or if thebrakes are not used, there may be corrosionon the brake discs and a build up of dirt on

the brake pads. If the brakes are not used fre-quently, or if rust has formed on the discs,SEAT recommends cleaning the pads anddiscs by braking firmly a few times at a mod-erately high speed. Only do this without en-dangering vehicles behind you or any otherroad users ››› .

Faults in the brake system

During braking, if you notice that the vehicledoes not react as usual (that the braking dis-tance has increased suddenly) it may be pos-sible that there is a fault in the braking sys-tem. The warning lamp lights up and atext message displayed. Take the vehicle to aspecialised workshop immediately and havethe fault repaired. Drive at a moderate speedand be prepared to use more pressure on thebrake pedal, and allow for longer stoppingdistances.

Brake servo

The brake servo only operates when the en-gine is running and the pressure applied bythe driver on the brake pedal increases.

If the brake servo does not operate or the ve-hicle must be towed, then the brake pedalwill have to be pressed with more force giventhat the braking distance will be increasedwhen the brake servo does not operate ››› .

WARNING

New brake pads do not brake to full efficien-cy.

● For the first 320 km (200 miles), new brakepads have not yet reached their maximumbraking capacity, and need to be “run in”first. For this, to compensate for reducedbraking efficiency the brake pedal will haveto be pressed with more force.

● To avoid losing control of the vehicle andcausing serious accidents, always take greatcare when driving with new brake pads.

● When running in new brake pads, alwaysrespect the safety distances between you andother vehicles and do not cause situations re-quiring extreme braking performance.

WARNING

When brakes overheat, braking is less effi-cient and braking distances increase.

● When driving on slopes, brakes can beoverloaded and overheat quickly.

● Reduce speed or change down a gear whenfaced with steep and long slopes. This allowsyou to use the engine braking effect and toreduce the strain on the brake system.

● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. »

191

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take lon-ger to engage and this increases braking dis-tances.

● Test the brakes carefully.

● Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt bybraking gently several times, when weather,road and traffic conditions permit.

WARNING

Driving without the brake servo may signifi-cantly increase the braking distance and re-sult in a severe accident.

● Never allow the vehicle to move forwardswhen the engine is switched off.

● If the brake servo does not operate or thevehicle must be towed, then the brake pedalwill have to be pressed with more force giventhat the braking distance will be increasedwhen the brake servo does not operate.

CAUTION

● Never make the brakes “slip” by pressingthe pedal gently, if it is not really necessaryto brake. Continuously pressing on the brakepedal will heat the brakes. This could signifi-cantly reduce braking power, increase brak-ing distance or even result in the total failureof the brake system.

● Reduce speed or change down a gear whenfaced with steep and long slopes. This allowsyou to use the engine braking effect and to

reduce the strain on the brake system. Other-wise, the brakes may overheat and fail. Onlyuse the brakes to reduce speed or to stop.

Note

When checking the front brake pads, take thetime to also check the rear brake pads. Thethickness of the brake pads should bechecked visually and regularly, by lookingthrough the openings in the wheel rims orfrom underneath the vehicle. If necessary, re-move the wheels to check them thoroughly.SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech-nical service.

Gearbox

Introduction

When reverse gear is engaged and the igni-tion is switched on the following takes place:

● Reverse lights light up.

● When reversing, the air conditioner auto-matically changes to air recirculation mode.

● The rear window heater switches on whenthe windscreen wiper is activated.

● Also, the parking sensor system, the opti-cal parking sensor and the camera for the re-verse assist system are connected.

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of tractionand skidding, especially on slippery ground.This could cause loss of control of the vehicleresulting in an accident and considerabledamage.

● Only use the kick-down function or rapidacceleration if visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions so permit.

WARNING

Do not allow the brakes to “rub” for a pro-longed period of time, or brake frequently orfor long periods of time. Continuous brakingheats up the brakes. This could significantlyreduce braking power, increase braking dis-tance or even result in the total failure of thebrake system.


It lights up red

Brake pedal notpressed!

Press brake pedal to the floor.

It lights up green

Brake pedal notpressed.

To select a range of gears, pressthe brake pedal.Please also see "Electronic park-ing brake" ››› page 187.

192

Driving

Flashes green

The selector leverlocking button hasnot engaged. Thevehicle does notstart to move.

Engage the selector lever lock››› page 194.


WARNING


Manual gear change


In some countries, it is necessary to press theclutch pedal to the floor to start the engine.

Selecting reverse gear

Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle isstopped.

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engaged

and the clutch released. This is also the casewith the electronic parking brake on.

● Never engage the reverse gear when a vehi-cle is moving forward.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:

● While driving, do not leave your hand rest-ing on the gear stick. The pressure applied byyour hand is transmitted to the gearbox se-lector forks.

● Always ensure that the vehicle is complete-ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.

● When changing gear, always make sure theclutch pedal is pushed right to the floor.

● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 202 Automatic gearbox selector leverwith locking button (arrow)


The selector lever has a lock. When changingthe selector lever from position P to a rangeof gears, press the brake pedal and press thelock on the selector lever, located on thefront part of the knob, in the direction of thearrow ››› Fig. 202. To move the gear selectorlever from the position N to D or to R, firstpress and hold the brake pedal.

When the ignition is on, the current positionof the selector lever is shown on the instru-ment panel.

- Parking lock

The driven wheels are mechanically locked. »

193

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Only change gears when the vehicle is at astandstill. To change the position of the se-lector lever, press the brake pedal and switchon the ignition.

- Reverse gear

Reverse gear is engaged.

Only put in reverse when the vehicle is at astandstill. If not it could result in seriousdamage.

- Neutral

The gearbox is in neutral. No movement istransmitted to the wheels and the enginedoes not act as a brake.

- Standard forwards driving position (nor-mal programme)

The gears are changed (up and down) auto-matically. The gear shifts are determined bythe engine load, your individual driving styleand the speed of the vehicle.

- Standard forwards driving position(sports programme)

The shift up to a higher gear is automaticallydelayed and the shift down is faster with re-spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad-vantage of the engine power. The gear shiftsare determined by the engine load, your indi-vidual driving style and the speed of the ve-hicle.

Selector lever locking

The gear selector lever lock prevents, in P orN, a gear selection from being inadvertentlyengaged and the vehicle moving off acciden-tally.

To release the gear selector lever lock, pressand hold the brake pedal with the ignitionon. Press simultaneously on the selector lev-er lock.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if it ismoved quickly through position N (e.g. whenshifting from R to D). This makes it possible,for instance, to “rock the vehicle backwardsand forwards” if it is stuck in snow or mud.The selector lever lock engages automaticallyif the brake pedal is not pressed and the lev-er is in position N for more than about onesecond at a speed of less than 5 km/h(3 mph).

In vehicles with a DSG® automatic gearbox,on rare occasions the selector lever lock maynot engage. In this case, the transmission islocked to prevent the vehicle from moving ac-cidentally. The green control light flashesand an information text is displayed. Proceedas follows to engage the selector lever lock:

● Press the brake pedal and then release.

WARNING

Placing the selector lever in an incorrect posi-tion may cause loss of control of the vehicleand a serious accident.

● Do not press the accelerator when engag-ing a range of gears.

● With the engine running and a range ofgears selected, the vehicle will move offwhen the brake pedal is released.

● Never select reverse gear or the parkinglock while driving.

WARNING

Unintentional movements of the vehiclecould cause serious injury.

● As a driver, you should never leave your ve-hicle if the engine is running and a gear rangeis engaged. If you have to leave your vehiclewhile the engine is running, you must applythe electronic parking brake and engageparking lock P with the selector lever.

● While the engine is running and with the D,S or R range of gears selected, keep the brakepressed to keep the vehicle at a standstill.Transmission is not totally interrupted eitherwhen the vehicle is idling or when the vehicle“continues moving forwards”.

● Never engage the R or P gear ranges whenthe vehicle is moving.

● Never leave the vehicle with the gear selec-tor in N. The vehicle may move downhill re-gardless of whether the engine is switchedon or not.

194

Driving

CAUTION

If, when the vehicle is at a standstill, theelectronic parking brake is not applied andthe brake pedal is released while in positionP, the vehicle may move a few centimetresforwards or backwards.

Note

If, while driving, the selector lever is acciden-tally placed in position N, lift your foot off theaccelerator. Wait until the engine is runningat idle speed before selecting a new gearrange.

Gear change with Tiptronic*

Fig. 203 Selector lever in Tiptronic position(left-hand drive vehicles). The lay-out in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrically op-posed.

Fig. 204 Steering wheel with two paddleshifts for Tiptronic

The Tiptronic system allows you to manuallychange gears in vehicles with an automaticgearbox. When you change to the Tiptronicprogramme, the vehicle remains in the cur-rently selected gear. This is possible as longas the system is not changing gear automati-cally due to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever

● Press the selector lever from position D tothe right into the Tiptronic selector gate ››› in Automatic gearbox* on page 194.

● Press the lever forwards + or backwards– to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 203.

Using the Tiptronic with the steering wheelpaddle shifts

● In D or S, move the steering wheel paddleshifts ››› Fig. 204.

● Pull the right-hand side paddle +

››› Fig. 204 towards the steering wheel tostep up a gear.

● Pull the left-hand side paddle – ››› Fig. 204towards the steering wheel step down a gear.

If the paddles are not used for a period oftime, the vehicle leaves Tiptronic mode.

CAUTION

● When accelerating, the gearbox automati-cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be-fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

● When reducing speed manually, the gear-box only shifts gear when the engine can nolonger exceed the maximum engine speed.

Driving with automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-ly as the vehicle moves.

Driving down hills

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gearyou will need. The lowest gears increase theengine braking work. Never go down hillswith the selector lever in neutral N.

● You should reduce speed accordingly.

● Press the selector lever from position D tothe right into the Tiptronic selector gate››› page 195. »

195

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Gently pull the selector lever back tochange down a gear.

● OR: reduce using the steering wheel pad-dles ››› Fig. 204 ››› page 195.

Back-up mode

If all the selector lever positions on the in-strument panel display are shown with alight-coloured background, this means thereis a fault in the system. The automatic gear-box will operate in back-up mode. When thebackup programme is activated, it is possibleto drive the vehicle, however, at low speedsand within a selected range of gears.

For the DSG® dual clutch gearbox, in somecases, this may mean that the reverse geardoes not engage. The gearbox should bechecked by a specialised workshop as soonas possible.

Protection against overloading the DSG® 6-gear automatic gearbox

When the clutch is overloaded, the vehiclebegins to jerk and the selector lever positionindicator begins to flash. To prevent damageto the clutch, this interrupts the power trans-mission between the engine and the gear-box. There is no more traction and it is notpossible to accelerate. If the clutch is openedautomatically due to overloading, press thebrake pedal. Wait a few seconds before start-ing to move again.

Kick-down

The kick-down system provides maximum ac-celeration when the gear selector lever is inthe positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown, the automatic gearbox will shift downto a lower gear, depending on road speedand engine speed. This takes advantage ofthe maximum acceleration of the vehicle››› .

When the accelerator is pressed to the floor,the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gearonly after the engine reaches the specifiedmaximum engine speed.

Launch-Control Programme

The Launch-Control programme enables max-imum acceleration while at a standstill.

● Switch off the ASR ››› page 187.

● Press and hold the brake pedal with yourleft foot.

● Place the selector lever in position S or Tip-tronic.

● Press the accelerator with the right foot un-til the vehicle reaches an engine speed of ap-proximately 3200 rpm.

● Lift the left foot off the brake ››› . The ve-hicle starts with maximum acceleration.

● Turn on the ASR after accelerating!

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of tractionand skidding, especially on slippery ground.This could cause loss of control of the vehicleresulting in an accident and considerabledamage.

● Only use kick-down and rapid accelerationwhen weather conditions, surface conditionsand traffic conditions permit; accelerate anddrive in a manner that does not endangerother road users.

● Please remember that the driven wheelscan slip and the vehicle can skid if the ASR isturned off, especially on slippery ground.

● Turn on the ASR after accelerating!

CAUTION

● If you stop on a hill with a gear range en-gaged, do not try to prevent the vehicle fromrolling back by pressing on the accelerator.This could cause overheating and damage theautomatic gearbox.

● Never allow the vehicle to move with thegear selector lever in N, especially with theengine turned off. The automatic gearbox willnot be lubricated and could be damaged.

Recommended gear display

In some vehicles, the recommended gear forreducing fuel consumption is displayed onthe instrument panel:

196

Driving

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Recommendation to change up a gear.

Recommendation to change down agear.

Information for “cleaning” the diesel partic-ulate filter

The exhaust gas system control recogniseswhen the diesel particulate filter is blocked,and helps to clean it by recommending a spe-cific gear for driving. It may therefore be nec-essary to drive with the engine at an excep-tionally high speed ››› page 200.

WARNING

The recommended gear display is intended asa guideline only; it should never replace thedriver's attention to driving carefully.

● Responsibility for selecting the correct gearfor each situation continues to lie with thedriver, for example when overtaking, climb-ing a hill or towing a trailer.


Selecting the most appropriate gear for thesituation will help you to save fuel.

Note

The recommended gear display is switchedoff when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Run-in and economical driving

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-innew components.

Running-in the engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first1500 km (1000 miles). During its first fewhours of running, the internal friction in theengine is greater than later on when all themoving parts have bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first1500 km (1000 miles) influences the futureengine performance. Throughout the life ofthe vehicle, it should be driven at a moderatespeed – especially when the engine is cold –this will reduce engine wear and increase itsuseful life. Never drive at extremely low en-gine speeds. Always engage a lower gearwhen the engine works “irregularly”. For thefirst 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

● Do not use full throttle.

● Do not force the engine above two thirds ofits maximum speed.

● Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to1000 miles), gradually increase power untilreaching the maximum speed and high en-gine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads

● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 284

● Notes on the brakes ››› page 190


If the engine is run in gently, the life of theengine will be increased and the engine oilconsumption reduced.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recy-cling

● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling

● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling

● Increased use of single-grade materials. »

197

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials

● Use of recycled materials.

● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.

● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.

● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.

● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.

● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.

● Use of solvent-free adhesives.

● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.

● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).

● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).

● The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental impact andengine, brake and tyre wear depend largelyon three factors:

● Personal driving style.

● Conditions of use (weather, road surface).

● Technical requirements.

Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumptionare possible with an appropriate driving styleand the adoption of certain simple tips.

Changing gear early

General instructions: The highest gear is al-ways the most economical. As a guideline,for the majority of vehicles: at a speed of30 km/h (19 mph), drive in third gear, at40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth gear and at50 km/h (31 mph) in fifth gear.

In addition, “skipping” gears when shiftingup helps to save fuel, weather and trafficconditions permitting.

Do not wait until the last moment beforechanging gear. Only use first gear when youmove off and change to second gear quickly.Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles withautomatic gearbox.

Vehicles with a gear display help to achievean economical driving style as the display in-dicates the best moment to change gear.

Let the vehicle roll

If you take your foot off the accelerator, thefuel supply is stopped and consumption isreduced.

Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating,for example when approaching a red trafficlight. However, if the vehicle is rolling tooslowly or the distance is too long, the clutchpedal should be pressed to declutch. The en-gine will then operate at idle speed.

If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill fora period of time, switch off the engine; for ex-ample, while waiting at a level crossing. Invehicles which have the Start-Stop functionon, the engine switches off automaticallywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Think ahead and “flow” with the traffic

Frequent acceleration and braking considera-bly increase fuel consumption. If you thinkahead as you drive and keep a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front, it is possible to slowdown by simply lifting your foot off the

198

Driving

accelerator. This eliminates the need for con-stant braking and acceleration.

Calm and steady driving

Constancy is more important than speed: Themore you drive at a constant speed, the lowerthe fuel consumption.

When driving on the motorway, it is more effi-cient to drive at a constant and more moder-ate speed than to be continuously accelerat-ing and braking. As a general rule, you willreach your destination just as quickly whenyou drive at a constant speed.

The cruise control function helps you to ach-ieve a constant style of driving.

Moderate use of additional devices

It is important to travel in comfort, but con-venience systems should be used ecological-ly.

Some equipment, when connected, increasefuel consumption considerably, for example:

● Air conditioning cooling system: If the airconditioning system is required to cool tosignificantly lower temperatures than the trueoutside temperature, it will require a largeamount of energy from the engine. Therefore,we recommend that the selected temperaturefor the vehicle is not too different to the out-side temperature. It is a good idea to air thevehicle before starting your journey and to

drive a short distance with all the windowsopen. Only then should you close all the win-dows and switch on the air conditioning.Keep windows closed when travelling at highspeeds. Driving with the windows open in-creases fuel consumption.

● Switch off the seat heating when the seatshave warmed up.

● Switch off the heated rear window and thewindscreen heating when the windows havedemisted and are free of ice.

● Do not leave the auxiliary heater switchedon when the vehicle is moving ››› page 177.

Avoid short journeys

Fuel consumption is much higher when theengine is cold, immediately after it has beenstarted. It takes a few kilometres of drivingfor the engine to warm up and to normaliseconsumption.

The engine and catalytic converter need toreach their proper working temperature in or-der to minimise fuel consumption and emis-sions. The ambient temperature has a deci-sive influence.

Therefore, unnecessary short journeysshould be avoided. Try to combine trips.

The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than insummer, even when other conditions are thesame.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high dur-ing this initial warm-up phase. It is thereforebest to drive off immediately after startingthe engine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Adjusting type pressures.

Having the correct pressure in your tyreshelps to reduce rolling resistance and, as aresult reduces fuel consumption. Increasingthe tyre pressure slightly (+0.2 bar[2.9 psi/20 kPa]) can help to save fuel.

If you are prepared to accept a slight reduc-tion in comfort, the tyres may be filled to thepressures recommended for a fully-loadedvehicle. This is also valid when driving alonewithout luggage.

When you buy new tyres, make sure they areoptimised for minimum rolling resistance.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

The lighter the vehicle, the more economicaland ecological the driving style. For example,an additional weight of 100 kg will increasefuel consumption up to 0.3 l/100 km.

Remove any unnecessary objects or loadsfrom the vehicle. »

199

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Remove optional equipment and unnecessa-ry accessories

The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lowerthe fuel consumption. Optional equipmentand accessories (such as roof racks or bikecarriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits ofthe vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend you remove all op-tional and unnecessary equipment and racks,especially if you intend to drive at highspeeds.

Other factors which increase fuel consump-tion (examples):

● Fault in engine management.

● Driving on hills.

● Trailer towing.

WARNING

Always adapt your speed and the distance tothe vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

Engine management and ex-haust gas purification system

Introduction

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reachvery high temperatures. This could cause afire.

● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact withflammable materials (such as dried grass).

● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata-lytic converter, heat shields or the diesel par-ticulate filter.

Control lamps

It lights up

fault in the petrolengine manage-ment.

Take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop as soon as possibleand have the engine checked.

It lights up

Diesel engine glowplug system.

The engine glow plug system hasbeen activated. The engine canbe started straight away whenthe lamp switches off.

Flashes

Fault in the dieselengine manage-ment.

If the lamp flashes while you aredriving, have the engine checkedby a specialised workshop assoon as possible.

It lights up

Fault in the emis-sion control system.

Reduce speed and drive carefullyto the nearest specialised work-shop to have the enginechecked.

Flashes

Combustion faultwhich could dam-age the catalyticconverter.

Reduce speed and drive carefullyto the nearest specialised work-shop to have the enginechecked.

It lights up

Diesel particulatefilter blocked

››› page 201


WARNING

Observe traffic regulations when cleaning thediesel particulate filter while driving.

200

Driving

● Only carry on driving if visibility, weather,road and traffic conditions so permit.

● Never endanger your safety or that of otherroad users.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control lampsand to the corresponding descriptions and in-structions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Note

While the control lamps , , or re-main lit, there may be engine problems, fuelconsumption may increase and the enginemay lose power.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter permits the subse-quent treatment of the exhaust gases thusreducing contaminating gas emissions. Toensure a longer working life for the exhaustsystem and catalytic converter in a petrol en-gine:

● Always use unleaded petrol.

● Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

● Do not top up with too much engine oil››› page 271.

● Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the startercables ››› page 51.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven run-ning or loss of power when the car is moving,reduce speed immediately. Have the car in-spected by a specialised workshop. If thishappens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaustsystem and escape into the atmosphere. Thecatalytic converter can also be damaged byoverheating.


Even when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur under certain conditions. This de-pends on the sulphur content of the fuel be-ing used.

Diesel particulate filter

The diesel particulate filter removes soot par-ticulates from the exhaust gas, retains andburns them. To assist the combustion proc-ess, SEAT recommends you avoid frequentshort trips.

● Always use diesel with a low sulphur con-tent ››› page 264.

● Never use petrol or fuel oil.

● Never use biodiesel. However, a blend pre-pared by the diesel manufacturer containingbiodiesel within the limits established by theEN 590 standard may be used ››› page 264.

● Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

● Do not top up with too much engine oil››› page 271.

● Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the startercables ››› page 51.

In order to reduce blocking of the diesel par-ticulate filter, some vehicles with an automat-ic gearbox may increase the engine speedslightly to start cleaning the filter automati-cally. The control lamp will not light up in thiscase .

Control lamp

If the control lamp lights up you shouldhelp the filter clean itself by driving in the ap-propriate manner.

To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourthor fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gearrange) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h(37 mph), with the engine running at approxi-mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot buildup in the filter is burned. When cleaning issuccessful, the control lamp turns off.

If the lamp does not turn off, or the threelamps turn on (particulate filter , fault inthe emission control system and glowplugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired at theearliest opportunity. »

201

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Always drive according to the road weatherconditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving rec-ommendations should never lead to illegalmanoeuvres in surrounding traffic.


Even when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur under certain conditions. This de-pends on the sulphur content of the fuel be-ing used.

Driving tips

Driving abroad

In some countries, certain safety regulationsand requirements are in force relating to ex-haust gas emissions, which differ from thetechnical characteristics of the vehicle. Be-fore travelling abroad, SEAT recommends youconsult a technical service about the legal re-quirements and the following points:

● Does the vehicle need technical modifica-tions for driving abroad, for example, adjust-ment of the headlamps?

● Does the vehicle have all the tools, diag-nostics equipment and spare parts requiredfor inspections and repairs?

● Are there any SEAT dealers in the destina-tion country?

● For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol avail-able at the right octane rating?

● For diesel engines: Is diesel fuel availablewith a low sulphur content?

● Are a suitable engine oil (››› page 271) andother engine fluids complying with SEATspecifications available in the destinationcountry?

● Will the navigation system fitted at the fac-tory operate correctly in the destination coun-try with the available navigation data?

● Are special tyres required in the destinationcountry?

CAUTION

SEAT does not accept liability for any damageto the vehicle due to the use of a lower quali-ty fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driving along flooded roadways

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-ing through water, for example, along a floo-ded road, please observe the following:

● Check the depth of the water before enter-ing the flooded zone. The water should nevercome above the lower edge of the bodywork››› .

● Do not drive faster than a pedestrian.

● Do not stop in the water, use reverse gearor switch off the engine.

● Oncoming traffic will cause waves whichraise the level of the water, making it difficultto cross the water.

The Start/Stop system must be deactivatedwhen driving through flooded areas

WARNING

When driving through water, mud, meltedsnow, etc., please remember that due todamp or frozen brake discs and shoes in win-ter, the braking effect may be delayed, there-fore the required braking distance is greater.

● “Dry the brakes and remove ice” by brakingcarefully. Ensure that you are not endanger-ing other road-users or breaking traffic regu-lations in the process.

● After driving through water, avoid suddensharp manoeuvres.

CAUTION

● Driving through flooded areas may severelydamage vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission, drive train or electricalsystem.

● Never drive through salt water as salt cau-ses corrosion. Always rinse any parts of thevehicle which have been in contact with saltwater.

202

Driver assistance systems


Braking and stability systems

Brake assist systems

The brake assist systems ESC, ABS, BAS, ASRand EDL only operate when the ignition isswitched on. They contribute significantly toincreasing active safety.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

ESC reduces the risk of skidding and increa-ses the vehicle stability by braking individualwheels under specific driving conditions. ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asundersteer, oversteer and wheelspin on thedriven wheels. The system stabilises the ve-hicle by braking individual wheels or by re-ducing the engine torque.

The ESC has limits. It is important to realisethat the ESC is also subject to the laws ofphysics. ESC will not be able to deal with allsituations with which drivers may be faced.For example, if the road surface changes sud-denly then ESC will not be useful in all cases.If the vehicle suddenly enters a section cov-ered by water, mud or snow then ESC will notprovide assistance in the same way as on dryground. If the vehicle loses its grip on theground and moves on a film of water (“aqua-planing”), the ESC will not be able to assist

the driver to control the vehicle as the loss ofadherence with the road surface will prevent-ing braking and steering. If the vehicle isdriven through series of bends at highspeed, the ESC will not always be as effec-tive: the vehicle reaction to aggressive driv-ing is not the same as at reduced speeds.When driving with a trailer, ESC does not pro-vide the same amount of vehicle control aswithout a trailer.

Adjust your speed and driving style to road,traffic and weather conditions. ESC cannotpush the limits of the laws of physics; im-prove the transmission available or maintainthe vehicle on the road if a lack of driver at-tention creates an inevitable situation. Other-wise, ESC assists in maintaining vehicle con-trol in extreme situations and uses the move-ments of the steering made by the driver tomaintain the vehicle moving in the desireddirection. If the vehicle is driven at such aspeed that it will leave the road before ESCcan intervene then the system cannot pro-vide assistance.

The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are in-corporated into the ESC. The ESC is alwayson. The ESC should only be turned off usingthe ASR button ››› Fig. 205 when traction isinsufficient. Always remember to turn on theASR once more when the vehicle has tractionagain.

Anti-lock system (ABS)

ABS can prevent the wheels from locking dur-ing braking until just before the vehicle stopsthus helping the driver to steer the vehicleand maintain control. This means that, evenduring full braking, the risk of skidding is re-duced:

● Press and hold the brake pedal fully. Do notremove your foot from the brake pedal or re-duce braking force!

● Do not “pump” the brake pedal, or reducebraking force!

● Maintain vehicle direction when brakingfully.

● When the brake pedal is released or whenthe brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off.

ABS control can be observed by vibration ofthe brake pedal and noise. You should neverexpect the ABS to reduce the braking dis-tance under any circumstances. This distancewill increase when driving on gravel, recentsnow or on icy and slippery ground.

When driving on loose ground, the all-terrainconfiguration of the ABS is automaticallyturned on. When ABS is activated, the frontwheels may lock briefly. This shortens thebraking distance in off-road situations as thewheels are prevented from digging into loosesurfaces. All-terrain ABS only interveneswhen driving in a straight line. When the »

203

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

front wheels are turned, the normal ABS isactivated.

Brake assist system (BAS)

The brake assist system may reduce the re-quired braking distance. The brake assistsystem boosts the braking force if you pressthe brake pedal quickly in an emergency. Asa result, the braking pressure increases rap-idly, the braking force is multiplied and thebraking distance is reduced. This enables theABS to be activated more quickly and effec-tively.

¡Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal!When the brake pedal is released or whenthe brake force is reduced, braking assist au-tomatically turns off the brake servo.

Traction control when accelerating (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. The ASR makessome situations easier, for example, whenstarting, accelerating or going uphill, even inunfavourable road conditions.

The ASR can be switched on or off manually››› page 205.

Electronic differential lock system (EDS)

EDL is available when driving in straight linesunder normal conditions. When the EDL de-tects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel

and directs the power to the other drivewheels. To prevent the disc brake of thebraked wheel from overheating, the EDL cutsout automatically if subjected to excessiveloads. The EDL will switch on again automati-cally when the brake has cooled down.

Electronic drive torque management (XDS)

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turnat a higher speed than the inner wheel. Inthis way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-er wheel) receives less drive torque than theinner wheel. This may mean that in certainsituations the torque delivered to the innerwheel is too high, causing the wheels tospin. On the other hand, the outer wheel isreceiving a lower drive torque than it couldtransmit. This causes an overall loss of lateralgrip on the front axle, resulting in understeeror “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct thiseffect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the driver'sdesired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination withthe ESC and is always active, even when ASRtraction control is disconnected.

WARNING

Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle controland serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.

● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi-bility, road, traffic and weather conditions.Even though the brake assist systems, ABS,BAS, EDL, ASR and ESC, provide more securi-ty, do not take unnecessary risks while driv-ing.

● Brake assist systems can not overcome thelaws of physics. Even with ESC and other sys-tems, slippery and wet roads will always bedangerous.

● Driving to quickly on wet ground can resultin the wheels losing contact with the groundin an effect known as “aquaplaning”. Withoutadherence, it is impossible to brake, steer orcontrol the vehicle.

● Brake assist systems cannot avoid acci-dents if, for example, the driver does not re-spect safety distances or drives to quickly indifficult conditions.

● Even though brake assist systems are ex-tremely effective and help control the vehiclein difficult situations, remember that the ve-hicle stability depends on tyre grip.

● When accelerating on a slippery surface,for example on ice or snow, press the acceler-ator carefully. The wheels can still slip evenwith brake assist systems resulting in loss ofvehicle control.

204


WARNING

The effectiveness of the ESC can be consider-ably reduced if other components and sys-tems affecting driving dynamics are not main-tained or are not functioning correctly. Thisincludes, among others, brakes, tyres andother systems already mentioned.

● Remember that changing and fitting othercomponents to the vehicle can affect opera-tion of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL and ESC.

● Changes to the vehicle suspension or usingunapproved wheel/tyre combinations can af-fect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL andESC, as well as their effectiveness.

● Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC dependson the use of suitable tyres ››› page 284.

Note

● To ensure that the ESC and ASR work prop-erly, all four wheels must be fitted with iden-tical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radi-us of the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.

● If a malfunction should occur in the ABS,the ESC, EDL and ASR will also be out of ac-tion.

● Noises may be heard while any of theabove systems are operating.

Switching ASR on and off

Fig. 205 Detailed view of the centre console:button used to switch ASR on and off (vehi-cles with ESC)

The electronic stability control ESC consistsof ABS, EDL and ASR and only works whenthe engine is running.

The ASR can be switched off while the engineis running by pressing the OFF ››› Fig. 205button. The ASR (and similar) is only switch-ed off when the required traction is not ob-tained:

● When driving through deep snow or onloose ground (gravel, etc.).

● When “freeing” a trapped vehicle.

Turn the ASR back on by pressing the but-ton OFF ››› Fig. 205.

Start assist systems

Introduction

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the start assistsystems cannot change the laws of physics.The improved comfort provided by start as-sist systems should not prompt you to takerisks.

● Unintentional movements of the vehiclecould cause serious injury.

● The start assist systems are not a replace-ment for driver awareness.

● Always try to adapt the speed of the vehi-cle and your style of driving to the conditionof the ground or the road and to weather andtraffic conditions.

● The start assist system cannot keep the ve-hicle stationary in all conditions on a gradi-ent or cause it to brake on steep downhillgradients, e.g. if the road is slippery or icy.

205

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Auto Hold function*

Fig. 206 Detailed view of the centre console:Auto Hold button

The control lamp on the button switches onwhen the Auto Hold function is on.

When the Auto Hold function is on, this helpsthe driver if they must regularly stop the vehi-cle or if they must stop with the engine run-ning for prolonged periods, for example, onhills, before a traffic light or in traffic jamswith continuous stopping and starting.

The Auto Hold function automatically pre-vents the vehicle from rolling away acciden-tally when at a standstill, without the driverhaving to keep his/her foot on the brake ped-al.

When the system that detects that the vehi-cle has stopped, the Auto Hold keeps the ve-hicle at a standstill. The brake pedal can bereleased.

If the driver presses the brake pedal briefly orthe accelerator to start off, the Auto Holdfunction releases the brake once more. Thevehicle moves according to the gradient.

If any of the conditions necessary for the Au-to Hold function change while the vehiclestopped, the system is turned off as is the in-dicator on the button ››› Fig. 206. The elec-tronic parking brake engages where necessa-ry to park the vehicle safely ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle at astandstill with Auto Hold:

● The driver door must be closed.

● The driver seat belt must be buckled.

● The engine must be running.

● The ASR system is switched on››› page 187.

Automatically engaging and disengaging theAuto Hold function

If the Auto Hold function was engaged withthe AUTO HOLD button before disengaging theignition, the function will automatically re-main engaged after the ignition is re-engag-ed.

If the Auto Hold function was not engaged, itwill automatically remain disengaged afterthe ignition is engaged.

Permanent Auto Hold connection

The Auto Hold function must be switched onevery time the engine is started. However, toswitch the Auto Hold function on permanent-ly, the mark must be switched on in the Set-tings menu, “Autohold” submenu››› page 26.

Auto Hold works automatically under the fol-lowing conditions:

All points must be fulfilled simultaneously››› :

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1. If the vehicle is kept at a standstill using the brakepedal on a flat or a slope.

2. The engine must be “running smoothly”.

3. On a slope, the 1st gearis engaged uphill or thereverse gear is engagedfor a downhill. Theclutch must be helddown.

A gear for driving is se-lected from R, D or S.

Upon accelerating andpressing in the clutchsimultaneously, thebrake releases gradual-ly.

Upon accelerating, thebrake releases gradual-ly.

206


Auto Hold turns off automatically under thefollowing conditions:

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1. If one of the conditions mentioned in table onpage 206 changes.

2. If the engine is “not running regularly” or if there isa malfunction.

3. When changing to idlespeed.

If the selector lever isplaced in neutral (N).

4. If the engine is turnedoff or stalls.

If the engine is switch-ed off.

5. If the driver accelerateswhile pressing theclutch in.

If the vehicle is acceler-ated.

6. When one of the wheelshas minimal contactwith the ground (e.g. onuneven ground).

WARNING

The Auto Hold technology is limited by thelaws of physics. The improved comfort provi-ded by Auto Hold should never prompt you totake risks.

● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.

● Auto Hold cannot always stop the vehicleuphill and downhill (e.g. if the ground is slip-pery or frozen).

CAUTION

Before entering an automatic car wash, al-ways switch the Auto Hold function off, as itcould be damaged when the electronic park-ing brake automatically engages.

Start-Stop Function*

Fig. 207 Detailed view of the centre console:Start-Stop function button

With the Start-Stop system enabled, the en-gine is automatically stopped when the vehi-cle is at a standstill. The engine restarts auto-matically when required.

The function is enabled automatically when-ever the ignition is switched on. The instru-ment panel displays information on the cur-rent status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

● When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave itin neutral and take your foot off the clutch.The engine switches off.

● Simply depress the clutch pedal to moveoff again.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

● When the vehicle is at a standstill, depressthe brake or keep it pressed down. The en-gine switches off.

● The engine will start again as soon as yourelease the brake pedal.

● With the selector lever set to position P, theengine will not start until a range of gears isselected or the accelerator pedal is de-pressed.

Important conditions for the engine to auto-matically switch off

● The driver seat belt must be buckled.

● The driver door must be closed.

● The bonnet must be closed.

● The factory-fitted towing bracket must notbe electrically connected to a trailer.

● A minimum engine temperature has beenreached.

● The steering wheel must not be turnedmore than 270 degrees.

● The vehicle has moved since the last stop. »207

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● In vehicles with Climatronic: the tempera-ture inside the vehicle is within the pre-settemperature range.

● The temperature set is neither very high norvery low.

● The air conditioning defrost function is notswitched on.

● In vehicles with Climatronic: the blower hasnot been manually set to a high speed.

● The power level of the vehicle's battery issufficient.

● The vehicle's battery temperature is neithertoo high nor too low.

● The vehicle is not on a steep gradient orslope.

● The front wheels are not overly turned.

● The heated windscreen is not switched on.

● Reverse gear is not engaged.

● The park assist system is not switched on.

Conditions for automatically restarting theengine

The engine may automatically restart underthe following conditions:

● If the vehicle interior is too hot or too cold.

● If the vehicle moves.

● If the vehicle's battery voltage drops.

Conditions requiring the key to restart theengine

The engine must be started manually underthe following conditions:

● If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

● If the driver door is opened.

● If the bonnet is opened.

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: if a gearhas been selected.

Switching Start-Stop mode on and off man-ually

● Press the button on the centre console››› Fig. 207.

● The button will light up when the Start-Stopfunction is switched off.

The engine will start immediately if the vehi-cle is in Stop mode when it is switched offmanually.

WARNING

The brake servo and the power steering donot work when the engine is switched off.

● Never allow the vehicle to move when theengine is switched off.

CAUTION

Using the Start-Stop function for a long peri-od at very high outside temperatures coulddamage the vehicle's battery.

Note

● In some cases, you may have to restart thevehicle using the key. Observe the corre-sponding message on the instrument paneldisplay.

● If the steering wheel is turned more than270°, Stop will not function; however, the an-gle of steering wheel turn does not affectstarting the vehicle.

Parking distance warning sys-tem*

Introduction

The parking distance warning system assiststhe driver when parking. When the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, forwards or back-wards, an intermittent audible warning willbe heard, higher or lower depending on thedistance. The shorter the distance, the short-er the intervals between tones. If the vehicleis too close to the obstacle, the audible warn-ing becomes constant.

If you continue to approach an obstacle whenthe sound is continuous, this means the sys-tem can no longer measure the distance.

The sensor system on the bumpers transmitand receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasoundsignal (transmission, reflection from the ob-stacle and reception), this system

208


continuously calculates the distance be-tween the bumper and the obstacle.

WARNING

The parking distance warning system and theoptical parking system cannot replace driverawareness.

● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not registered.

● Always observe the area around the vehi-cle, as the sensors do not always detectsmall children, animals or objects.

● The surface of certain objects and someclothing do not reflect the ultrasound signalsfrom the parking distance system. The sys-tem cannot detect or incorrectly detectsthese objects and people wearing thesetypes of clothes.

● External sound sources can affect the park-ing distance aid signals. In this case, undercertain circumstances, people and objectswill not be detected.

CAUTION

● The sensors may not always be able to de-tect objects such as trailer draw bars, thinrails, fences, posts, trees and open boots,etc. This could result in damage to your car.

● Although the parking distance warning sys-tem detects and warns of the presence of anobstacle, the obstacle could disappear fromthe angle of measurement of the sensors if itis too high or low and the system would no

longer show it. Therefore, it will not warn youof these objects. Ignoring the warnings of theparking sensor system could cause consider-able damage to the vehicle.

● The bumper sensors may become damagedor misaligned, for example, when parking.

● To ensure that the system works properly,the bumper sensors must be kept clean, freeof ice and snow and uncovered.

● When cleaning the sensors with high-pres-sure or steam cleaning equipment, spray thesensors briefly at a distance of no less than10 cm (4 inches).

Note

Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous warn-ings on the parking sensor system, e.g.rough tarmac, cobbles or the noise of othervehicles.

Parking distance warning system*

Fig. 208 Detailed view of the centre console:button for switching the parking distancewarning system on and off

Fig. 209 Parking sensor system sensors onthe front bumper

The parking distance warning system assiststhe driver when parking. If the vehicle is ap-proaching an obstacle, an intermittent audi-ble warning is emitted. The shorter the dis-tance, the shorter the intervals between »

209

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obsta-cle, the audible warning becomes constant.

Switching the parking distance warning sys-tem on and off

● Press the button ››› Fig. 208 when theignition is switched on.

● Automatic on: select reverse gear.

● Automatic off: drive faster than 15 km/h(9 mph).

The button lights up when the function isswitched on.

Things to note on the parking distance warn-ing system

● The parking distance warning systemsometimes registers water on the sensors asan obstacle.

● If the distance does not change, the warn-ing signal will sound less loudly after a fewseconds. If the continuous signal sounds, thevolume will remain constant.

● When the vehicle moves away from the ob-stacle, the beeping sound automaticallyswitches off. On approaching the obstacleagain, the beeping sound will automaticallyswitch back on.

● If the electronic parking brake is engagedor the selector lever is set to P, no audiblewarning will be emitted.

● Your technical service centre can adjust thevolume of the warning signals.

Note

If the parking distance warning system isfaulty, a constant audible warning will beemitted the first time it is switched on andthe button will flash. Switch the parking dis-tance warning system off using the buttonand take the vehicle to a specialised work-shop to have the system checked as soon aspossible.

Optical parking system* (OPS)

Fig. 210 On-screen OPS display: A has de-tected an obstacle in the collision zone; B

has detected an obstacle in the segment; C

zone recorded behind the vehicle.

Fig. 211 On-screen OPS display: A has de-tected an obstacle in the segment; B restric-ted area in front of the vehicle.

The optical parking system is an accessory tothe Parking distance warning system››› page 209 and the park assist system››› page 211.

The zone recorded by the sensors in front ofand behind the vehicle is displayed on thefactory-fitted radio or navigation systemscreen. Any obstacles are displayed in rela-tion to the vehicle ››› .


Switching thedisplay on:

Switch on the parking distancewarning system ››› page 209 or thepark assist system ››› page 211. TheOPS switches on automatically.

210



Switching thedisplay off man-ually:

Press a zone selection button on thefactory-fitted radio or navigationsystemOR: briefly press the function button or RVC on the screen.

Switching thedisplay off man-ually:

Drive forwards at more than about10-15 km/h (6-9 mph).Select the reverse gear on vehicleswith rear assist ››› page 215. Thedisplay changes to the image of thecamera.

Zones explored

The zone in which obstacles are recognisedruns to a distance of around 120 cm from thefront of the vehicle and up to 60 cm to theside ››› Fig. 211 B . Behind the vehicle, thezone analysed reaches a distance of up to160 cm and around 60 cm to the sides››› Fig. 210 C .

Screen display

The image displayed represents the super-vised zones in several segments. As the vehi-cle moves closer to an obstacle, the segmentmoves closer to the vehicle displayed››› Fig. 210 B and ››› Fig. 211 A . When thepenultimate segment is displayed, thismeans that the vehicle has reached the colli-sion zone. Stop the vehicle!

Distance from thevehicle to the ob-stacle

Audiblewarn-

ing

Displayed incolour on thescreen: colourof the segmentif an obstacleis recognised

Front: approx. 31 -120 cmBehind: approx. 31 -160 cm

Beepingsound

Yellow

Approximately 0 –30 cm in front or be-hinda)

Perma-nent

soundRed

a) The permanent sound starts at a somewhat greater distanceon vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket.

With towing bracket

A specific image is displayed on the screen ofvehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracketand an electrically connected trailer. In thiscase, the distances behind the vehicle arenot indicated.

Switching the parking sensor system soundon and off

If the button on the radio or navigationsystem screen may mute the sound of OPSwarnings. To switch the warnings back on,press the button again briefly.

When the OPS is switched off and back onagain, muting is cancelled. Error messagescannot be switched off.

WARNING

Do not be distracted from the traffic whenlooking at the screen.

Park Assist system* (Park As-sist)

Introduction

››› table on page 2

The Park Assist system helps the driver tofind a suitable place to park, to insert the ve-hicle into parallel and perpendicular parkingplaces and to leave parallel parking places.

The Park Assist system is limited to the sys-tem abilities and requires that the driver isespecially attentive ››› .

The parking sensor system is a component ofthe Park Assist system that helps to park thevehicle.

For vehicles with the optical parking system(OPS), the radio navigation systems screendisplays the detected zones in front of andbehind the vehicle, indicating - within thelimits of the system - the position of obsta-cles in relation to the vehicle.

The park assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket is elec-trically connected to a trailer. »

211

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Despite the assistance provided by the parkassist system, do not run any risks whenparking. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● Unintentional movements of the vehiclecould cause serious injury.


● The surface of certain objects and items ofclothing and external sound sources mayhave a negative affect on the park assist sig-nals or on the system sensors or may not re-flect its signals.

● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not registered.

● Always observe the area around the vehi-cle, as the sensors do not always detectsmall children, animals or objects.

CAUTION

● The park assist system aims exclusively atother parked vehicles, without taking curbsor other circumstances into account. Makesure you do not damage the tyres and wheelrims when parking. Where necessary, stopmanoeuvring to avoid damaging the vehicle.

● The sensors may not always be able to de-tect objects such as trailer draw bars, thinrails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This couldresult in damage to your car.

● Although the parking distance warning sys-tem detects and warns of the presence of anobstacle, the obstacle could disappear fromthe angle of measurement of the sensors if itis too high or low and the system would nolonger show it. Therefore, it will not warn youof these objects. Ignoring the warnings of theparking sensor system could cause consider-able damage to the vehicle. This is also validwhen using the park assist (e.g. to park be-hind a truck or motorcycle). Therefore, alwayskeep a close watch on the area in front of andbehind the vehicle while parking, and inter-vene promptly if necessary.

● To ensure that the system works properly,the bumper sensors must be kept clean, freeof ice and snow and uncovered.

● The bumper sensors may become damagedor misaligned, for example, when parking.

● When cleaning the sensors with high-pres-sure or steam cleaning equipment, spray thesensors briefly at a distance of no less than10 cm.

Note

Contact a specialised workshop with any sys-tem faults. SEAT recommends taking your carin for technical service.

Parking using the park assist system

Fig. 212 Detailed view of the centre console:button to switch the park assist system onmanually

212


Fig. 213 Gap detected: engage the reversegear to park (parallel or nose/tail to the kerb)

Preparing to park

● The Traction control system ASR must beturned on ››› page 187.

● Parallel parking: press the button atspeeds up to 50 km/h (31 mph) once. Whenthe function is enabled, the button››› Fig. 212 will light up.

● Perpendicular parking: press the button at speeds up to 50 km/h (31 mph) twice.When the function is enabled, the button››› Fig. 212 will light up.

● If necessary, press the button oncemore to change parking mode.

● Apply the turn signal for the side on whicha gap is to be detected for parking. The in-strument panel displays the side correspond-ing to the road.

Parking

● Parking parallel to the road: drive next tothe gap at a speed of no more than 40 km/h(25 mph) and at a distance of between 0.5 mand 2 m.

● Parking perpendicular to the road: drivenext to the gap at a speed of no more than20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of be-tween 0.5 m and 2 m.

● The best parking results will be achieved ifyou position the vehicle as parallel as possi-ble to the line of parked cars or the kerb.

● When a suitable parking place is displayedon the instrument panel, stop and select re-verse gear.

● Follow the instructions given on the instru-ment panel display

● Then, release the steering wheel when thewarning signal sounds ››› : The systemwill move the steering wheel! Ob-serve the surrounding area.

● Observe the surrounding area and acceler-ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h(4 mph).

● The park assist system is only responsiblefor moving the steering wheel during the ma-noeuvre. The driver applies the accelerator,the clutch, the gears and the brake.

● Follow the instructions given by the parkassist system until the manoeuvre is comple-ted.

● The park assist system steers the vehicleforwards and backwards until it is in astraight position in the parking space.

● The manoeuvre is complete when the corre-sponding indication is given on the instru-ment panel display.

Stopping the parking manoeuvre

The park assist system stops the manoeuvrein advance in the event of one of the follow-ing:

● Press button .

● Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

● The driver moves the steering wheel.

● The parking manoeuvre has not been com-pleted after 6 minutes since the park assistsystem was activated.

● A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-noeuvre, close the sliding door and press thebutton again. »

213

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● There is a system malfunction (system tem-porarily unavailable).

● The ASR system is switched off or the ASRor ESC is working.

WARNING

The steering wheel turns quickly by itselfwhen parking using the park assist system.Placing your hand between the steeringwheel spokes could lead to injuries.

Note

● The park assist system has its limitations.For example, it is not possible to park ontight bends using the park assist system.

● Even if the park assist system recognisesthat there is not enough space for parkingthe vehicle, the instrument panel display willstill show this place. In this case, the parkingmanoeuvre should not be requested.

● Changing gears between forward and re-verse gears before indicated (that is, beforethe signal from the parking sensor system)the parking results may not be ideal.

● For parallel parking (parallel to the road), asound will tell the driver when they mustchange from forward gears to reverse; thesignal from the parking sensor system doesnot indicate changes of direction.

● The park assist can also be activated after-wards, if you pass close to a parallel parkingspace at a maximum of 40 km an hour(25 mph) or close to be perpendicular parking

space at about 20 km an hour (12 mph) thenpress the button .

● The progress bar on the screen of the in-strument panel shows a display of the rela-tive distance to be covered.

● When the Park Assist system is turning thesteering wheel of the stopped vehicle thesymbol is also displayed. Press on thebrake pedal so that the steering can turn withthe vehicle at a standstill and thus reduce thenumber of manoeuvres.

● A “suitable” parking space length is atleast 1.1 m greater than the length of the ve-hicle.

● If the results of the park assist system arenot as good after changing the wheels, thesystem must memorise the perimeter of thenew wheels. This process is performed auto-matically while the vehicle is in motion. Tohelp this process, turn slowly (at less than20 km/h [12 mph]), e.g. in an empty car park.

Leaving a parking space using thePark Assist system

Driving off

● Switch on the engine.

● Press button . When the function is ena-bled, the button ››› Fig. 212 will light up.

● Apply the turn signal for the side on whichyou want to leave the parking space.


● Follow the instructions given by the parkassist system.

● When the next indication appears, releasethe steering wheel ››› in Parking using thepark assist system on page 214: The sys-tem will move the steering wheel!Observe the surrounding area.● Observe the surrounding area and acceler-ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h(4 mph).

● The park assist system is only responsiblefor moving the steering wheel during the ma-noeuvre. The driver applies the accelerator,the clutch, the gears and the brake.

● When it is possible to leave the parkingspace, the Park Assist system will stop. Takecontrol of the steering and when traffic condi-tions permit, leave the parking space.

Automatic stoppage of the manoeuvre

The park assist system stops the manoeuvrein the event of one of the following:

● Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

● The driver moves the steering wheel.

● A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-noeuvre, close the sliding door and press thebutton again.

● There is a system malfunction (system tem-porarily unavailable).

● The ASR system is switched off or the ASRor ESC is working.

214


WARNING

The steering wheel turns quickly automatical-ly when leaving a parking space using thepark assist system. Placing your hand be-tween the steering wheel spokes could leadto injuries.

Park Assist brake operation

The Park Assist system helps the driver bybraking automatically. Automatic brakingdoes not relieve the driver of responsibilityfor controlling the accelerator, brake andclutch ››› .

Braking to avoid damage at excess speed

It is possible that the system operates thebrakes to reduce excess speed. The parkingmanoeuvre can then continue. The brakeswill intervene during each parking process.

Braking to minimise damage

When approaching an obstacle, the vehiclemay brake automatically. In certain circum-stances (e.g. storm, detection of ultrasounds,vehicle status, load, inclination), the Park As-sist system may stop the vehicle completelybefore an object.

● Press the foot brake ››› !

Following the intervention of the brakes, thePark Assist will stop.

WARNING

Despite the assistance provided by the parkassist system, do not run any risks whenparking. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● Always be ready to brake.

● Automatic brake intervention will end after1.5 seconds approximately. Following auto-matic intervention of the brakes, stop the ve-hicle yourself.

Rear assist* (Rear View Cam-era)

Introduction

The camera fitted to the rear lid helps driversduring parking or reversing manoeuvres. Thecamera image and certain orientation pointsgenerated by the system are indicated on thefactory-fitted radio or navigation systemscreen.

Two types of location point (modes) can beselected:

● Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular tothe road (e.g. in a car park).

● Mode 2: reverse parking parallel to thecurb.

The mode can be changed by pressing thebutton on the radio or navigation systemscreen. Only the mode to which the pointscan be changed will be displayed.

WARNING

Use of the camera to calculate the distancefrom obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) is inac-curate and may cause accidents and severeinjuries.

● The camera lens expands and distorts thefield of vision and displays the objects on thescreen in a different, vague manner.

● Some objects may not be displayed or maynot be very clear (e.g. very thin posts or fen-ces), due to the resolution of the monitor or ifthe light is dim.

● The camera has blind spots in which obsta-cles and people are not detected.

● Keep the camera lens clean and clear ofsnow and ice. Do not cover it.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the rear assistsystem cannot change the limits imposed bythe laws of physics and by the system itself.Careless or uncontrolled use of the rear assistsystem may result in severe injuries and acci-dents. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness. »

215

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation


● Always keep a close eye on the area aroundthe vehicle and always look towards whereyou are parking. The display shows the pathof the rear end of the vehicle using the cur-rent steering angle. The front of the vehicleturns more in comparison with the rear.

● Do not be distracted from the traffic whenlooking at the screen.

● Always observe the area around the vehi-cle, as the cameras do not always detect chil-dren, animals or objects.

● The system might not show all areas clear-ly.

● Only use the rear assist system when theboot hatch is completely closed.

CAUTION

● The camera only displays 2D images on thescreen. Due to the lack of depth, it might bedifficult or impossible to recognise protrud-ing objects or cracks in the road.

● The cameras may not always be able to de-tect objects such as thin rails, fences, postsand trees, etc. This could result in damage toyour car.

Instructions for use

Fig. 214 On the rear lid: location of the rearassist camera

Fig. 215 Rear assist display: mode 2 connec-ted

Function buttons on the screen:

display the menu; hide the menu.

Turning off the reversing camera im-ages

1

2

Display help. The help list explains thesurfaces and lines on the camera image.Press to exit help.

Mute the sound.

Adjust the display: brightness, contrast,colour.

Switching on the orientation points forrear parking perpendicular to the road(mode 1).

Displaying the optical parking system.

Operations in vehicles with no optical parkingsystem (OPS)

Switching the dis-play on automati-cally:

Select reverse gear with the igni-tion switched on or the engine run-ning. Mode 1 will be displayed.

Switching the dis-play off manually:

Press a button to select the area onthe radio or the navigation system››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navi-gation system.OR: press the button on thescreen.OR: after switching off the ignition,the rear assist image remains onthe screen for a short period.

Switching off thedisplay by disen-gaging reversegear:

The image will switch off afteraround 10 seconds.

Switching off thedisplay by drivingforwards:

Drive forwards at more than ap-prox. 15 km/h (9 mph).

3

4

5

6

7

216


Operations in vehicles with the optical parkingsystem (OPS)

Switching the dis-play on automati-cally:

Select reverse gear with the igni-tion switched on or the engine run-ning. Mode 1 will be displayed.

Switching the dis-play off manually:

Press a button to select the area onthe radio or the navigation system››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navi-gation system.OR: press the button on thescreen.OR: after switching off the ignition,the rear assist image remains onthe screen for a short period.

Press button .

Switching off thedisplay by disen-gaging reversegear:

The OPS display will immediatelybe shown.

Switching off thedisplay by drivingforwards:

Drive forwards at more than ap-prox. 10 km/h (6 mph).

Things to note

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the fol-lowing cases:

– If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis control (DCC).

– If the image displayed is not very clear or reliable (lowvisibility or dirty lens).

– If the space behind the vehicle cannot be clearly orcompletely recognised.

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the fol-lowing cases:

– If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear.

– If the driver is not familiar with the system.

– If the rear lid is open.

– If the position and installation angle of the camerahave been changed, e.g. in a rear-end collision. Have aspecialised workshop check the system.

2) Optical illusions of the camera (examples)

The rear assist camera produces two-dimensional im-ages. Any cracks in or objects protruding from theground or from other vehicles are more difficult to spotor cannot be seen due to a lack of depth in the imagedisplayed.

Objects or other vehicles may seem to be closer or fur-ther away than what they really are:

– On changing from a flat surface to a slope or gradient.

– On changing from a slope or gradient to a flat surface.

– If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear.

– On approaching protruding objects. These objectsmay be outside the angle of vision of the camera whenreversing.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snowand ice:

● Moisten the lens using a commerciallyavailable, alcohol-based glass cleaning

agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth››› .

● Remove snow using a small brush.

● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice ››› .

CAUTION

● Never use abrasive cleaners to clean thecamera lens.

● Never remove snow or ice from the cameralens using warm or hot water. This coulddamage the lens.

Note

● SEAT recommends that you practise park-ing with the rear assist system in a quiet lo-cation or in a car park to become familiar withthe system, including the orientation linesand their function.

● The orientation lines will not be displayedon the screen if the rear lid is open or the fac-tory-fitted towing bracket is electrically con-nected to a trailer.

217

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Parking perpendicular to the road(mode 1)

Fig. 216 Display: orientation lines for theparking space behind the vehicle

Summary of the orientation points

Meaning of orientation lines displayed on thescreen ››› Fig. 216. All of the lengths of theorientation lines use a vehicle located on ahorizontal surface as reference.

Red: safety distance, i.e. road area loca-ted up to 40 cm behind the vehicle.

Green: prolongation of the rear of the ve-hicle (somewhat enlarged). The area dis-played green ends around 2 metres be-hind the vehicle, on the road.

Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the ve-hicle as the steering wheel turns. Thearea displayed yellow ends around 3 me-tres behind the vehicle, on the road.

1

2

3

Parking

● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-lect reverse gear.

● Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheelso that the yellow orientation lines guide youtowards the space ››› Fig. 216 3 .

● Align the vehicle straight in the parkingplace using the help of the green orientationlines.

Parking parallel to the road (mode 2)

Fig. 217 Display: orientation lines and surfa-ces for the space behind the vehicle

After applying the turn signal, the lines andsurfaces not required are deleted.

Summary of the orientation points

Meaning of orientation lines and surfacesdisplayed on the screen ››› Fig. 217. All of the

lengths of the orientation lines use a vehiclelocated on a horizontal surface as reference.

Safety distance: road area located up toaround 40 cm behind the vehicle.

Vehicle side limit.

Turning point when parking. When theyellow line touches the curb or anotherlimit of the parking space, the point forchanging direction (magnifying glass)will have been reached.

Free space required to parallel park thevehicle. The surface displayed must com-pletely fit in the space.

Possible vehicle parked next to the curb.

Parking

● Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to theparking space and select reverse gear.

● Switch on mode 2 on the navigation systemscreen for parallel parking.

● Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheelso that the surface displayed yellow on thescreen stops in front of any obstacles 5

(e.g. another vehicle).

● Turn the steering wheel fully towards thespace and reverse slowly.

● When the yellow line 3 touches the sidelimit of the space, e.g. the border or curb(magnifying glass), turn the steering wheelfully in the opposite direction.

1

2

3

4

5

218


● Continue reversing until the vehicle is in-side the space, parallel to the road. Correctthe position if necessary.

Cruise control* (Cruise controlsystem - CCS)

Warning and control lamp

Fig. 218 Instrument panel display: CCS statusindications

It lights up

This cruise control system maintains the set speed ofthe vehicle.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

Indication on display

There are different versions of the cruise con-trol system. In vehicles with the multifunctiondisplay (MFD), the set speed is displayed onthe instrument panel screen.

Status Fig. 218:

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small figures.

System error. Contact a specialised work-shop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

WARNING


Cruise control system operation


The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed when driving for-wards from approx. 20 km/h (12 mph).

A

B

C

D

The CCS only slows down by reducing the ac-celerator but not by braking ››› .

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicledown using the brake pedal and reducegears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switchedoff automatically or temporarily:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.

● If you increase the stored speed by usingthe accelerator for a certain time.

● if the brake or clutch pedal is depressed.

● If you change gears.

● If the airbag is triggered.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-dents and severe injuries if it is not possibleto drive at a constant speed maintaining thesafety distance.

● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front isinsufficient, on steep roads, with severalbends or in slippery circumstances (snow,ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. »

219

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Never use the CCS when driving off-road oron unpaved roads.

● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruisecontrol system, turn it off every time you fin-ish using it.

● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the prevailing road, traffic orweather conditions.

● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. The vehicle tendsto accelerate under its own weight. Select alower gear or use the foot brake to slow thevehicle.

Lane Assist system*

Introduction

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the lane assistsystem cannot change the limits imposed bythe laws of physics and by the system itself.Careless or uncontrolled use of the Lane As-sist system may cause accidents and injury.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.

● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so you can turn it at any time.

● The lane assist system does not detect allroad markings. In some circumstances, thepoor state of the road, structures located onit or certain objects may be mistakenly recog-nised as road markings by the lane assistsystem. In such situations, switch the laneassist system off immediately.

● Pay attention to the instructions on the in-strument panel display and act accordingly toits requests.

● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.

Note

The lane assist system has been exclusivelydeveloped for driving on asphalted roads.

Note

If the lane assist system does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, do not use it and con-tact a specialised workshop.

Note

If you observe any system malfunction, havethe system checked by a specialised work-shop.

Control lamps

Blinks or lights up yellow:

Lane assist sys-tem connectedbut inactive.

The system cannot clearly detect thelane. See page 221, The lane assistsystem is inactive (control lamp litin yellow).

Blinks or lights up green:

Lane assist system connected and active.


WARNING


220


Operation mode

Fig. 219 In the windscreen: field of vision ofthe lane assist system camera.

Using the camera located in the sun visor,the lane assist system detects the possiblelines dividing it. When the vehicle involuntar-ily approaches a dividing line it has detected,the system will notify the driver with a correc-tive intervention. It is possible to over-regu-late the corrective intervention at any time.

If the turn signal is connected, there will beno warning as the lane assist system under-stands that you wish to change lanes volun-tarily.

Steering wheel vibration

The following situations cause the steeringwheel to vibrate and require the driver to takeactive control of the steering:

● If the limits inherent to the system arereached.

● If the maximum rotational torque duringthe corrective intervention is not enough tokeep the vehicle inside the lane.

● If during the corrective intervention by thesystem the lane is no longer detected.

Switching the lane assist system on or off

● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assist systems››› page 26.

● OR: activate or deactivate the system in themenu Settings, sub-menu Assist sys-tems, menu Lane Assist ››› page 26.The “confirmation sign” indicates that thedriver assist system is switched on.

Automatic deactivation: the lane assist sys-tem can be deactivated automatically if thereis a system malfunction. Control lampswitches off.

The lane assist system is inactive (controllamp lit in yellow)

● When driving speed drops to approx.65 km/h (40 mph).

● When the Lane Assist system does not de-tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-ple, in the event of road works, and snow,dirt, moisture or reflections.

● When the radius of a curve is too small.

● When there is no dividing line.

● When the distance to the next dividing lineis excessive.

● When there are more than two lane mark-ings per lane.

● When the ASR is switched off.

● When the system does not detect any ac-tive rotation of the steering wheel by the driv-er during a prolonged period.

● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamicdriving.

● When the turn signal is connected.

Note

● Before starting travel, verify that the cam-era's field of vision is not covered ››› Fig. 219.

● Keep the camera window clean.

Disconnect the lane assist system inthe following situations

Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,switch it off in the following situations:

● When more attention is required of thedriver

● For very sporty driving

● In very unfavourable weather conditions

● In very unfavourable road conditions

● In areas of road works221

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Blind spot detector (BSD) withrear cross traffic alert (RTA)

Introduction

››› table on page 2

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps detectthe traffic situation to the sides and behindthe vehicle.

The integrated rear cross traffic alert (RTA)helps the driver when backing out of a per-pendicular parking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developedfor driving on paved roads.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theblind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross traf-fic alert (RTA) included cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Acci-dents and severe injury may occur if the blindspot detection system or the rear cross trafficalert are used negligently or involuntarily.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times,and be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.

● Pay attention to the control lamps that maycome on in the external rear view mirrors andon the instrument panel, and follow any in-structions they may give.

● The blind spot assistant may react in theface of any special constructions that may bepresent on the sides of the vehicle: e.g., highor irregular protective fences. This may causeerroneous warnings.

● Never use the blind spot detector with rearcross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blindspot detector with rear cross traffic alert hasbeen designed for use on paved roads.

● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.

● Never use the blind spot detector with rearcross traffic alert if the radar sensors aredirty, covered or damaged. The system maywork incorrectly in these cases.

CAUTION

● The radar sensors on the rear bumper maybe damaged or shifted in the event of a colli-sion, for example, when entering or exiting aparking space. This may result in the systemdisconnecting itself, or at least having itsfunctionality diminished.

● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper free ofsnow and ice and do not cover it.

● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spotdetector's functions may be limited or workincorrectly if other paints are used.

● The external rear view mirror control lampsmay have their functionality limited in theevent of solar radiation.

Note

If the blind spot detector with rear cross traf-fic alert does not work as described in thischapter, do not use it and have it checked bya specialised workshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

Lights up

Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa-ted and ready to operate.

Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle inthe blind spot.

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in theblind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in thedirection of the detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist››› page 220, a warning to switch lanes will also appeareven though the turn signal has not been engaged.

222


If there are no indications from the controllamp in the external rear view mirror, thismeans that the blind spot detector has notdetected any other vehicles in the area ››› in Introduction on page 222.

If the dipped beam is on, then the controllamps in the external rear view mirrors will bedimmed (night mode).

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up, thevehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-dents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.

● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-sponding text messages when they light upmay result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 220 In the exterior mirrors: indication ofthe blind spot detector.

Fig. 221 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen-sor zones.

The Blind spot detector uses radar sensors tomonitor the areas to the side and behind thevehicle. The system does this by measuringthe vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The blind spot de-tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-cal signals in the external rear view mirrors tonotify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors

The control lamp (expanded view) providesan indication in the corresponding externalmirror ››› Fig. 220 regarding the traffic situa-tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to becritical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-ternal mirror A indicates the traffic situationto the left of the vehicle, and the control lampof the right-hand external mirror B, indicatesthe traffic situation to the right of the vehicle. »

223

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

In the case of tinted windows or windowswith tinted film, the indications of the exter-nal mirrors may not be seen clearly or correct-ly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free ofsnow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors

The radar sensor are located on the left andright of the bumper, and are not visible from

the outside ››› Fig. 221. The sensors have arange of approx. 20 metres behind the vehi-cle, including the blind spots to the left andright of the vehicle. The range to the sides ofthe vehicle is roughly larger than the width ofa lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detect

vehicles driving in the lane next to you (ifthere are any), and can also detect stationaryobjects such as dividers, and thus give an in-correct indication.

224


Driving situations

Fig. 222 Schematic diagram: Passing sit-uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-cation from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 223 Schematic diagram: Situation ofpassing and then moving into the right-handlane. Indication from the blind spot detec-tor in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 222B (arrow) or ››› Fig. 223 B (arrow):

● When being passed by another vehicle››› Fig. 222 A.

● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 223 Awith a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will bedisplayed.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooneran indication will be displayed in the externalmirror, because the blind spot detector takesinto account the speed differential with othervehicles. Thus even though the distance fromthe other vehicle is identical, the indicationwill appear sooner in some cases and later inothers.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the blind spot detectormay not interpret the traffic situation correct-ly. E.g. in the following situations:

● on tight bends

● in the case of lanes with different widths

● at the top of slopes

● in adverse weather conditions »

225

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di-viders

Rear cross traffic alert (RTA)

Fig. 224 Schematic representation of the rearcross traffic alert: monitored zone around thevehicle being parked.

The rear cross traffic alert uses the radar sen-sors on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 221 to moni-tor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle asit backs out of a perpendicular parking spaceor as it is being manoeuvred, for example invery low visibility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else onthe road is approaching the rear of the vehi-cle ››› Fig. 224, an acoustic alarm will sound.

● In vehicles without ParkPilot a “gong” willsound and a message will be displayed onthe instrument panel.

● If the vehicle is equipped ParkPilot, theParkPilot acoustic alarm will sound continu-ously.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

If the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approaching therear of the vehicle and the driver does notstep on the brake, the system will engage thebrakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The system will brake automaticallyif the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap-proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it hasdetected that the vehicle has stopped, thesystem will keep the vehicle stopped for ap-prox. 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping forcefully on the accelerator pedalor the brake pedal in order to regain controlof the vehicle.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into therear cross traffic alert cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Do notlet the extra convenience afforded by the rearcross traffic alert tempt you into taking anyrisks. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● The system should never be used in limitedvisibility conditions or complicated traffic,e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossingmultiple lanes.

● Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle'ssurroundings, since the system is not guaran-teed to detect things such as bicycles or pe-destrians in all situations.

● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)with rear cross traffic alert (RTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spotdetector (BSD) with rear cross traffic alert(RTA)

The blind spot detector with rear cross trafficalert can be activated or deactivated in the“Assistants” menu of the SEAT informationsystem, or depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, by using the driver assistance key loca-ted on the headlight lever.

226


Open the Assistants menu.

● BSD

● Parking Assist.

If the verification box on the control panel ischecked , the functionality will be automat-ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-erate, the indications in the external mirrorswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

The control lamp of the instrument panel in-dicates the system's status.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automaticallydeactivated, it will only be possible to restartthe system after turning the vehicle off andrestarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de-tector (BSD)

The radar sensors of the blind spot detectorwith rear cross traffic alert will be automati-cally deactivated when, among other rea-sons, one of the sensors is detected to bepermanently covered. This may be the case if,for example, there is a layer of snow or ice infront of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display

Trailer mode

The Blind spot detector and the rear crosstraffic alert will be automatically deactivatedand it will be impossible to activate them ifthe tow hitch is electrically connected to atrailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the blind spot detec-tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti-vated. Once the trailer has been unhitchedfrom the vehicle, if you want to use the blindspot detector and the rear cross traffic alert,you will have to reactivate them in the corre-sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,then the blind spot detector and the rearcross traffic alert will have to be deactivatedmanually when driving with a trailer.

Traffic signal detection(Sign Assist)*

Introduction

Sign Assist can help the driver with informa-tion on speed limits or if overtaking is pro-hibited at that moment. The traffic signs andadditional information detected by the sys-tem is represented in the dash panel display

and in the visual presentation of the naviga-tion system map.

Applicable countries:

Sign Assist is accepted in the following coun-tries:

Andorra, Belgium, Denmark, Germany, Fin-land, France, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein,Luxembourg, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway,Austria, Poland, Portugal, San Marino, Swe-den, Switzerland, Spain, Czech Republic, Uni-ted Kingdom, Vatican City.

WARNING

The traffic signs and instructions shown bySign Assist may differ from the current trafficsituation.

● The signs and highway code rules alwaystake precedence over the instructions anddisplay of Sign Assist.


● The system cannot always detect or cor-rectly show all the traffic signs.

WARNING

The traffic sign detection is not a replacementfor driver awareness.

● Adverse conditions of visibility, darkness,snow, rain and fog can cause the system notto show the traffic signs or to show them er-roneously. »

227

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

CAUTION

● If old mapping data is used in the naviga-tion system, this may cause the traffic signsto be shown incorrectly.

● In the route points mode (navigation byroute points) of the navigation system, SignAssist is only partly available.

Indication on display1)

Fig. 225 Instrument panel display: Examplesof speed limits or overtaking prohibitions de-tected together with the corresponding addi-tional signs

Display text of Sign Assist on the instrumentpanel

Error: Sign As-sist

System fault.Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Sign Assist:Clean the wind-screen!

The windscreen is dirty in thearea of the camera.Clean the windscreen.

Sign Assist: onlypartly availableat the moment.

No data is being transmittedfrom the navigator.Connect the navigator and in-sert the navigation data me-dium.ALTERNATIVELY: Sign Assist isnot supported in the countryin which you are driving atthis time.

WARNING




1) Depending on the version, the display may be incolour or black and white.

228


CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result in ve-hicle faults.

Operation mode

Sign Assist does not work in all countries.This must be taken into account when travel-ling abroad.

Display of traffic signs

Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions to-gether with the corresponding additionalsigns are shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 225. Depending on the naviga-tion system installed in the vehicle, trafficsigns will be shown as above and also in thenavigation system's map display.

When Sign Assist is connected, the vehiclerecords the traffic signs with a camera in thebase of the interior rear vision mirror. Afterchecking and evaluating the informationfrom the camera, the navigation system andthe current vehicle data, up to three validtraffic signs are displayed in conjunction withthe corresponding additional signs. The traf-fic sign that is currently valid for the driver isshown first, in the left side of the screen. Atraffic sign of only limited validity,e.g. 90 km/h (56 mph) is shown second, to-gether with the additional sign “if the road is

wet”. If the vehicle's rain sensor detects rainduring travel, the traffic sign valid at this mo-ment will move to the first position along theadditional sign “if the road is wet”.

The permanent display on the instrumentpanel screen is shown as you pass the realtraffic signs. The signs for entering and leav-ing towns activate the display of the usualspeed limits for that country on roads inpopulated areas and national highways, evenif the speed is not limited by an actual trafficsign.

The end of a prohibition or limitation is notdisplayed. If you exceed the speed limitsshown, a warning will not appear. The systemdoes not detect areas with little traffic. Thecurrent legal provisions apply.

Connection and disconnection

● Connect or disconnect the assist system inthe Settings menu in the SEAT informationsystem ››› page 26.

● OR: press the button for the driver assistsystems on the main beam lever.

Trailer

Connect or disconnect the secondary displayfor speed limits and overtaking bans that ap-ply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Settingsmenu in the SEAT information system››› page 26.

Tiredness detection (recom-mendation to take a break)

Introduction

WARNING

Do not let the extra convenience afforded bythe tiredness detection function tempt youinto taking any risks when driving. Whenmaking long trips, conveniently long breaksmust be taken.

● The driver is responsible for determiningtheir capacity to drive.

● Never drive when tired.

● The system does not always detect thetiredness of the driver. Please read the infor-mation provided in the section ››› page 230,Limited operation.

● In some situations the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended manoeuvre as asign of tiredness of the driver.

● In the event of the an episode called “mi-crosleep” at the wheel, a strong warning isnot in place!

● Observe the indications on the display ofthe instrument panel and act in accordancewith them. »

229

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● The tiredness detection function has onlybeen designed for driving on motorways andwide roads.

● If there is a fault in the system, refer to aSpecialised workshop to have the system in-spected.

Function and operation

Fig. 226 On the instrument panel display:tiredness detection symbol

The tiredness detection function registers thebehaviour of the driver at the wheel at thebeginning of a journey and, using this, evalu-ates the tiredness. This is continually com-pared with the current behaviour at thewheel. If the system detects that the driver istired, an audible warning using a “gong” isgiven and a symbol and complementary mes-sage on the instrument panel display are

shown ››› Fig. 226. The on-screen messageon the dash panel is displayed for 5 secondsand, where required, repeated again. Thesystem stores the last message displayed.

The message that appears on the instrumentpanel display can be switched off by pressingthe OK button on the multifunction steeringwheel or on the window wiper lever››› page 28. Using the multifunction dis-play ››› page 28 the message on the in-strument panel display can be shown.

Conditions of operation

Behaviour at the wheel is only evaluated atspeeds of above 65 km/h (40 mph).

Switching on and off

The system can be switched on or off in theAssistants menu. If an assistance systemis switched on, this is indicated with a“mark”.

Limited operation

The tiredness detection function is subject tocertain limitations. Therefore it is possiblethat in some driving situations behaviour atthe wheel cannot be correctly interpreted.E.g. in the following situations:

● at speeds lower than 65 km/h (40 mph),

● in sections with corners,

● on roads in poor condition,

● in the event of adverse weather conditions,

● when a sporty driving style is employed,

● in the event of a major distraction for thedriver,

The tiredness detection function switches offwhen the ignition is switched off or when thedriver unbuckles their seat belt and opensthe door. If driving for a long time under 65km/h (40 mph), the system ceases to assesstiredness automatically. If driving speed isthen increased, the behaviour at the wheelwill again be evaluated.

Dynamic Chassis control (DCC)*

Operation and control

Fig. 227 In the centre console: button for set-ting the dynamic chassis control.

230


DCC continuously adapts the suspension tothe condition of the road and current drivingconditions, according to the pre-set pro-gramme.

Steering is also adapted in the “Sport” pro-gramme.

Programme Driving recommendations

“COMFORT” CAdjust it to the most comfortable set-ting, for example, driving on surfacesin poor condition, or making longtrips.

“NORMAL”Balanced setting, suitable, for exam-ple, for day-to-day use.

“SPORT” S Sport setting for sporty style driving

Select a program


● Press the C S button repeatedly until thedesired programme is displayed.

The “NORMAL” programme is active whenneither the C nor S buttons are lit up.

WARNING

Switching the dynamic chassis control sys-tem on while the vehicle is in motion coulddivert your attention from the traffic andcause accidents.

WARNING

Adjusting the suspension can change drivingproperties. Dynamic chassis control mustnever lead to any kinds of risk.

● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-fic conditions.

Note

If the dynamic chassis control does not oper-ate as described in this chapter, go to an au-thorised workshop and request it be checked.

Note

In case of a fault in the dynamic chassis con-trol, the buttons C and S will so indicate. Afault could the affect driving comfort. Havethe system checked by a specialised work-shop.

Tyre monitoring systems

Introduction

The tyre monitor indicator monitors the tyrepressure of each wheel during driving usingthe ABS sensors. The ABS sensors monitorthe tyre tread perimeter and vibrations ofeach tyre. The tyre monitor indicator warnsthe driver if it detects a considerable drop intyre pressure of one or several tyres while

driving. Loss of tyre pressure will be indica-ted by the indicator as well as an audiblewarning and sometimes a text message onthe dash panel display. When you open thedriver door, you will find a label indicatingthe tyre pressure recommended by the manu-facturer for the maximum vehicle load foreach tyre approved for the vehicle in ques-tion. By pressing the adjustment button onthe tyre monitoring indicator, you maychange the reference pressure for the tyresso that the tyre pressure coincides with ac-tual pressure ››› page 233.

Suitable use of the adjustment button››› page 233.

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyresmay lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, totread separation or even to a blow-out.

● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensurethey are maintained at the pressures indica-ted. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyrescould overheat, resulting in tread detachmentor even burst tyres.

● Tyre pressure should be that indicated onthe label when the tyres are cold at all times››› page 288.

● Regularly check the cold inflation pressureof the tyres. If necessary, change the tyrepressure of the vehicle tyres while they arecold. »

231

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Regularly check your tyres for damage andwear.

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the tyre monitoring indicatorbutton could result in the indicator giving er-roneous messages or prevented from indicat-ing the danger caused by a defective tyre››› page 233.

CAUTION

● The tyre valves may be damaged if the capis not in place. Check that the caps are identi-cal to the standard caps and have been cor-rectly tightened. Do not use metal caps››› page 233.

● Do not damage the valves when changingthe tyres ››› page 233.


Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuelconsumption and tyre wear.

Note

● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys-tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensurethat the tyre pressure is correct and that thetyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts,

tears and impacts/dents. Remove objectsfrom the tyres only when the tyres have notbeen pierced by these.

● The tyre monitoring system is set to thetyre pressure recommended by the manufac-turer and indicated on the label ››› Fig. 251.

Elements of the tyre monitoring indi-cator

Tyre monitoring indicator with button.

See ››› page 233.

Control lamp on the instrument panel.

SET button on the centre console.

Monitoring the tread of all tyres using ABS sensors(indirect measurement).

Adjustable medium and full-load tyre pressures.

Button to update the system when the tyre pressure ischanged.

Control lamp

Blinks or lights up

The tyre pres-sure of a wheelhas droppedconsiderably inrelation to thepressure set bythe driver››› page 233.

Stop the vehicle! Reduce yourspeed immediately! Stop the vehiclesafely as soon as possible. Avoidsudden manoeuvres and braking!Check all tyres and pressures. Re-place any damaged tyres.

System malfunc-tion.

Consult a specialised workshop ifthe tyre pressure is correct and thelamp remains lit after switching theignition off and back on again. Havethe system checked there.


WARNING


WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or at a pressure that is too low then atyre may be damaged resulting in a loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and a serious or fatalaccident.

232


● If the warning lamp lights up, stop im-mediately and check the tyres.

● If the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this willincrease tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi-cle stability and increasing braking distan-ces.

● If tyres are inflated at different pressures ora tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam-aged and burst resulting in a loss of controlof the vehicle.

● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflatedto the right pressure. The recommended tyrepressure is indicated on the label ››› Fig. 251.

● The tyre monitoring system can only oper-ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated tothe correct pressure when cold.

● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressurecan damage them and result in an accident.Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyrescorrespond to the vehicle load.

● Before starting a journey, always inflatetyres to the correct pressure.

● If tyre pressure is too low then the tyre issubject to greater forces and it may be heatedto such an extent that the tread can ruptureand the tyre will burst.

● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed,the tyres can overheat and burst resulting ina loss of vehicle control.

● Tyre pressures which are too high or toolow reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-ing vehicle performance.

● If a tyre has not been “punctured” and doesnot have to be changed immediately, drive tothe nearest specialised workshop at a moder-ate speed and have the tyre checked and in-flated to the correct pressure.

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 228 Detailed view of the centre console:button for the tyre pressure monitoring indi-cator

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheelrevolutions and, with this information, thetread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. Ifthe tread of a wheel is changed, the tyremonitoring indicator will indicate as such onthe instrument panel. The wheel treadchanges when:

● Tyre pressure is insufficient

● Tyre structure is damaged

● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload

● If the wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. when towing a trailer).

● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains

● The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre monitoring indicator or it may not in-dicate anything under certain circumstances(e.g. sports driving, snow-covered or un-paved roads).

Adaptation of the tyre monitoring indicator

On adjusting tyre pressure or changing oneor more wheels, the ››› Fig. 228 button on thetyre monitoring indicator must be kept press-ed down, with the ignition on, until an audi-ble warning is heard. Do the same, for exam-ple, when the front and rear wheels are swap-ped ››› Fig. 250.

If the wheels are subjected to an excessiveload (towing a trailer, heavy load), the tyrepressure must be increased to the maximumrecommended pressure ››› page 284. Pressthe tyre monitoring indicator button to con-firm the new pressure value.

Note

An incorrect warning may be given whensnow chains are in use because the chains in-crease the tread of the wheel.

233

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer

Introduction

Always be aware of the legal requirements foreach country to drive with a trailer and to usea tow hitch.

Your car is intended mainly for transportingpassengers however, it can also be used totow a trailer provided that it is fitted with thenecessary equipment. The additional loadhas an effect on the useful life, fuel con-sumption and the vehicle performance and,in some cases, reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force fromthe vehicle and, thus, more concentrationfrom the driver.

For wintertime temperatures, fit winter tyresto the vehicle and the trailer.

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted Drawbar load exer-ted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint ofthe tow hitch must not exceed 100 kg (ap-proximately 220 lbs).

Vehicles with the Start-Stop function

With a SEAT factory fitted or retrofitted towhitch, the Start-Stop function is automatically

deactivated when a trailer is connected. Fortow hitches not installed by SEAT, the Start-Stop function must be deactivated manuallyusing a button located on the dash panel be-fore driving with a trailer and it must remainoff for the entire journey ››› .

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer: this willendanger in their life and is against the law.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch can causeaccidents and injury.

● Only use a tow hitch in perfect conditionand correctly installed.

● Never change or repair a tow hitch.

● To reduce the risk of injury in case of a re-versing collision, injury to pedestrians andcyclists when parking, always keep the balljoint in when a trailer is not being used.

● Never fit a trailer tow hitch “that distrib-utes the load” or “balances the load”. Yourvehicle has not been designed for this type oftow hitch. The tow hitch may fail and thetrailer will separate from the vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with a trailer and transporting heavyor large objects can affect vehicle handlingand even cause an accident.



● Trailers with a high centre of gravity canoverturn more easily than those with a lowcentre of gravity.

● Avoid brusque manoeuvres and suddenbraking.

● Always take the following precautions seri-ously.

● Reduce your speed immediately if you ob-serve the trailer rocking from side to side.

● Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph)when towing a trailer (or 100 km/h [62 mph]in exceptional circumstances). This also ap-plies in countries where higher speeds arepermitted. Always take the speed limits forvehicles with and without trailers in eachcountry into account.

● Never try to stop the “snaking” by increas-ing speed.

WARNING

When driving with a trailer and using a towhitch that was not installed by SEAT, theStart-Stop function must be manually deacti-vated. Otherwise, this could cause a brakinganomaly that could result in an accident withserious consequences.

● Always manually deactivate the Start-Stopfunction when a trailer is being used on a towhitch that has not been installed by SEAT.

234


Note

● Always turn off the anti-theft alarm systembefore connecting or disconnecting a trailer››› page 117. Otherwise, the tilt sensor mayerroneously activate the alarm.

● Never use a trailer with a new engine (forthe first 1,000 km or 600 miles) ››› page 244.

● At SEAT, we recommend folding in the towhitch ball when a trailer is not being used. Incase of a rear collision, the damage caused tothe vehicle with the extended tow hitch ballcould be more extensive.

● In some models, a tow hitch is necessaryfor towing vehicles. For this reason, youshould store the tow hitch in the vehicle at alltimes.

Technical requirements

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow-ing bracket it will already have the necessarytechnical modifications and meet the statuto-ry requirements for towing a trailer.

Only use an approved tow hitch for the grosstrailer weight rating. The tow hitch must besuitable for both the vehicle and trailer andmust be securely fitted to the vehicle chassis.Only use a tow hitch with a removable balljoint. Always check and take into account thetow hitch manufacturer's instructions. Neverfit a trailer tow hitch “that distributes theload” or “balances the load”.

Bumper mounted tow hitch

Never fit a tow hitch or its attachments to thebumper. A tow hitch should never interferewith the bumper performance. Do not modifythe exhaust system and brake system. Regu-larly check the tow hitch to ensure it is firmlyfitted.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load onthe engine and cooling system. The coolingsystem should always have sufficient coolantand to be able to cope with the vehicle andtrailer.

Electric trailer brake

If the trailer has its own braking system,please note the relevant legal requirements.The trailer braking system should never beconnected to the vehicle braking system.

Trailer cable

Always use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 237.

Trailer rear lights

The rear lights of a trailer must fulfil the cor-responding standards ››› page 237.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle electric system. In case of anydoubt about the electrical connection of the

trailer, ask a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a technical service.

Wing mirrors

When the field of vision behind the trailercannot be seen using the standard wing mir-rors of the towing vehicle, additional wingmirrors are required according to the legal re-quirements of each country. The wing mirrorsmust be fitted before driving and must pro-vide a sufficient field of vision behind.

Trailer electricity consumption

Never exceed the specifications:

Devices Maximum power

Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts

Turn signal (each side) 54 Watts

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Reversing lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNING

If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable,the trailer may separate from the vehiclecausing an accident with serious consequen-ces. »

235

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

CAUTION

● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle electronics maybe damaged.

● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam-aged.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemto the electrical connections of the rear lightsor any other power sources. Only use suitableconnections for providing electric current tothe trailer.

Note

● Towing a trailer places additional demandson the vehicle. At SEAT, we recommend addi-tional services between the normal inspec-tion intervals if the vehicle is used frequentlyfor towing a trailer.

● In some countries, an additional fire extin-guisher is required if the trailer weight ismore than 2500 kg

Electric tow hitch ball*

Fig. 229 Right-hand side of the luggage com-partment: button to electrically release thetow hitch ball

The rotation radius of the tow hitch ballshould be free of people, animals and ob-jects ››› .

The towing bracket is located in the bumper.The electric tow ball is fixed and cannot beremoved.

Releasing and unfolding the tow ball

● Stop the vehicle and apply the electricparking brake.



● Press the knob briefly ››› Fig. 229. The towball is released electronically and folds outautomatically; the button indicator will blink.

● Move the ball joint until it inserts and thebutton control lamp lights.

● Close the rear lid.

● Before hitching the trailer, remove the dustguard from the ball.

● The indicator only lights when the boothatch is open and when a trailer is not hitch-ed.

Restoring the tow ball to its originally posi-tion

● Stop the vehicle and apply the electricparking brake.


● Remove the trailer and disconnect the ca-ble between the vehicle and trailer. If neces-sary, remove the power socket adapter.

● Place the dust guard over the ball.


● Press the knob briefly ››› Fig. 229. The towball is electronically released; the indicatorblinks.

● Push the tow ball into the bumper until itlocks in position and the button indicatorlights.

● Close the rear lid.

236


The control lamp

● When the control lamp flashes, the tow ballis not in its final position, has not engaged oris damaged ››› .

● When the control lamp remains lit and therear lid is open, the tow ball has inserted cor-rectly into the folded or deployed position.

● When the rear lid is closed, the indicator isturned off.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch can causeaccidents and injury.

● Ensure that no person, animal or objectgets in the way of the tow ball.

● Never push the button when there is a towhitched or when any kind of carrier or acces-sory is fitted to the tow hitch ball.

● While the ball is moving, do not interferewith any tool.

● Do not drive with a trailer if the controllamp does not light.

● If there is a fault in the electric system orthe trailer tow hitch, visit a specialised work-shop to have it checked.

● If the diameter of the tow hitch is less than49 mm, never use this for a trailer.

CAUTION

● If anything is attached to the tow hitch ball,do not, under any circumstances press thebutton.

● Never direct a high-pressure or steamcleaning system directly at the tow hitch ballor trailer power socket. This could causedamage to seals or remove lubricatinggrease.

Note

In extremely low temperatures, it is possiblethat the tow hitch is not released. In thiscase, place the vehicle in a warmer location(e.g. a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the mobiletow hitch ball

The maximum load permitted for a bicyclecarrier on the tow hitch ball is 75 kg, with amaximum distance of 30 cm from the sup-port. The distance between supports is thedistance between the bicycle carrier centre ofgravity (with the bicycles) and the centre ofpoint of the tow hitch ball.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicy-cle carrier installed can cause accidents andinjury.

● Never exceed the load and distances be-tween supports indicated.

● Never fit the bicycle carrier to the tow hitchball neck, underneath the tow hitch giventhat the bicycle carrier may be incorrectly fit-ted due to the shape of the tow hitch and themodel of bicycle carrier.

● Always read and take the manufacturer as-sembly instructions into account.

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum load and distancebetween supports indicated can cause con-siderable damage to the vehicle.

● Never exceed the specifications.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Fig. 230 Schematic diagram: assignment ofthe pins of the trailer's electrical socket. »

237

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 230:

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth, pins 1 to 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Unassigned

12 Unassigned

13 Earth, pins 9 to 13

Electrical socket for trailer

The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. With the enginerunning, electrical devices on the trailer re-ceive power from the electrical connection(pin 9 and pin 10 on the trailer power plug).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected electrically, the electrical equip-

ment on the trailer will receive voltagethrough this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin9 has a permanent live. This powers, for ex-ample, the trailer's interior lighting. Electricaldevices such as a fridge in a caravan only re-ceive electrical power if the engine is running(through pin 10).

The earth wires, pin 3 and pin 13, should notbe connected to each other to avoid over-loading the electrical system.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Trailer cable

Always secure the trailer cable to the towingvehicle correctly. Leave a little bit of slack inthe cable for turning. However, ensure thatthe cable does not rub off the ground whiledriving.

Trailer rear lights

Check the trailer rear lights to ensure theywork correctly and remain legal. Ensure thatthe trailer does not use more than the maxi-mum power ››› page 235.

Trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm:

● When a vehicle comes from the factory fit-ted with an anti-theft alarm and tow hitch.

● When the trailer is connected to the vehicleusing the socket.

● When the vehicle and trailer electrical sys-tems work correctly and are not damaged.

● When the vehicle is locked using the vehi-cle key and the anti-theft alarm is turned on.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered when the electrical connection be-tween the vehicle and the trailer is removed.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm systembefore connecting or disconnecting a trailer.Otherwise, the tilt sensor may erroneouslyactivate the alarm.

Trailer with rear LED lights

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rearLED lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot trigger if the electrical connection withthe trailer is cut if it has rear light with light-emitting diodes.

WARNING

Erroneous or unsuitable connection of elec-tric cables may supply energy to the trailercausing an anomaly in the vehicle electronicsthat could result in an accident with seriousconsequences.

● All work on the electrical system must becarried out only by a specialised workshop.

238


● Never connect the trailer's electric systemto the electrical connections of the rear lightsor any other power sources.

CAUTION

Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehi-cle when parked; places on its support wheelor its supports. For example, when changingthe load or a puncture, the vehicle will bepushed up or down. The force acting on thetow hitch and the trailer could damage thevehicle or the trailer.

Note

● In the event of a fault in the vehicle or trail-er electrical system or in the event of prob-lems with the anti-theft alarm system, havethe system checked by a specialised work-shop.

● If the trailer accessories use energy fromthe power socket when the engine is stop-ped, the battery will be discharged.

● For technical reasons, trailers fitted withrear LED lights cannot be connected to theanti-theft alarm system.

● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer is auto-matically cut.

● With the engine running, the electricalequipment on the trailer will be supplied withpower.

Loading the trailer

Trailer weight / drawbar load

The trailer weight is the load that the vehiclecan pull ››› . The drawbar load is the verticalweight of the tow hitch on the tow hitch ball››› page 242.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbarload weights given on the data plate of thetow hitch are for values of this model only.The correct figures for your specific vehicle,which may be lower than these figures for thetow hitch, are given in the vehicle documen-tation. The instructions in the official vehicledocuments take precedence.

For the sake of road safety, SEAT recom-mends using the maximum allowed drawbarload. The handling of the combined vehicleand trailer will be poor if the drawbar load istoo low.

The drawbar load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight

This figure refers to the combined weight ofthe loaded vehicle and loaded trailer.

Loading the trailer

The combined vehicle and trailer must bebalanced. Use the maximum drawbar load

authorised and do not overload the front orthe rear of the trailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.

● Correctly secure the trailer load.

Tyre pressure

Inflate the trailer tyres according to the man-ufacturer's instructions.

Inflate the towing vehicles tyres to the maxi-mum ››› page 284.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised axleload, drawbar load or the gross combinationweight of the towing vehicle and trailer couldcause a serious accident with severe conse-quences.

● Never exceed the specifications.

● With the actual load on the front and rearaxles, the maximum axle load should neverbe exceeded. The weight on the front and rearshould never exceed the gross vehicleweight.

WARNING

If the load moves, the stability and safety ofthe vehicle and trailer combination will be se-riously affected and this could result in a seri-ous accident. »

239

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Always correctly load the trailer.


Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

When towing a trailer, the front of the vehiclemay rise and so the dipped beam headlightsmay blind other drivers. Use the headlightrange control to lower the cone of light. If youdo not have headlight range control, havethe headlights adjusted by a specialisedworkshop. Vehicles with high-intensity dis-charge lamps adapt automatically and do notrequire adjustment.

Things to note when towing a trailer or cara-van

● If the trailer has an overrun brake, applythe brakes gently at first and then, firmly.This will prevent the jerking that can becaused by the trailer wheels locking.

● As of the combined vehicle and trailermass, braking distances will be greater.

● Select a low gear before driving down asteep hill to use the engine braking effect toslow down the vehicle. Otherwise, the brak-ing system could overheat and fail.

● The vehicle centre of gravity and handlingchange because of the trailer load and be-

cause of the increased combined mass of thevehicle and trailer.

● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail-er loaded then the load distribution is incor-rect. If you must travel in these conditions,drive carefully and reduce your speed accord-ingly.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the hill and the gross com-bined weight, it is possible that the com-bined vehicle and trailer move backwardsslightly when starting.

For a hill start with a trailer, proceed as fol-lows:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.

● Press the button once to turn off theelectric parking brake ››› page 187.

● Press and hold the button to hold thevehicle and trailer combination using theparking brake.

● With a manual gearbox: press the clutchpedal to the floor.

● Engage first gear or the gear range D››› page 192, Gearbox.

● Release the brake pedal.

● Move off slowly. To do this, gently releasethe clutch pedal (for manual gearbox).

● Release the button only when the en-gine provides sufficient power to move thevehicle and trailer combination.

WARNING

Jerking the trailer in an unsuitable mannercould cause loss of vehicle control with thesubsequent serious consequences.

● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or a large objects will change the vehi-cle handling and braking distances.

● Anticipate traffic and be extremely cau-tious. Brake early.

● Adjust your speed and driving style to visi-bility, road, traffic and weather conditions.Reduce your speed, especially on steep hills.

● Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid brus-que manoeuvres and sudden braking.

● Always take the following precautions seri-ously. Reduce your speed immediately if youobserve the trailer rocking from side to side.

● Never try to stop the “snaking” by increas-ing speed.

● Always take the speed limits for vehicleswith and without trailers into account.

240


Stabilising the vehicle and trailercombination

Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combi-nation is an extension of the electronic sta-bility control (ESC) and helps, with the assis-tance of the trajectory control, to reduce trail-er “snaking”.

Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combi-nation is active when the ESC indicator onthe dash panel remains lit for about two sec-onds more than the ABS indicator.

Requirements for stabilising the vehi-cle/trailer combination

● An original tow hitch is fitted by the manu-facturer or a compatible model is retrofitted.

● The ESC is switched on. The warning lampon the dash panel is not lit.

● The trailer is connected to the vehicle usingthe power socket.

● It travels faster than 60 km/h (37 mph).

● The maximum drawbar load is used.

● The trailer must have a fixed drawbar.

● Trailers with brakes must be equipped witha mechanical inertia brake.

WARNING

Do not let the extra safety afforded by thestabilisation system tempt you into takingany risks when driving.


● If the road surface is slippery, take carewhen accelerating.

● When a system is operating, lift your footoff the accelerator.

WARNING

It is possible that the combination stabilisa-tion system does not correctly recognised alldriving situations.

● It is possible that the stabilisation systemdoes not detect snaking of a light trailer andthus does not intervene.

● When driving on slippery ground, the trail-er could jack-knife despite the stabilisationsystem.

● Trailers with a high centre of gravity mayeven tip over before they start to rock side-ways.

● If a trailer is not used and the trailer powersocket is connected (e.g. installation of a bi-cycle carrier with lights), repeated automaticbraking may occur in extreme driving condi-tions.

Retrofitting a tow hitch

Fig. 231 Measurements and attachments toretrofit a tow hitch

SEAT recommends visiting a specialisedworkshop to retrofit a tow hitch. For example, »

241

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

it may be necessary to adjust the cooling sys-tem or to include thermal plates. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

In any case, the separation distances mustbe observed when fitting a tow hitch. The dis-tance between the centre of the tow hitch balland the road surface ››› Fig. 231 D must nev-er be lower than that indicated. This also ap-plies when the vehicle is fully laden, includ-ing maximum drawbar load.

Separation distances ››› Fig. 231:

Attachment points.

1,040 mm (41 inches)

74 mm (3 inches)

364 mm (14 inches)

247 mm (10 inches)

596 mm (23 inches)



WARNING

Erroneous or unsuitable connection of elec-tric cables may cause anomalies in the vehi-cle electronics that could result in an acci-dent with serious consequences.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemto the electrical connections of the rear lightsor any other unsuitable power sources. Onlyuse suitable connectors to connect a trailer.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

● Visit a specialised workshop if you wish toretrofit a tow hitch to the vehicle.

WARNING

If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable,the trailer may separate from the vehiclewhile driving. This could result in a seriousaccident.

Note

Use only tow hitches approved by SEAT forthe vehicle.

Maximum permitted trailer weights

The instructions in the official vehicle docu-ments take precedence. All the technical dataprovided in this documentation is applicableto the basic model. The vehicle data label inthe Maintenance Programme or the vehicledocumentation shows which engine is instal-led in your vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models and for special vehicles.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indica-ted could cause a serious accident.

● Never exceed the indicated trailer weight.

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indica-ted could cause damage to the vehicle.

● Never exceed the indicated trailer weight.

Gross combined vehicle weight rating

The instructions in the official vehicle docu-ments take precedence. All the technical dataprovided in this documentation is applicableto the basic model. The vehicle data label inthe Maintenance Programme or the vehicledocumentation shows which engine is instal-led in your vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models and for special vehicles.

The maximum combined weights listed areonly applicable for altitudes up to 1000 mabove sea level. The weight of the car andtrailer must be reduced by about 10% for ev-ery further 1000 m (or part thereof).

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum weight indicatedcould cause a serious accident.

● Never exceed the gross combined weightrating.

242


CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum gross combinedweight rating indicated could cause damageto the vehicle.

● Never exceed the gross combined weightrating.

243

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Advice

Care and maintenance

Accessories, replacement ofparts and modifications

Introduction

WARNING

The use of spare parts and accessories, or in-correctly performed modifications or repairsmay result in damage to the vehicle, acci-dents and serious injury.

● SEAT strongly recommends you to only useSEAT approved accessories and SEAT® origi-nal spare parts. These parts and accessorieshave been specially tested by SEAT for suita-bility, reliability and safety.

● Have any repairs or modifications carriedout at a specialised workshop. These work-shops have the necessary tools, diagnosticsequipment, repair information and qualifiedpersonnel.

● Only mount parts with the same specifica-tions as the parts fitted at factory.

● Never mount, fasten or fit objects such asdrink holders or telephone cradles over thecovers of the airbag modules or within theirradius of action.

● Only use wheels and tyre combinationswhich have been approved by SEAT for yourvehicle type.

Accessories and spare parts

SEAT recommends you consult an OfficialService before purchasing accessories andspare parts or consumables. For example,when fitting accessories at a later date, orwhen replacing a component. A technicalservice centre will advise you as to the legalrequirements and manufacturer's recommen-dations regarding accessories, spare partsand other components.

SEAT recommend you use only approvedSEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spareparts®. These parts and accessories havebeen specially tested by SEAT for suitability,reliability and safety. In addition the techni-cal service centre will guarantee that the as-sembly is carried out professionally.

Although we continually monitor the market,SEAT cannot guarantee that products not ap-proved by SEAT are reliable, safe and suita-ble for the vehicle. Therefore, SEAT cannot ac-cept liability, even in those cases authorisedby an officially recognised technical inspec-tion office or other official body.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a directeffect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv-

en must be approved by SEAT for use in yourvehicle and bear the e mark (the EuropeanUnion's authorisation symbol). This includescruise control systems or electronically con-trolled suspension.

If any additional electrical devices are fittedwhich do not serve to control the vehicle it-self, these must bear the mark (EuropeanUnion manufacturer conformity declaration).This includes refrigerator boxes, laptops orventilator fans.

WARNING

Unprofessional repairs or modifications tothe vehicle may affect the performance of theairbags, and may cause operating faults or fa-tal accidents.

● Never mount, fasten or fit objects such asdrink holders or telephone cradles over thecovers of the airbag modules or within theirradius of action.

● Objects placed over the airbag covers, orwithin their radius of action, could lead to se-rious injury or loss of life if the airbags aretriggered.

Service fluids and components

All vehicle fluids and consumables, such asnotched belts, tyres, coolant fluids, engineoils, spark plugs and batteries are continual-ly being developed. Therefore all fluids and

244


consumables should be changed at a speci-alised workshop. Technical services are per-manently informed of any modifications.

WARNING

The incorrect use or handling of fluids or con-sumables may result in accident, serious in-jury, burns or intoxication.

● Therefore, fluids must always be storedclosed in their original container.

● Never store fluids in empty food containersor bottles as other people may accidentallydrink the fluid.

● Keep all fluids and consumables out ofreach of children.

● Read and observe the information andwarnings given on the fluid containers.

● Only work in the open air or in well-ventila-ted zones, when using products which giveoff harmful vapours.

● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, ace-tone or any other volatile liquid in the main-tenance of the vehicle. These are toxic andhighly flammable. They could lead to fire orexplosions!

CAUTION

● Only use appropriate fluids. Do not confusefluids as this can cause serious malfunctionsor engine damage.

● Accessories and other components moun-ted in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling

effect of the coolant. If the engine is runningunder great strain in high outside tempera-tures, it could overheat.


Leaking fluids could pollute the environment.Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containersand dispose of them in accordance with legis-lation and with respect for the environment.

Technical repairs and replacements

When performing repairs and technical mod-ifications, SEAT's directives must be ob-served! ›››

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents or software in the vehicle maycause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec-tronic components are linked together in net-works, other indirect systems may be affec-ted by the faults. This may significantly affectthe vehicle's performance, increase compo-nent wear and could mean that the vehicleregistration documents are no longer valid.

Your technical service centre cannot be heldliable for any damage caused by technicalmodifications or repairs performed incorrect-ly.

The technical service centre does not acceptliability for damage resulting from technicalmodifications or repairs performed incorrect-

ly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in thesecases.

SEAT recommends you have any technicalmodifications or repairs performed at a tech-nical service centre and that you use genuineSEAT spare parts®.

Vehicles with special accessories and equip-ment

The manufacturers of additional equipmentguarantee that the equipment complies withapplicable laws and regulations with respectto the environment, in particular Directives2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first direc-tive governs the disposal of end-of-life vehi-cles while the second refers to the restric-tions on the marketing and use of certaindangerous substances and preparations.

The vehicle owner should keep the documen-tation for the additional equipment safelyand hand it over to the scrap yard at the endof the vehicle's service life. This ensures thatany additional equipment mounted in end-of-life vehicles is correctly disposed of with re-spect for the environment.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-formed correctly may result in damage or er-rors in the vehicle operation, affecting the ef-fectiveness of the driver assist systems. Thiscould result in serious accident. »

245

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● All repairs and modifications to the vehicleshould only be performed by a specialisedworkshop.

Repairs and malfunctions in the air-bag system

When performing repairs and technical mod-ifications, SEAT's directives must be ob-served! ›››

Modifications and repairs to the front bump-er, doors, front seats, and repairs to the roofor chassis should only be carried out in aspecialised workshop. These componentsmay contain parts or sensors belonging tothe airbag system.

If work is carried out on the airbag system orparts have to be removed and fitted on thesystem when performing other repair work,parts of the airbag system may be damaged.The consequence may be that, in the event ofan accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly ordoes not inflate at all.

So that the effectiveness of the airbag is notreduced and that removed parts do not causeany injuries or environmental pollution, regu-lations must be observed. These require-ments are known to specialised workshops.

Modifications to the vehicle suspension mayaffect the operation of the airbag system inthe event of collision. For example, if wheel

and tyre combinations not approved by SEATare used, or if the vehicle height is lowered,the suspension is stiffened or the suspensionsprings, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., aremodified, the results received by the airbagsensors and sent to the control unit may notbe accurate. For example, some modifica-tions to the suspension could increase theforce measured by the sensors and result inthe triggering of the airbag systems in colli-sions. Under normal conditions, the meas-ured values would be lower and the airbagwould not have been triggered. Other modifi-cations may reduce the forces measured bythe sensors and prevent the airbags from be-ing triggered when they should.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-formed correctly may result in damage or er-rors in the vehicle operation, affecting the ef-fectiveness of the airbag systems. This couldresult in serious or fatal accidents.

● All repairs and modifications to the vehicleshould only be performed by a specialisedworkshop.

● Airbag modules must never be repaired: ifdamaged, they must be replaced.

● Never fit recycled or reused airbag compo-nents in your vehicle.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle suspension, in-cluding the use of unauthorised wheel andtyre combinations, may affect the perform-ance of the airbags and increase the risk ofserious or fatal injury in the event of acci-dent.

● Never fit suspension components which arenot identical to the original parts in the vehi-cle.

● Never use wheel and tyre combinations notapproved by SEAT.

Retrofitting of mobile phones

An exterior aerial is required for the use oftwo-way radios in the vehicle.

The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic ap-pliances in the vehicle is subject to their ap-proval for use in your vehicle. Under certaincircumstances, this could mean that your ve-hicle registration documents are no longervalid.

SEAT has approved your vehicle for use withtwo-way radios providing the following condi-tions are observed:

● The exterior aerial must be mounted pro-fessionally.

● The maximum transmitting power is 10watts.

246


The optimal reach of the equipment is onlyachieved with an external aerial.

Check first with a specialised workshop thatunderstands the technical possibilities of in-stallation if you wish to use a two-way radiowith a transmitting power of over 10 watts.SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech-nical service.

All legal requirements, together with the in-structions for the use of two-way radios mustbe observed.

WARNING

If the two-way radio is not securely fastenedin position, it could be sent flying around thevehicle in the event of sharp braking, suddenmanoeuvres or accident, causing injury.

● While driving, two-way radios must be se-curely fastened in position, outside the radi-us of action of the airbags, or safely stowedaway.

WARNING

When using a two-way radio without a con-nection to an exterior aerial, the maximumpermitted levels of electromagnetic radiationmay be exceeded. This is also the case if theaerial has not been correctly installed.

● You should only use a two-way radio insidethe vehicle if it has first been correctly con-nected to an exterior aerial.

Information stored by the controlunits

Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser-ies of electronic control units responsible forthe engine and gearbox management. In ad-dition, the control units supervise the per-formance of the exhaust gas system and theairbag systems.

Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven,these electronic control units are continuous-ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event offaults or deviations from the theoretical val-ues, only this data is stored. Normally, thewarning lamps on the instrument panel lightup in the event of faults.

This data can only be read and analysed us-ing special equipment.

The storing of the data allows specialisedworkshops to detect and repair faults. Storeddata may include:

● Data relating to the engine or the gearbox

● Speed

● Direction of travel

● Braking force

● Detection of seat belt

The vehicle control units never record conver-sations held by passengers in the vehicle.

In vehicles equipped with an emergency callfunction via the mobile phone or other appli-

ances connected in the vehicle, it is possibleto send the vehicle position. If the controlunit records an accident with airbag activa-tion, the system may automatically send asignal. This will depend on the network oper-ator. Normally, transmission is only possiblein areas with good coverage.

Event Data Recorder

The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re-corder.

An event data recorder temporarily stores thevehicle information. Therefore, in the event ofan accident, it is possible to obtain detailedinformation about how the accident occur-red. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys-tems, data relating to speed of impact, seatbelt status, seat positions and airbag activa-tion times may be stored. The volume of datadepends on the manufacturer.

Event data recorders can only be mountedwith authorisation from the vehicle ownerand, in some countries, they are governed bylocal legislation.

Reprogramming control units

On the whole, all the data required for thecomponent management is stored in the con-trol units. The programming of certain con-venience functions, such as the turn signals,individual door opening and instructions onthe display can be modified using special »

247

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

equipment at the workshop. If this is thecase, the information and descriptions givenin the Instruction Manual will not match theoriginal functions. Therefore, SEAT recom-mends that any modifications be recorded inthe section “Other workshop notes” in theMaintenance Programme.

The technical service centre must have a re-cord of any modification to the programming.

Reading the vehicle fault memory

There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi-cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem-ory. The fault memory documents errors anddeviations from the theoretical values of theelectronic control units.

The diagnostics connector is in the driverside footwell area, next to the lever for open-ing the bonnet, below a cover.

The fault memory should only be read and re-set by a specialised workshop.

Using a mobile telephone in a vehiclewithout connection to an exterior aer-ial

Mobile telephones transmit and receive radiowaves, both when in use and when on stand-by. Scientific studies state that radio wavesexceeding certain values may be harmful tothe human body. International committees

and authorities have established limits anddirectives in order to ensure electromagneticradiation from mobile phones remains withincertain limits that do not endanger health.Nevertheless, there is no conclusive scientif-ic evidence that wireless telephones are to-tally safe.

Therefore, some experts recommend that useof mobile phone be kept to a minimum untilthe results of current research are published.

When a mobile phone not connected to anexterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, theelectromagnetic radiation may be greaterthan if the mobile phone were connected to abuilt-in aerial or to another exterior aerial.

If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-free device, it will comply with the legislationin many countries which only permits the useof mobile phones inside vehicles using ahands-free device.

The hands-free system mounted at the facto-ry has been designed for use with conven-tional mobile phones and phones with Blue-tooth technology. Mobile phones should beplaced on a suitable phone cradle. In addi-tion, the cradle should always be correctly fit-ted into the base plate. This ensures that themobile phone is securely attached to thedash panel, it is always within reach of thedriver and is connected to the vehicle exterioraerial.

If the mobile phone is connected to an aerialincorporated into the vehicle or an exterioraerial connected to the vehicle, it will help re-duce the electromagnetic radiation transmit-ted and the risk to human health. It will alsoimprove the quality of the connection.

If the phone is used inside the vehicle with-out the hands-free system, it will not be se-curely fastened and will not be connected tothe exterior aerial of the vehicle telephone.Nor will the telephone charge if it is not onthe support. In addition, some calls maybreak off and the quality of the connectionwill be affected.

Mobile phones should only be used insidethe vehicle if they are connected to a hands-free system with an exterior aerial.

WARNING

If the mobile phone is not securely fastenedin position, it could be sent flying around thevehicle in the event of sharp braking, suddenmanoeuvres or accident, causing injury.

● While driving, mobile phones must be se-curely fastened in position, outside the radi-us of action of the airbags, or safely stowedaway.

WARNING

When using a mobile phone without a con-nection to an exterior aerial, the maximumpermitted levels of electromagnetic radiation

248


may be exceeded. This is also the case if theaerial has not been correctly installed.

● A minimum of 20 centimetres should bekept between mobile phone aerials and artifi-cial pacemakers, as mobile telephones mayaffect the working of pacemakers.

● Do not keep mobile phones in breast pock-ets directly above pacemakers.

● Switch off the mobile phone immediately ifyou suspect there may be interference.

Support points for raising the vehicle

Fig. 232 Front jacking points for raising vehi-cle with lifting platform or jack

Fig. 233 Rear jacking points for raising vehi-cle with lifting platform or jack

Always use the jacking points indicated inthe figures ››› Fig. 232 and ››› Fig. 233 whenraising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not liftedat these points, it could be seriously dam-aged ››› or lead to serious injury ››› .

The vehicle should not be lifted using liftingplatforms with lift pads containing fluid.

When raising a vehicle using a platform orjack, a series of precautionary measures arerequired. Do not raise the vehicle with a lift-ing platform or jack unless you have receivedtraining in how to do so and know how to doso safely.

Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack››› page 47.

WARNING

The improper use of the lifting platform orthe jack when raising the vehicle may resultin accidents or serious injury.

● Before raising the vehicle, please observethe manufacturer's instructions for the plat-form or jack, and the legal requirements,where applicable.

● There should not be anyone inside the ve-hicle when it is being raised or once it is inthe air.

● Only use the jacking points indicated in thefigures ››› Fig. 232 and ››› Fig. 233 when rais-ing the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted atthe indicated points, it may fall from the plat-form while the engine or gearbox is beingdismounted, for example.

● The jacking points should be centrallyaligned and firmly positioned on the platformsupport plates.

● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised! The vehicle may fall from the platformdue to the engine vibrations.

● If it is necessary to work underneath the ve-hicle while it is raised, you should check thatthe supporting stands have an adequate loadcapacity.

● Never climb onto the lifting platform.

● Always make sure that the weight of the ve-hicle does not exceed the lifting platformload capacity. »

249

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

CAUTION

● Never raise the vehicle at the engine oilsump, the gearbox or the rear or front axles.

● Always use an intermediate rubber supportto prevent damage to the vehicle underbody.Check that the arms of the lifting platform areable to move with obstruction.

● The arms should not come into contact withthe side running boards or other parts of thevehicle.

Caring for and cleaning the ve-hicle exterior

Introduction

Regular maintenance and washing help tomaintain the value of the vehicle. This mayalso be one of the requirements for acknowl-edging warranty claims in the event of body-work corrosion or paint defects.

Products suitable for the care of your vehicleare available at any technical service.

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazard-ous. If car care products are not suitable orare used inappropriately, this could result inaccident, serious injury, burns or intoxica-tion.

● Car care products must always be stored inthe original container which should be keptclosed.

● Observe information provided by the manu-facturer.

● To prevent confusion, never store car careproducts in empty food cans, bottles or othercontainers.

● Keep all care products out of reach of chil-dren.

● Harmful vapours may be produced when us-ing car care products. Therefore, care prod-ucts should only be used in well-ventilatedspaces or in the open air.

● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, ace-tone or any other volatile liquid to wash,clean or care for the vehicle. These are toxicand highly flammable.

WARNING

Inappropriate care and cleaning of vehiclecomponents may effect the vehicle safetyequipment, increasing the risk of severe in-jury.

● Vehicle components should only becleaned and maintained in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.

● Only use approved or recommended careproducts.

CAUTION

Cleaning products which contain solvents willdamage the material.


● Only wash the vehicle in areas allocated forthis purpose, to prevent dirty water whichmay be contaminated by oil, grease or fuel,from entering the drains. In some places,washing it outside the planned areas is evenbanned.

● Where possible, always use products whichrespect the environment.

● The remains of car care products should notbe disposed of with ordinary householdwaste. Observe information provided by themanufacturer.

Washing the vehicle

The longer substances such as insects, birddroppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt andother aggressive materials remain on the ve-hicle, the more damage they do to the paint-work. High temperatures (for instance due tostrong sunlight) further intensify the corro-sive effect. The vehicle undercarriage shouldalso be thoroughly washed at regular inter-vals.

250


Automatic car washes

Always observe the instructions provided atthe automatic car wash. The standard pre-cautionary measures prior to entering the carwash should be taken to avoid damage tothe vehicle (close all windows, fold in exteriormirrors). If the vehicle is fitted with additionalcomponents (spoiler, roof-rack, aerial, etc.),check with the car wash supervisor whetherthese can enter the car wash ››› .

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that thevehicle can normally be washed withoutproblems in an automatic car wash tunnel.However, wear and damage to the paintworkwill depend on the type of car wash used.SEAT recommends the use of car washeswithout brushes.

To remove traces of wax on windows and toprevent wiper blades from scratching, pleaseobserve the following ››› page 252, Cleaningwindows and exterior mirrors.

Washing the car by hand

When washing the car by hand, use plenty ofwater to soften the dirt first, and rinse off aswell as possible.

Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge,glove or brush using only slight pressure.Start at the roof and work downwards. Spe-cial car shampoo should only be used forvery persistent dirt.

Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-ten.

Wheels, sills and similar should be cleanedlast. Use a second sponge for this.

WARNING

Sharp components on the vehicle may causeinjury.

● Protect arms and hands from sharp edgeswhen cleaning the vehicle undercarriage orthe interior of the wheel hubs.

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the brak-ing effect will be reduced (and the brakingdistance increased) due to moisture (and icein winter) on the brakes.


CAUTION

● The temperature of the water must not ex-ceed +60°C (+140°F).

● To avoid damage to the paintwork, do notwash the vehicle in full sun.

● Do not use rough sponges or similar whichcould damage the surface to clean away thetraces of insects.

● Never wipe the headlights with a dry clothor sponge, always moisten first. It is best touse soapy water.

● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures:When washing the vehicle with a hose, donot direct water into the lock cylinders or thegaps around the doors or roof. Locks andseals could freeze!

CAUTION

To avoid any risk of damage to the vehicle,please check the following points before us-ing an automatic car wash:

● Compare the distance between the vehiclewheels and the distance between the guide-rails of the car wash to prevent damage to thewheels and tyres!

● Switch off the rain sensor and the Au-to Hold function before entering a car wash.

● Compare the height and width of your vehi-cle with the available height and width whenentering and driving through the car wash.

● Fold in exterior mirrors Electrically retracta-ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in orout by hand. Always use the electrical powercontrol.

● To avoid damaging the bonnet paintwork,rest the wipers on the windscreen after dry-ing them. Do not let them fall!

● Lock the rear lid to prevent it from openingunexpectedly while inside the car wash.

251

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Washing the vehicle with a high pres-sure cleaner

When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. Pay special at-tention to the required pressure of the jetand the distance between the jet and the ve-hicle ››› .

Keep a suitable distance from soft materials,such as rubber hoses or insulating material,and from the parking distance warning sys-tem sensors. The parking distance sensorsare fitted in the rear bumpers and, where ap-plicable, in the front bumpers ››› .

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt ››› .

WARNING

The incorrect use of high pressure cleaningequipment could result in permanent dam-age, visible or invisible, to the tyres or othermaterials. This could result in a serious acci-dent.

● Ensure there is a suitable distance betweenthe nozzle and the tyres.

● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet orso-called “dirt blasters”. Even at large spray-ing distances and short cleaning times, youmay damage the tyres.

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the brak-ing effect will be reduced (and the brakingdistance increased) due to moisture (and icein winter) on the brakes.


CAUTION

● The water temperature should not exceed+60°C (+140°F).

● To avoid damage to the paintwork, do notwash the vehicle in full sun.

● The sensors on the bumpers should be keptclean and free of ice at all times to ensure theparking distance warning system and thepark assist system operate correctly. Whencleaning with pressure hoses and steamcleaners, the sensors should be sprayed onlybriefly. A distance of 10 cm between the sen-sors and the steam / hose nozzle must be ob-served.

● Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re-move ice or snow from windows

● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures:When washing the vehicle with a hose, donot direct water into the lock cylinders or thegaps around the doors or roof. Locks andseals could freeze!

Stickers attached by the factory

Follow these directions to avoid damagingthe stickers:

● Do not use high pressure cleaners.

● To remove ice or snow from the stickers donot use window scrapers or ice scrapers.

● Do not polish the stickers.

● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.

● Preferably wash using a soft sponge andsoft neutral soap.

Cleaning windows and exterior mir-rors

Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors

Spray windows and exterior windows with astandard window cleaner containing alcohol.

Dry the windows with a clean chamois leath-er or a lint-free cloth. The chamois leathersused on painted surfaces are not suitable forcleaning windows because they are soiledwith wax deposits which could smear thewindows.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover toclean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos-its off ››› .

252


Removing wax residue

Automatic car washes and certain car careproducts may leave wax deposits on the win-dows. These deposits can only be removedwith a special product or cleaning cloths.Wax deposits on the windscreen could causethe wiper blades to judder. SEAT recom-mends you wipe the wax deposits off thewindscreen with a soft cloth each time afteryou have washed the vehicle.

A window cleaning detergent which helps todissolve the wax may be added to the wind-screen washer fluid to prevent the wiperblades from scratching the windscreen.Please ensure you add the cleaning productin the correct proportions. Products for re-moving grease do not eliminate the wax de-posits ››› .

Special cleaning products or window clothsare available at any technical service. To re-move wax deposits, SEAT recommends thefollowing products:

● For the hottest time of the year: theG 052 184 A1 window cleaner for summeruse. Proportion 1:100 (1 part detergent,100 parts water) in the windscreen washerreservoir.

● All year round: the window cleanerG 052 164 A2; proportion 1:2 in windscreenwasher bottle (1 part concentrate, 2 parts wa-ter) in winter, down to -18°C (-0.4°F), or 1:4,during the rest of the year.

● Window cloths G 052 522 A1 for all win-dows and exterior mirrors.

Removing snow

Use a small brush to remove snow from thewindows and exterior mirrors.

Removing ice

If possible, use a de-icing spray to removeice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in onedirection only without swinging it. If you pullthe scraper backwards, the dirt may scratchthe window.

WARNING

Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility inall directions and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.

● Do not drive unless you have good visibilitythrough all windows!

● Remove ice and snow from the windowsand demist inside and out.

CAUTION

● Never mix our cleaning products with otherproducts not recommended by SEAT in thewindscreen washer reservoir. This could leadto flocculation and may block the windscreenwasher jets.

● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the windows and exterior mir-rors. The glass could crack!

● The heating element for the rear window islocated on the inner side of the window. Donot stick adhesive labels over the heating el-ements and never clean the inside of the rearwindow with corrosive or acid products orother similar chemical cleaning products.

● Aerials on the inside of windows may bedamaged if knocked or if cleaned with corro-sive or acid cleaning products. Do not stickadhesive labels over the heating elementsand never clean the inside of the rear windowwith corrosive or acid products or other simi-lar chemical cleaning products.

Caring for and polishing the vehiclepaintwork

Waxing

Regular waxing protects the paintwork. It istime to apply a good coat of wax when waterno longer forms droplets and rolls off theclean paintwork.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in theautomatic car wash, SEAT recommends pro-tecting the paint with a hard wax coating atleast twice a year.

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paint haslost its shine, and the gloss cannot bebrought back by applying wax. »

253

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

If the polish does not contain wax, a waxproduct should be applied after polishing.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage, car polish or hard waxshould not be used on components painted inmatt paint, plastic components and the glassheadlamp and tail light covers.

● Do not polish the paintwork if it is dirty, ap-ply polish in dusty or sandy zones.

Cleaning chrome parts

Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth. SEATrecommends the use of a chrome care prod-uct to clean stains and dirt from chrome sur-faces. Use a soft dry cloth to polish chromeparts.

CAUTION

To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

● Do not use abrasive products.

● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in asandy or dusty environment.

● Do not polish dirty surfaces.

Caring for and cleaning anodized sur-faces

It is not easy to detect the difference betweenaluminium and an anodized surface, for ex-ample, a radiator grille. However, anodizedsurfaces must not be treated in the same wayas aluminium surfaces. Never use roughsponges or cloths to wipe away insect re-mains.

● Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to cleananodized surfaces.

● If there is a lot of dirt, use a special clean-ing product which does not contain solvents.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the anodized surfaces:

● Do not use products containing solvents.

● Do not use polish or hard wax.

● Do not use abrasive products.

● Do not polish anodized surfaces in sandy ordusty environments.

● Do not polish dirty surfaces.

Cleaning wheels

Cleaning steel wheels

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brakedust. Therefore, clean wheels regularly with aseparate sponge.

Any damage to the paint on steel wheelsshould be touched up before the metal startsto rust.

Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels

Remove road salt and brake dust by washingthe wheels approximately once a fortnight.Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheelrims. SEAT recommends treating the wheelsthoroughly with a wax compound about onceevery three months.

It is important to remove road salt and brakedust by washing the wheels at regular inter-vals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloywheel rims. Car polish or other abrasiveagents should not be used for maintainingthe rims.

If the protective coating on the paint hasbeen damaged (e.g. hit by a stone), it shouldbe repaired immediately.

Caring for rubber seals

The rubber seals on doors, windows, etc., re-main flexible, provide a better seal and lastlonger if they are regularly treated with aproduct specifically designed for use on rub-ber.

254


Before applying the product, use a soft clothto remove dust and dirt from the rubberseals.

De-icing the door lock cylinder

To de-ice the lock cylinders, SEAT recommendthe use of genuine SEAT spray with lubricat-ing and anti-corrosive properties.

CAUTION

The use of products containing degreasingagents to de-ice the locks may rust the lockcylinder.

Protection of vehicle undercarriage

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect itfrom chemical and mechanical damage. Theprotective coat on the undercarriage maywear from use while driving. Therefore, SEATrecommends that the protective coating onthe undercarriage and on the running gearshould be regularly checked, and repaired ifnecessary.

WARNING

Additional underseal or anti-corrosion prod-ucts could catch fire due to the high tempera-tures reached by the exhaust gas system andother engine components.

● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion products to the exhaust pipes, cat-alytic converters, heat shields or other partsof the vehicle which reach high temperatures.

Cleaning the engine compartment

The engine compartment of any motor vehi-cle is a potentially hazardous area››› page 268.

The engine compartment should only becleaned by qualified personnel. If it is notcorrectly cleaned, the anti-corrosion coatingand consequently electrical components maybe damaged. Moreover, water may filter di-rectly into the vehicle interior through the wa-ter chamber ››› .

If the engine compartment is very dirty, al-ways take the vehicle to a specialised work-shop for professional cleaning. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

Water box

The water box is in the engine compartment,between the windscreen and the engine, andbeneath a perforated cover. Air is taken inthrough the water box from outside to the ve-hicle interior via the heating and air condi-tioner.

Leaves and other loose objects should beregularly cleaned away from the water box ei-ther by hand or with a vacuum.

WARNING

When working on the engine or in the enginecompartment, there is a risk of injury, burns,accident or fire.

● Before starting work, please ensure you arefamiliar with the required procedure and thesafety precautions ››› page 268.

● SEAT recommends getting a specialisedworkshop to do these jobs.

CAUTION

If water is manually poured into the water box(e.g. using a high pressure cleaning appli-ance), this could cause significant damage tothe vehicle.


Only wash the engine compartment in areasallocated for this purpose, to prevent dirtywater which may be contaminated by oil,grease or fuel, from entering the drains. Insome places, washing this compartment out-side the planned areas is even banned.

255

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Caring for and cleaning the ve-hicle interior

Introduction

The dye used in many modern garments, forexample dark jeans, is not always sufficientlycolour-fast. Seat upholstery (material andleather), especially when light-coloured, mayvisibly discolour if the dye comes out ofclothing (even when used correctly). This isnot an upholstery defect but indicates thatthe dye in the item of clothing is not suffi-ciently colour-fast.

The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehi-cle surfaces, especially the fabrics coveringthe padded upholstery, the more difficult itbecomes to clean and maintain them. Ifstains and dirt are left for a long time, it maybe that they are impossible to remove.

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazard-ous. Using unsuitable car-care products or,using them in the wrong way, may cause acci-dents, serious injury, burns or intoxication.

● Keep your car-care products in their origi-nal containers.

● Read the instructions.

● Never keep car-care products in empty foodcontainers, bottles or other similar contain-ers. Other people may confuse them.

● Keep all car-care products out of the reachof children.

● Some products may give off harmful va-pours during use. Therefore, they should beused outdoors in well-ventilated places.

● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail-varnish remover or any other volatile productfor washing, maintenance or cleaning. Theseare toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehi-cle components may impair proper operationof safety equipment and cause serious injury.

● Maintain and clean vehicle components ac-cording to the manufacturer's instructions.

● Only use approved or recommended clean-ing products.

CAUTION

● Cleaning products which contain solventshave a corrosive effect and may damage thematerial irreparably.

● Stains and dirt containing aggressive sub-stances or solvents attack the material andmay damage it irreparably, even when theyare cleaned quickly.

● Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dryand should be cleaned as quickly as possible.

● In the case of stubborn stains, take the ve-hicle to a specialised workshop to avoid dam-age.

How to care for the upholstery

To treat and maintain your seat upholstery,keep the following in mind ››› :

● Before entering the vehicle, close any Vel-cro fasteners that might snag on the uphols-tery or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fastenersmay damage the trim or upholstery fabrics.

● To prevent damage, avoid direct contactbetween sharp decorative objects and theupholstery and trim fabrics. Decorative ob-jects include zips, rivets and rhinestones onclothing and belts.

● From time to time, clean the dust that gath-ers in the perforations, folds and seams sothat the surfaces of the seats are not dam-aged by its abrasive effect.

● Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoidthem running and staining the upholstery.This is especially important if the upholsteryis light in colour.

CAUTION

If you ignore this advice, which is importantfor maintaining your seat upholstery, the fab-ric may be damaged or stained.

Note

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to aspecialised workshop to treat any stains onthe upholstery caused by the discolourationof clothing.

256


Cleaning the trim and seat fabrics, theAlcantara®

Cleaning the upholstery on heated seats andelectrically operated seats or seats with air-bag components

It is possible that there are important airbagcomponents and electrical connections in-side the driver seat, passenger seat and pos-sibly the outer rear seats. If these seats andseat backrests are damaged, or are cleanedand are treated incorrectly, or if they get wet,the vehicle electric system may be destroyedand the airbag system damaged ››› .

Electric and heated seats contain compo-nents and electrical connections that may bedamaged if the seats are cleaned or incor-rectly treated ››› . Similarly, damage mightbe caused at other points in the vehicle'selectric system.

For this reason, bear the following indica-tions in mind for cleaning:

● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaningequipment or cold aerosols.

● Do not use cream detergents or detergent-based solutions for delicate garments.

● Prevent the fabric from getting wet at alltimes.

● Only use cleaning products approved bySEAT.

● If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professio-nal cleaning company.

Cleaning the upholstery on non-heated seatsand non-electrically operated seats or seatswithout airbag components

● Before using any cleaning products, con-sult and keep in mind the instructions of use,indications and warnings on the container.

● Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush at-tachment) on the trim and seat fabrics, theAlcantara® upholstery of the seats and thecarpet.

● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaningequipment or cold aerosols.

● For general cleaning, use a soft sponge oran ordinary lint-free microfibre cloth ››› .

● Clean Alcantara® surfaces with a slightlydamp cotton or woollen cloth, or a standardlint-free microfibre cloth ››› .

If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabricsis only superficial, you can use a standardfoam cleaner.

If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, be-fore cleaning them we recommend you findout about the most suitable cleaning optionsfrom a professional cleaning company. If nec-essary, the cleaning should be carried out bya specialised company.

Stain removal

When removing stains, it may be necessaryto clean the whole surface and not just thestain itself. Especially if the surface has beendirtied through normal use. If you only cleanthe stained area, that part may then looklighter than the rest. If in doubt, take the ve-hicle to a professional cleaning company.

WARNING

If there is a fault in the airbag system, it islikely that the airbag will not deploy correct-ly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly,which could cause serious or fatal injuries.

● Have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop.

CAUTION

If the upholstery on electrically operatedseats or seats with airbag components getssoaked, the vehicle's electric system and cer-tain other components may be damaged.

● If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle im-mediately to a specialised workshop to bedried and for the system components to beinspected.

● Do not use steam cleaning equipment asthe dirt becomes more encrusted and fixed inthe material.

● High-pressure cleaning equipment and coldaerosols may damage the upholstery. »

257

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

CAUTION

● Brushes should only be used to clean thecarpet and floor mats! Other fabrics may bedamaged if cleaned with a brush.

● If cream detergents or detergents for deli-cate garments are applied with a damp clothor sponge, they may, for example, leave ringswhen dry because of the surfactant compo-nents they contain. Generally, such rings arevery difficult or almost impossible to remove.

CAUTION

● Do not let water soak into Alcantara® underany circumstances.

● Do not use leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain remov-ers or similar products on Alcantara®.

● Never use brushes for cleaning damp mate-rial as they could damage the surface.

Cleaning and maintenance of naturalleather upholstery

Consult a professional cleaning workshop ifyou have any doubts on cleaning and main-taining the leather equipment in your vehicle.

Maintenance and treatment

Nappa natural leather is delicate because ithas no additional protective layer.

● After cleaning, regularly apply a condition-er with sun-screen and impregnating action.These products nourish the leather, soften itand make it more breathable, as well as re-hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro-tective film.

● Clean the leather every 2 or 3 months andremove stains as they appear.

● Treat the leather every 6 months with asuitable maintenance product.

● Apply as few cleaning and maintenanceproducts as possible, always using a dry, lint-free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not applycleaning and maintenance products directlyto the leather.

● Remove recent ball-point pen and inkstains, lipstick, shoe cream and similarstains as soon as possible.

● Maintain the colour of the leather. To dothis, use a special cream especially colouredfor leather to achieve the same overall colour,if necessary.

● Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.

Cleaning the vehicle

SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cot-ton or woollen cloth for general cleaning pur-poses.

Generally, the leather should never besoaked at any point, nor should water pene-trate the seams.

Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bearin mind the following recommendations››› page 257, Cleaning the upholstery onheated seats and electrically operated seatsor seats with airbag components.

CAUTION

● On no account use solvents, wax polish,shoe cream, stain removers or similar materi-als on leather.

● If the stain remains on the leather for long,it will soak in and be impossible to remove.

● In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediate-ly with an absorbent cloth to prevent the liq-uid penetrating through the leather or seams.

● If the vehicle is left standing in the sun forlong periods, the leather should be protectedagainst direct sunlight to prevent it from fad-ing.

Note

The leather will usually change colour slight-ly with use.

Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery

Before cleaning synthetic leather upholstery,bear in mind the following recommendations››› page 257, Cleaning the upholstery onheated seats and electrically operated seatsor seats with airbag components

258


Only use water and neutral cleaning productsto clean synthetic leather upholstery.

CAUTION

Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream,stain removers or similar products on syn-thetic leather. These will stiffen the material,causing it to crack prematurely.

Cleaning storage compartments,drinks holders and ashtrays

Cleaning storage compartments and drinksholders

Some storage compartments and drinksholders have a removable rubber mat.

● Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to cleanparts.

● If this does not provide satisfactory results,we recommend using a special solvent-freeplastic cleaning product.

Cleaning the ashtray

● Extract the ashtray and empty it.

● Clean the ashtray with a dishcloth.

Use a toothpick or similar to remove ash fromthe area where cigarettes are stubbed out.

Care and cleaning of plastic parts,wooden trim and the instrument pan-el

● Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to cleanparts.

● Clean plastic parts (inside and outside thevehicle) and the dash panel with a specialsolvent-free product for the care and clean-ing of plastic, approved by SEAT ››› .

● Wash wooden trims with a mild soap andwater solution.

WARNING

Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbagmodules to become porous. If an airbag is ac-cidentally triggered, the detachment of plas-tic parts could cause serious injury.

● Never clean the dash panel and the surfa-ces of the airbag modules with cleaners con-taining solvents.

Cleaning seatbelts

If the seat belt is very dirty, the belt retractormay not work correctly thus preventing theseat belt from operating correctly.

The seat belts should never be removed fromthe vehicle for cleaning.

● Use a soft brush to remove the worst dirt››› .

● Pull the seat belt right out and leave it out.

● Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soapand water solution.

● Wait until they are completely dry.

● Only allow the seat belt to retract when it iscompletely dry.

WARNING

Check the condition of all the seat belts atregular intervals. If the webbing or otherparts of the belt are damaged, the vehicleshould be taken to a specialised workshopimmediately and the belts should be re-placed. It is extremely dangerous to drive us-ing damaged seat belts and could result inserious injury or loss of life.

● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. This could affect the strength of theseat belt webbing.

● Seat belts should be completely dry beforeretracting. Damp could damage the belt re-tractor so that it is does not operate correct-ly.

● Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to en-ter the buckle fastenings. This could damagethe buckles and seat belts.

● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove aseat belt yourself.

● Always have damaged seatbelts replacedimmediately by seat belts approved for the »

259

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts whichhave been worn in an accident and stretchedmust be replaced by a specialised workshop.Renewal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorage shouldalso be checked.

Notes for the user

Labels and plates

Some parts in the engine compartment comefrom the factory with certificates of safety, la-bels or plates containing important informa-tion regarding the operation of the vehicle,for example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas-senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, oron the floor of the boot.

● Never remove these certificates of safety,labels or plates, and ensure they are kept ingood condition and are legible.

● If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate ofsafety, label or plate, is replaced, the special-ised workshop should attach the informationback in the same place.

Certificate of safety

A certificate of safety on the door strut statesthat all the safety standards and regulationsestablished by the national traffic authoritiesresponsible for road safety were met at the

time of manufacture. It may also give themonth and year of manufacture, togetherwith the chassis number.

Warning of high voltage label*

There is a label close to the bonnet lockwhich warns of high voltage in the vehicle'selectrical system. The vehicle ignition systemcomplies with several standards, includingthe Canadian standard, ICES-002.

Using your vehicle in other countriesand continents

The vehicle is manufactured at the factory foruse in a particular country in accordance withthe national legislation in force at the time ofmanufacture.

If the vehicle is sold in another country orused in another country for an extended peri-od of time, the applicable legislation of thatcountry should be observed.

It may be necessary to fit or remove certainpieces of equipment or to deactivate certainfunctions. Service work may also be affected.This is particularly true if the vehicle is usedin a different climate for an extended periodof time.

As there are different types of frequencybands around the world, you may find that

the radio or navigation system supplied atthe factory does not work in another country.

CAUTION

● SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-age to the vehicle due to the use of a lowerquality fuel, an inadequate service or thenon-availability of genuine spare parts.

● SEAT does not accept liability if the vehicledoes not comply in part or in full with the le-gal requirements of other countries or conti-nents.

Radio and antenna reception

The aerial of radio and navigation systemsfitted at the factory may be mounted in differ-ent parts of the vehicle:

● On the inside of the rear window, next tothe rear window heating,

● on the inside of the rear side windows,

● on the inside of the windscreen,

● on the roof of the vehicle.

Aerials mounted on the inside of a windowcan be recognised by the fine wires.

CAUTION

Aerials on the inside of windows may be dam-aged if knocked or if cleaned with corrosive oracid cleaning products. Do not stick adhesive

260

Checking and refilling levels

labels over the heating elements and neverclean the inside of the rear window with cor-rosive or acid products or other similar chem-ical products.

Note

If electrical equipment is used near an aerialbuilt-into the window, you may observe inter-ference in the reception of AM stations.

Notes on SEAT repairs

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-formed correctly may result in damage or er-rors in the vehicle operation, affecting the ef-fectiveness of the driver assist and airbagsystems. This could result in serious acci-dent.

● Have any repairs or modifications carriedout at a specialised workshop.

Collection and scrapping of end-of-lifevehicles

Collection of end-of-life vehicles

An extensive network of used car receptioncentres already exists in much of Europe. Af-ter the vehicle has been delivered, you willreceive a certificate of destruction describing

the environmentally friendly scrapping of thevehicle in accordance with applicable legisla-tion.

We will collect the used vehicle free ofcharge, provided it complies with all nationallegislation.

Please see your technical service for furtherinformation about the collection and scrap-ping of end-of-life vehicles.

Scrapping

The relevant safety requirements must be ob-served when the vehicle or components ofthe airbag or belt tensioner systems arescrapped. These requirements are known tospecialised workshops.


Filling the tank

Introduction

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of thevehicle.

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly cancause an explosion or fire resulting in seriousburns and injuries.

● Always make sure that you correctly closethe fuel cap to avoid evaporation and fuelspillage.

● Fuels are highly explosive and inflammablesubstances that can cause serious burns andinjuries.

● Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the engineis not switched off or if the filler fuel nozzle isnot fully inserted into the tank filler neckwhen refuelling. This could lead to a fire, ex-plosion and severe injuries.

● When refuelling, turn off the engine, theauxiliary heating (››› page 177) and turn offthe ignition for safety reasons.

● Always turn off mobile telephones, radioapparatus and other radio wave emittingequipment before refuelling. Electromagneticwaves could cause sparks and lead to a fire. »

261

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If itis absolutely necessary to enter, close thedoor and touch a metal surface before touch-ing the filler nozzle again. This will preventthe generation of static electricity. Sparkscould cause a fire when refuelling.

● Never handle fuel close to flames, sparks orobjects with slow combustion (e.g. ciga-rettes).

● Avoid static electricity and electro-magnet-ic radiation when refuelling.

● Observe the safety regulations of the serv-ice station.

● Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the lug-gage compartment.

WARNING

For safety reasons, SEAT does not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.Fuel could be spilled and catch fire, above allin case of an accident and this applies to afull container as well as empty containers.This could lead to explosions, fires and inju-ries.

● Observe the following if you exceptionallyhave to carry fuel in a canister:

– Never place a fuel container to fill it in-side the vehicle or on the vehicle, for ex-ample, in the boot or on the hatch. Fillingin these circumstances could create anelectrostatic charge and spark that couldignite fuel fumes.

– Always place the canister on the groundto fill it.

– Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of thecanister as far as possible.

– If you are using a metal fuel canister, thenozzle must always touch the canisterwhile it is being filled to avoid static elec-tricity.

– Follow the legal requirements for the use,storage and transport of spare fuel canis-ters.

– Insure that the fuel container complieswith manufacturing standards, for exam-ple, ANSI or ASTM F852-86.

CAUTION

● Always remove any fuel spilled on the vehi-cle paintwork immediately to avoid damageto the wheel housing, the tyre and vehiclepaintwork.

● Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel or adiesel engine with petrol can cause seriousengine and fuel system damage; the resultingmalfunctions are not covered by the SEATwarranty. If you refuel with the wrong type offuel, never start the engine. This applies toeven the smallest amount of the wrong fuel.Seek specialist assistance. With the enginerunning, the composition of the wrong fuelcould significantly damage the fuel systemand the engine itself.

● In vehicles with a diesel engine, under nocircumstances should you refuel or drive with

petrol, kerosene, heating oil or any othertype of different fuel. Other types of fuelscould cause serious damage to the engineand to the fuel supply system and the result-ing problems are not covered by the SEATwarranty.


Fuels can contaminate the environment. Col-lect any spilt service fluids and allow a pro-fessional to dispose of them.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised per-sonnel.

262


Control lamps and fuel gauge

Fig. 234 On the instrument panel: Fuel gaugefor petrol and diesel

It lights up

Gauge posi-tion

››› Fig. 234

Possible cause››› Solution

Red mark (ar-row)

The fuel tank is al-most empty.The reserve tank isbeing used››› page 39.

Refuel as soon aspossible ››› .

It lights up

Fuel tank notclosed cor-rectly.

Stop the vehicle and close the tankflap properly.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

When the control lamp lights up or theauxiliary heating and heater running off pet-rol automatically switch off.

WARNING

Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could re-sult in the vehicle breaking down in trafficand a serious accident.

● If the fuel level is too low then the fuel sup-ply to the engine can become irregular espe-cially on slopes.

● If the engine “is choked” or stalls due tolack of or irregularity of the fuel supply, thepower steering as well as all of the driver as-sistance systems including braking assis-tance will stop working.

● Always refuel when there is only one quar-ter of the fuel tank left to avoid running out offuel.

CAUTION

● Always pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descriptionsand instructions to avoid damage to the vehi-cle.

● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply may lead to ignitionfaults and unburnt fuel could enter the ex-haust system. This could damage the catalyt-ic converter filter or the diesel particulate fil-ter!

Note

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol onthe instrument panel ››› Fig. 234 indicates theside of the vehicle on which the fuel tank flapis located.

Refuelling

Fig. 235 Open fuel tank flap with tank cap inthe holder


Refuelling

The correct petrol type for the vehicle is loca-ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap››› page 264.

● If the automatic filler nozzle is operatedcorrectly, it will switch itself off as soon asthe tank is full ››› . »

263

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● Do not continue to refuel if it is turned off!Otherwise, this will fill the expansion cham-ber and fuel may leak out if the ambient con-ditions are warm.

WARNING

Do not continue refilling once the fuel nozzlehas switched itself off. The fuel tank may befilled too much. As a result, fuel may spurtout and spill. This could lead to a fire, explo-sion and severe injuries.

CAUTION

● Always remove any fuel spilled on the vehi-cle paintwork immediately to avoid damageto the wheel housing, the tyre and vehiclepaintwork.


Spilt fuel can contaminate the environment.

Fuel

Types of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-rol. The petrol must comply with EuropeanStandard EN 228 or German standard DIN

51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-ated by their octane rating (RON).

The following titles appear on the corre-sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octanepetrol, with a slight decrease in power.

Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95octanes

You should use super petrol with a minimumof 95 octanes.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super plus 98 octanepetrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speeds

and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav-iour, power and service life of the engine.This is why the petrol you use should carrysuitable additives already included by thepetrol industry, free of metals. These addi-tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep thefuel system clean and prevent deposits frombuilding up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-tives is not available or engine problemsarise, the necessary additives must be addedwhen refuelling ››› .

Not all petrol additives have been shown tobe effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-ditives may cause significant damage to theengine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-ditives should never be used. Metal additivesmay also be contained in petrol additives forimproving anti-detonation ratings or octaneratings ››› .

SEAT recommends “genuine VolkswagenGroup Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-ers, where information on how to use themcan also be obtained.

264


CAUTION

● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that thefuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Using them may damage theengine!

● Never refuel with fuels containing a largeproportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).This could damage the fuel system.

● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel orfuel containing other metal additives wouldseriously impair the efficiency of the catalyticconverter.

● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-knock additives may contain metal additivesthat could seriously damage the engine orthe catalytic converter. These additives mustnot be used.

● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol with anoctane rating lower than the correct grade forthe engine.

Note

● You may use petrol with a high octane num-ber than the one recommended for your en-gine.

● In those countries where unleaded petrol isnot available, you may refuel with a fuel witha low lead content.

Diesel fuel

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend the use of diesel fuel whichcomplies to European standard EN 590. Ifdiesel fuel which meets European standardEN 590 is not available, the Cetane number(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engineis equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-phur content of the fuel must be below 50parts per million.

Winter-grade diesel

Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and itis more difficult to start the engine. For thisreason, petrol stations in some countries al-so offer winter diesel with improved fluiditywhen cold (winter-grade diesel).

CAUTION

● The vehicle is not designed for the use ofFAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system wouldbe damaged if you used biodiesel.

● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called“thinners”, petrol or similar additives withdiesel fuel.

● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may benecessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-quently than is specified in the MaintenanceProgramme. We recommend having this doneby a specialised workshop. If water is allowed

to collect in the filter, this can cause engineperformance problems.

Selective catalytic reduction*(AdBlue)

Introduction

In vehicles with “Selective Catalytic Reduc-tion”, a special urea solution (AdBlue) is in-jected into the exhaust gas system in front ofthe catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen ox-ide emissions.

The consumption of AdBlue depends on indi-vidual driving style, the temperature at whichthe system operates and the outside temper-ature where the vehicle is driven.

AdBlue is kept in an independent tank in thevehicle and should be refilled at an officialsupplier. The AdBlue tank holds approxi-mately 17 litres.

The AdBlue fill level must be checked whenthe vehicle is being serviced.

WARNING

If the AdBlue fill level is too low, the vehiclemay not restart after switching the ignitionoff. The emergency start or jump start will notbe possible either! »

265

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● Top up with AdBlue at the latest 1,000 kmor 600 miles before it runs out.

● Do not allow the AdBlue to run too low.

WARNING

AdBlue is an irritant, corrosive liquid that cancause injuries if it touches the skin, eyes orrespiratory organs.

● If AdBlue get in contact with eyes and skin,rinse for at least 15 minutes with plenty ofwater and seek medical help.

● If the AdBlue is swallowed, wash yourmouth with plenty of water for at least 15 mi-nutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting unlessrecommended by a Doctor. Seek medical ad-vice immediately.

CAUTION

AdBlue damages surfaces such as painted ve-hicle parts, plastic, items of clothing and car-pets. Spilt AdBlue should be removed asquickly as possible using a damp cloth andplenty of cold water.

● If the AdBlue has crystallised, remove withwarm water and a sponge.


It lights up red

The engine cannotbe restarted! Thelevel of AdBlue istoo low.

Stop the vehicle in a suitable,safe and flat area then top upwith the minimum quantity ofAdBlue required ››› page 267.

It lights up red

together with

The engine cannotbe restarted! AdBluesystem malfunction.

Contact a specialised workshop.Have the system checked there.

It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserveis low.

Refill AdBlue over the next kilo-metres or miles as indicated››› page 267. SEAT recommendscontacting a specialised work-shop.

It lights up yellow

together with

There is a fault inthe AdBlue systemor unsuitableAdBlue fluid hasbeen used.

Contact a specialised workshop.Have the system checked there.

Several warning and control lamps shouldlight up for a few seconds when the ignitionis switched on, signalling that the function isbeing verified. They will switch off after a fewseconds.

WARNING


Information on AdBlue

A message will be displayed on the dashpanel around 2,400 km before the next serv-ice to indicate that AdBlue must be refilled››› page 267. If you ignore this message anddo not refill, you will be unable to start theengine afterwards ››› page 266.

SEAT recommends contacting a specialisedworkshop. If not possible, it should be parti-ally filled with a minimum 5.0 litres ofAdBlue. Only refill using AdBlue expresslyapproved by SEAT.

When the indicators and light simulta-neously, there is a fault. SEAT recommendsvisiting the closest specialised workshop.

AdBlue® is a registered trademark in the US,Germany, the European Union and othercountries belonging to the German automo-bile industry association (“"Verband der Au-tomobilindustrie e. V."”, VDA).

266


Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 236 At the rear left of the luggage com-partment: AdBlue tank, behind a cover panel

Fig. 237 AdBlue tank with filler neck cap andrefilling bottle

To refill AdBlue, the vehicle must be on flatground and not, for example, parked on akerb or slope. If the vehicle is not on flatground then the filling indicator cannotmeasure the filling quantity.

Opening the tank filling neck


● Rotate the shut off on the cover clockwise››› Fig. 236 and open the cover forwards.

● Unscrew the tank filler neck cap ››› Fig. 2371 anticlockwise.

Refilling AdBlue

Only use AdBlue that is approved by SEATand that complies with ISO 22241-1 Stand-ard. Only use genuine bottles.

● Observe the instructions and informationprovided by the refill bottle manufacturer.

● Observe the expiry date.

● Unscrew the cap on the refill bottle.

● Place the refill bottle 2 upside down in-side the tank filler neck.

● Press the refill bottle against the filler neckand keep in this position.

● Add at least 5.0 litres of AdBlue (6 bottles).A lower quantity would be insufficient.

● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue tank. Donot crush or damage the bottle!

● Unscrew the liquid bottle anticlockwise andremove it carefully ››› .

● You can tell when the AdBlue tank is fullbecause the bottle will be empty. »

267

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Closing the tank filling neck

● Screw on the tank filler neck cap ››› Fig. 2371 clockwise until it is fully inserted.

● Place the cover and turn the shut off anti-clockwise to close it.

Operations before driving

● Only switch the ignition on after refilling.

● Keep the ignition switch on for at least 30seconds so that the system detects tank re-filling.

● Wait 30 seconds before starting the en-gine!

WARNING

Only keep AdBlue in its original container,tightly shut and in a safe place.

● Never keep AdBlue in empty food cans, bot-tles or other containers to avoid other peoplemistaking it for something else.

● Keep the AdBlue out of the reach of smallchildren.

CAUTION

● Only refill using AdBlue expressly approvedby SEAT. The use of any other type of AdBluecould cause engine damage!

● AdBlue should never be mixed with wateror any other additives. Any type of damagecaused by a mixture will not be covered bythe warranty.

● Do not add AdBlue to the diesel fuel tank!Otherwise you may damage the engine.

● Never leave the refill bottle in the vehicle. Itcould become permeable due to temperaturechanges and bottle damage and the AdBluecould damage the vehicle interior.


Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment-friendly manner.

Note

Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be pur-chased from a technical service centre.

Working in the engine compart-ment

Introduction

Before working in the engine compartment,make sure that the vehicle is parked on hori-zontal and firm ground.

The engine compartment of the vehicle is ahazardous area. Never work on the engine orin the engine compartment if you are not fa-miliar with the operations to be carried out,the applicable safety standards and especial-ly if you do not have the necessary instru-ments, liquids and tools ››› ! Have the work

carried out by a specialised workshop if youare uncertain. Negligent work can cause seri-ous injury.

WARNING

If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this couldcause serious injury.

● Never work under the vehicle if it has notbeen immobilized. If you must work under-neath the vehicle with the wheels in contactwith the ground then it should be parked onflat ground, the wheels should be preventedfrom moving and the key should be removedfrom the ignition.

● If you have to work underneath the vehicle,you must use suitable stands additionally tosupport the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-dent!. The jack is not intended for this kind ofwork and its failure could lead to severe inju-ries.

WARNING

The engine compartment is a dangerous areacapable of causing serious injury.

● For all type of work, always take the utmostprecautions, work carefully and note the gen-eral safety standards in force. Never take per-sonal risks.

● Never work on the engine or in the enginecompartment if you are not familiar with thenecessary operations. If you are not sureabout procedures then visit a specialisedworkshop to carry out the necessary work.

268


Working incorrectly can cause seriousinjuries.

● Never open the bonnet if you see steam orcoolant escaping from the engine compart-ment. This may cause serious burns. Alwayswait until you cannot see or hear the sound ofsteam or coolant coming from the enginecompartment.

● Always allow the engine to cool down be-fore opening the bonnet.

● Contact with hot elements of the engineand the exhaust system can cause burns.

● Once the engine has cooled, follow the in-structions below before opening the bonnet:

– Turn on the electronic parking brake andplace the gear selector lever in P or thegearbox lever in neutral.

– Remove the key from the ignition.

– Keep children away from the engine com-partment and never leave them unsuper-vised.

● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrewthe cap on the expansion tank when the en-gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray outunder pressure causing burns and serious in-jury.

– Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap an-ticlockwise, gently pressing down on it.

– Always protect your face, hands and armsfrom hot coolant and steam using a large,thick cloth.

● When refilling liquids, avoid spilling themon parts of the engine and the exhaust sys-tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire.

WARNING

The high voltages of the electrical system cangive electric shocks as well as causing burnsand serious injury and possibly even death!

● Never cause short circuits in the electricalsystem. The battery could explode.

● To minimise the risk of electric shock andserious consequences while the engine isrunning or starting the engine, note the fol-lowing:

– Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.

– Never touch electric cables or the gas dis-charge lamps.

WARNING

In the engine compartment, there are rotat-ing parts that could cause serious injury.

● Never place your hands on or near the radi-ator fan. Touching the rotor blades could seri-ously harm you. The ventilator works accord-ing to the engine temperature and could startsuddenly even when the ignition is turned offand the key is removed.

● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine running,there is an additional, potentially fatal, safetyrisk from rotating parts, such as the drive

belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., as well asfrom the high-voltage ignition system. Al-ways work with the utmost caution.

– Always make sure that no parts of yourbody, jewellery, ties, loose clothing andlong hair can be trapped by the rotatingparts of the engine. Before any work, re-move ties and jewellery (necklaces, etc),tie long hair back and tie all items ofloose clothing to your body to make surethat they cannot be trapped by enginecomponents.

– Take extreme caution when operating theaccelerator and remain attentive. The ve-hicle could move, even with the electron-ic parking brake activated.

● Always make sure you have not left any ob-jects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, inthe engine compartment. If any object is leftin the engine compartment, this could causemalfunctions, engine faults and even a fire.

WARNING

Refill liquids and certain materials can catchfire easily in the engine compartment, caus-ing a fire and serious injury!

● Never smoke.

● Never work close to places exposed toflames or sparks.

● Never pour service fluids over the engine.These fluid may ignite hot engine parts andcause injuries. »

269

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● If it is necessary to work on the fuel systemor the electrical system, please follow the in-structions below:

– Always disconnect the vehicle battery.When disconnecting the battery, ensurethat the vehicle is unlocked otherwisethe anti-theft alarm will be triggered.

– Never work close to heaters, heat sourcesor places exposed to flames or sparks.

● Always keep a recently serviced and per-fectly working fire extinguisher close by.

● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!

CAUTION

When refilling or changing service liquids,ensure that you put the liquids into the righttank. Making a mistake when refilling couldcause serious malfunctions and damage theengine!


Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-ronment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. Take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop to be checked if you see stains, oilor other fluids on the ground. Collect anyspilt service fluids and allow a professional todispose of them.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 238 In the footwell on the driver side:Lever for unlocking the bonnet

Fig. 239 Release lever to open the bonnet inthe radiator grille

Opening the bonnet

The lever to open the bonnet can only beused if the driver door is open.

● Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen ››› .

● Open the driver door.

● Pull the release lever ››› Fig. 238 in the di-rection of the arrow. The bonnet is releasedfrom the lock carrier by a spring mechanism››› .

● Lift the bonnet using the release lever››› Fig. 239 (arrow) and open the bonnet fully.The bonnet is held open thanks to the gasstrut.

Closing the bonnet

● To close the bonnet, pull it down to over-come the gas strut pressure ››› .

● Allow the bonnet to fall into the lock carrier.Do not press down.

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, open itonce again and close it correctly.

The bonnet is correctly closed when it is flushwith the corresponding parts on the body-work.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it couldsuddenly open while driving leaving the driv-er without visibility. This could result in a se-rious accident.

270


● After closing the bonnet, always check thatit is properly secured by the locking mecha-nism in the lock carrier. The bonnet must beflush with the surrounding body panels.

● While driving, if you notice that the bonnetis not correctly closed then stop immediatelyand close it correctly.

● Only open and close the bonnet when thereis nobody within its range.

CAUTION

● To avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it whenthe windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Checking fluid levels

Fig. 240 Diagram for the location of the vari-ous elements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant fluid deposit

Engine oil dipstick

Oil filler neck

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

The checking and refilling of service fluidsare carried out on the components men-

1

2

3

4

5

6

tioned above. These operations are descri-bed in ››› page 268.

Overview

Further explanations, instructions and restric-tions on the technical data are contained asof ››› page 294

Engine oil

Introduction

WARNING

Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause in-jury and serious burns.

● Always protect your eyes when handlingengine oil.

● Oil is toxic and must be kept out of thereach of children.

● Engine oil should only be kept in its origi-nal packaging; the same goes for used oil un-til it is disposed of.

● Never store engine oil in empty food con-tainers or bottles as other people may acci-dentally drink it.

● Regular contact with engine oil can be badfor the skin. If you come into contact with en-gine oil, wash your skin with soap and water.

● With the engine running, the engine oilgets extremely hot and can cause severe skin »

271

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

burns. Always wait until the engine has fullycooled.


Similar to the other service liquids, spilledengine oil can be bad for the environment.Collect these liquids in suitable containersand dispose of them while respecting the en-vironment.

Warning and control lamps

It lights up

Insufficient en-gine oil.

Switch the ignition off. Check the en-gine oil level ››› page 273.

Flashes

Engine oil sen-sor faulty.

Contact a specialised workshop.Have the engine oil sensor checked.Meanwhile, check the oil level man-ually.

Flashes

Engine oil pres-sure too low.

Stop the vehicle!Switch off the engine. Check the en-gine oil level.- If the warning lamp flashes al-though the oil level is correct, do notcontinue driving or leave the enginerunning. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. Seek specialistassistance.

WARNING


Engine oil specifications

Replacement engine oil must strictly complywith the specifications.

The correct oil must be used to ensure thecorrect operation and long service life of theengine. The engine comes with a high-qualitymultigrade oil that can generally be used allyear round.

Only use an engine oil that complies to SEATstandards whenever possible ››› . If youwish to maintain the long-life service dura-tion, only engine oils approved for this serv-ice according to the corresponding VW stand-ard (››› table on page 40) may be used.All oils indicated are synthetic multigradeoils.

Engine oils are being continuously furtherdeveloped. Technical services are constantlyupdated with any modifications. SEAT there-fore recommends that you have the engineoil changed by a technical service.

CAUTION

● Only use engine oils whose specificationsare expressly approved by SEAT. The use ofany other type of oil could cause engine dam-age!

272


Checking engine oil level

Fig. 241 Marked engine oil dipstick

Fig. 242 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap.


Preparations

● Park the vehicle on flat ground so that theengine oil reading is correct.

● Stop the engine and wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the sump. When theengine has cooled down, immediately checkthe oil level and top up if necessary.


● The engine oil filler neck can be recognisedby the symbol on the cap ››› Fig. 242 andthe dipstick by its coloured handle.

Checking the engine oil level

● Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a cleancloth.

● Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far asit will go. If the dipstick has a mark, when youreintroduce it this mark should slot into thecorresponding groove located on the upperend of the tube.

● Remove the oil dipstick again and checkthe engine oil level.

● After reading the oil level, replace the dip-stick in the tube completely.

Adding oil after checking the level

Only add engine oil in small quantities and insteps:

● Unscrew the cap from engine oil filler neckon the cylinder head ››› Fig. 242. If you arenot sure where the cap is, request help froma specialist.

● Only refill using approved SEAT engine oilin small quantities (no more than 0.5 l)››› page 272.

● To avoid adding too much oil, each timeyou add a quantity, wait until the oil has flow-ed into the crankcase so that it can be meas-ured with the dipstick.

● Check the oil level before adding any moreoil. Do not top up with too much engine oil››› .

● When the oil level is at least in the››› Fig. 241 B zone, insert the dipstick intothe tube fully to avoid engine oil escapingwhen the engine is running.

● After topping up the oil, ensure that thecap is screwed on to the filler neck correctly.

WARNING

Oil could catch fire if it comes into contactwith hot engine components. This could leadto a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

● Always ensure that after topping of oil, theengine oil filler cap is correctly tightened.This will avoid engine oil spilling onto hot en-gine parts when the engine is running.

CAUTION

● If the engine oil level is above the area››› Fig. 241 A do not start the engine. Seekspecialist assistance. Otherwise catalyticconverter and engine damage may occur. »

273

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● When refilling or changing service liquids,ensure that you put the liquids into the righttank. Making a mistake when refilling couldcause serious malfunctions and damage theengine!


The oil level must never be above area››› Fig. 241 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn inthrough the crankcase breather and escapeinto the atmosphere via the exhaust system.

Engine oil consumption

The consumption of engine oil can be differ-ent from one engine to another and can varyduring the useful life of the engine.

Depending on driving style and the condi-tions of use, the consumption of engine oilcan reach 1 litre every 2,000 km (one quarterof a gallon every 1,200 miles); for new vehi-cles, this could be higher for the first5,000 km (3,000 miles). For this reason theengine oil level must be checked at regularintervals, preferably when filling the tank andbefore a journey.

Topping up engine oil


The engine oil must be changed regularly ac-cording to the specifications of the Mainte-nance Programme.

Due to the problems linked with disposing ofused oil and the need for suitable tools andspecial knowledge, always visit a specialisedworkshop to have the engine oil and filterchanged. SEAT recommends taking your carin for technical service.

Detailed information on the service intervalsis shown in the Maintenance Programme.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, you mustchange the engine oil yourself, please notethe following:

● Wear eye protection.

● Always wait until the engine has complete-ly cooled to avoid being burned.

● Always keep your arms horizontal when un-screwing the oil drainage bolt so that it doesnot run down your arms.

● Use a suitable container large enough tocollect all of the used oil in the engine.

● Never collect engine oil in empty food con-tainers, cans, bottles or other containers asnot all people are able to identify engine oil.

● Oil is toxic and must be kept out of thereach of children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Any dam-age caused by the use of such additiveswould not be covered by the factory warranty.


● Before changing the engine oil, find a suita-ble location or service for proper disposal.

● Always dispose of engine oil with the ut-most respect for the environment. Never dis-pose of used engine oil in places such as agarden, woods, drains, roads, paths, riversand drainage systems.

Engine coolant

Introduction

WARNING

Engine coolant is toxic!

● Only keep engine coolant in its originalcontainer, tightly shut and in a safe place.

● Never store engine coolant in empty foodcontainers or bottles as other people may ac-cidentally drink it.

● Always keep engine coolant out of reach ofchildren.

274


● Ensure that the proportion of engine cool-ant additive corresponds to the lowest out-side temperature to which the vehicle will beexposed.

● If the outside temperature is extremely low,the engine coolant could freeze causing the

vehicle to stop. As this would also cause theheating to stop working, passengers withoutwarm clothing could freeze.


Coolants and additives can contaminate theenvironment. Collect any spilt fluids in suita-ble containers and dispose of them in accord-

ance with legislation and with the utmost re-spect for the environment.

Warning lamp and coolant temperature indicator

Fig. 243 Engine coolant temperature gaugeon the instrument panel: A cold area; B

normal area; C warning area

When driving normally, the needle will re-main in the middle area. The temperaturemay also rise when the engine is workinghard, especially at high outside temperaturesand so the indicator will move quite far to theright-hand side.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds. »

275

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

It lights upGauge position

››› Fig. 243Possible cause Solution

Warning area C Excessive engine coolant temperature.

Stop the vehicle!Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Switch off the engine and waitfor it to cool down and for the needle to return to the normal area. Checkthe engine coolant level ››› page 277.

Normal area B Insufficient engine coolant level.Check the engine coolant when the engine has cooled and, if it is low, refillwith engine coolant ››› page 277.Although the coolant level is correct, there is a fault.

-- Engine coolant system faulty. Do not drive any further.Obtain professional assistance.

-- Cold area A --Avoid revving the engine too much or making it work hard while it has notreached normal service temperature.

Flashes

Engine coolantsystem faulty.

Seek specialist assistance.

WARNING


Coolant specifications


WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-rious damage.

● Please make sure that the percentage ofadditive is correct with respect to the lowestexpected ambient temperature in the zone inwhich the vehicle is to be used.

● When the outside temperature is very low,the coolant could freeze and the vehiclewould be immobilised. In this case, the heat-ing would not work either and inadequatelydressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be mixedwith coolants which are not approved by

SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causingsevere damage to the engine and the enginecooling system.

● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-ple but is, for example, brown, this indicatesthat the G13 additive has been mixed with aninadequate coolant. The coolant must bechanged as soon as possible if this is thecase! This could result in serious faults andengine damage.


Coolants and additives can contaminate theenvironment. If any fluids are spilled, theyshould be collected and correctly disposedof, with respect to the environment.

276


Checking the coolant level and top-ping up

Fig. 244 In the engine compartment: Markingon coolant expansion tank

Fig. 245 In the engine compartment: coolantexpansion tank cap

If the coolant level is low, the coolant warn-ing indicator will light.

Preparations

● Park the vehicle on even, flat and firmground.

● Allow the engine to cool ››› .


● The coolant expansion tank is easily recog-nisable because of the symbol on the cap››› Fig. 245.

Checking the engine coolant level

● When the engine is cold, check the coolantlevel using the side marking on the expan-sion tank ››› Fig. 244.

● If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top upwith coolant. When the engine is hot it maybe slightly above the marked area.

Topping up the engine coolant level

● Always protect your face, hands and armsfrom hot coolant and steam using a large,thick cloth over the coolant expansion tankcap.

● Remove the cap very carefully ››› .

● Only refill using new engine coolant ac-cording to SEAT specifications (››› page 276)››› .

● The engine coolant level should be be-tween the marks on the coolant expansiontank ››› Fig. 244. Do not exceed the top levelof the marked area ››› .

● Screw on the cap tightly.

● If, in the event of an emergency, you haveno coolant that is compliant to the requiredspecifications (››› page 276), do not use an-other type of additive. Instead, top up withdistilled water only ››› . Then re-establishthe correct proportion of the mixture with thecorrect additive as soon as possible››› page 276.

WARNING

Hot vapours and coolant can cause seriousburns.

● Never open the coolant expansion tank ifsteam or coolant is coming from the enginecompartment. Wait until you cannot see orhear any steam or coolant escaping.

● Always wait until the engine has complete-ly cooled before very carefully opening theexpansion tank cap. Contact with hot ele-ments of the engine can cause skin burns.

● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrewthe cap on the expansion tank when the en-gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray outunder pressure causing burns and serious in-jury.

– Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap an-ti-clockwise, gently pressing down on it.

– Always protect your face, hands and armsfrom hot coolant and steam using a large,thick cloth. »

277

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● When refilling liquids, avoid spilling themon parts of the engine and the exhaust sys-tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Underspecific circumstances, the ethylene glycolcan catch fire.

CAUTION

● Only fill with distilled water. Any other typeof water may lead to considerable rusting inthe engine due to its chemical components.This could consequently damage the engine.If you have not used distilled water but an-other type of water to top up the coolant, aspecialised workshop must immediately re-place all of the fluid in the engine coolingsystem.

● Only top up coolant to the top level of themarked area ››› Fig. 244. Otherwise the ex-cess coolant will be forced out of the coolingsystem when the engine is hot, causing dam-age.

● If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost, waitfor the engine to cool down completely beforeadding coolant. Extensive coolant loss is anindication of leaks in the engine cooling sys-tem. Have the engine cooling system inspec-ted immediately by a specialised workshop.Otherwise engine damage may occur.

● When refilling service liquids, ensure thatyou put the liquids into the right tank. Mak-ing a mistake when refilling could cause seri-ous malfunctions and damage the engine!

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

Fig. 246 In the engine compartment: brakefluid reservoir cap


In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbswater from the ambient air. If there is toomuch water in the brake fluid, the brake sys-tem could be damaged. In addition, the boil-ing point of the brake fluid is significantlylowered. When the brake fluid contains toomuch water and the brakes are subject toconsiderable forces, bubbles of water vapourcan form in the system. These bubbles cansignificantly reduce braking power, notablyincreasing braking distance, and could evenresult in the total failure of the brake system.Ensuring that the brake system is alwaysfunctioning correctly is essential for your own

safety and the safety of other road users››› .

Brake fluid specifications

SEAT have developed a special brake fluidoptimised for the brake systems of their vehi-cles. To ensure the optimum working of thebrake system, SEAT recommends the use ofbrake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14standard. If this brake fluid is not available oranother brake fluid is used for different rea-sons, use a brake fluid that complies with theUnited States standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 orthe German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4››› .

Brake fluids conforming to the standardVW 501 14, fulfil the American requirementsof the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and theGerman DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard.However, fluids that comply with the USFMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the GermanDIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard do not nec-essarily comply with the VW 501 14 stand-ard. Always check the information on thebrake fluid container and ensure that you areusing suitable brake fluid.

A suitable brake fluid can be obtained fromtechnical service centres.

278


Brake fluid level

The level of the brake fluid should always bebetween the MIN and MAX marks, or abovethe MIN mark ››› .

It is not always possible to check the level ofthe brake fluid, as in some models the en-gine components make it difficult to see thebrake fluid reservoir. If you cannot read theexact brake fluid level, consult a specialist.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when thevehicle is being used due to wear of thebrake pads and the automatic readjustmentof the brake.

Changing the brake fluid

The brake fluid should be changed in accord-ance with the instructions given in the Main-tenance Programme. Have the brake fluidchanged by a specialised workshop. SEATrecommends taking your car in for technicalservice. This means that only brake fluidcomplying with the required specificationswill be used.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake systemmay fail or braking power may be reduced.

● Check the brake system and the brake fluidlevel regularly!

● The brake fluid should be changed regular-ly in accordance with the instructions givenin the Maintenance Programme.

● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces, bub-bles of vapour form in the brake system.These bubbles can significantly reduce brak-ing power, notably increasing braking dis-tance, and could result in the total failure ofthe brake system.

● Only used brake fluid that conforms to theVW 501 14 standard, FMVSS 116 DOT 4standard or even the DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4standard. Other types of brake fluid could af-fect brake operation and reduce braking pow-er. Do not use a brake fluid if the containerdoes not specify compliance with theVW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 orDIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

● The replacement brake fluid must be new.

● Always ensure that you use suitable brakefluid. Do not use a brake fluid if the containerdoes not specify compliance with theVW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 orDIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous.

● To reduce the risk of poisoning, do not keepbrake fluid in drinks bottles/containers orsimilar. Other people could drink from theserecipients even if the contents are clearlymarked.

● Always keep brake fluid in the original con-tainer; keep it correctly sealed and out ofreach of children.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintworkimmediately.


Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

279

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind-screen washer reservoir

Fig. 247 In the engine compartment: wind-screen washer reservoir top


Check the level in the windscreen washertank regularly and top up as required.


● The washer reservoir is marked with thesymbol on the lid ››› Fig. 247.

● Check there is enough water in the reser-voir.

● To top up, mix water with a window cleanerrecommended by SEAT ››› . Please followthe instructions for use found on the packag-ing.

● In cold weather, a special antifreeze shouldalso be added to prevent the water fromfreezing ››› .

Filling amounts

The capacity of the tank is approximately 3 li-tres; in vehicles with a headlight washer sys-tem, it is approximately 7 litres.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen washerwater. A greasy layer may be formed on thewindscreen which will impair visibility.

● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec-ommended by SEAT.

● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION

● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. This couldlead to flocculation and may block the wind-screen washer jets.

● When topping up service fluids, make abso-lutely certain that you fill the fluids into thecorrect reservoirs. Using the wrong fluidscould cause serious malfunctions and enginedamage!

Vehicle battery

Introduction

The battery is a component of the vehicle'selectrical system.

Never work on the electrical system withoutfully understanding the operations required,the applicable safety standards and withoutthe correct tools ››› ! If required, have anywork carried out by a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech-nical service. Negligent work can cause seri-ous injury.

Location and number of batteries in the vehi-cle

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment.

Explanation of the warning indications onthe vehicle's battery

Symbol Meaning

Wear eye protection!

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Al-ways wear protective gloves and eye pro-tection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited.

280


Symbol Meaning

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batter-ies!

WARNING

Working on the vehicle battery and the elec-trical system can cause corrosion, fire andelectric shocks. Always read and take into ac-count the following warnings and safetystandards before carrying out any work:

● Before working on the battery, switch offthe engine, the ignition and all electrical de-vices then disconnect the negative connec-tion on the battery.

● Keep children away from acid and the bat-tery itself!

● Wear eye protection.

● Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Itcan burn skin and cause blindness. Whenhandling the battery, protect yourself fromsplashes of acids, above all your hands, armsand face.

● Do not smoke and never work close to pla-ces exposed to flames or sparks.

● Avoid sparks and electrostatic dischargeswhen working with cables and electrical devi-ces.

● Never short the battery terminals.

● Never use a damaged battery. It can ex-plode. Replace a damaged battery immedi-ately.

● Replaced damaged or frozen batteries assoon as possible. A flat battery can alsofreeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F).

● For vehicles with the battery in the luggagecompartment: Check that the battery gasventilation hose is securely attached.

CAUTION

● Never disconnect the battery if the ignitionis switched on or if the engine is running.This could damage the electrical system orelectronic components.

● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlightover a long period of time, as the intense ul-traviolet radiation can damage the batteryhousing.

● If the car is left standing for long periods,protect the battery from extreme cold temper-ature so that it does not “freeze up” and be-come damaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Faulty generator.

Contact a specialised workshop.Have the electrical system checked.Disconnect any unnecessary electri-cal devices. The generator does notcharge the battery while the vehicleis in motion.


WARNING




CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

281

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Checking the electrolyte level of thevehicle battery

Fig. 248 In the engine compartment: removethe lid from the vehicle's battery.

Fig. 249 In the engine compartment: lift offthe cover from the vehicle's battery.


The battery's electrolyte level should bechecked regularly in high-mileage vehicles,

in hot countries and in older batteries. Otherbatteries do not require maintenance.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 207) are equip-ped with a special battery labelled “AGM”.For technical reasons, it is not possible tocheck the electrolyte level of these batteries

Preparations

● Prepare the vehicle for work in the enginecompartment ››› page 268


Opening the battery cover

The battery covers are different depending onthe engine size of the vehicle:

● In the case of a lid: press the tab ››› Fig. 248A in the direction of the arrow and pull the

cover upwards.

● In the case of a cover: fold the cover to oneside to remove ››› Fig. 249.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

● Make sure there is sufficient lighting toclearly recognise the colours. Never useflames or flashing objects as a light source.

● Depending on the level of acid, the Magiceye on the top of the battery will change col-our.

Colour in-dicator

Necessary operations

Light yellowor Colourless

The electrolyte level of the vehicle's bat-tery is too low. Have the battery checkedand, where applicable, replaced by aspecialised workshop.

BlackThe electrolyte level of the vehicle's bat-tery is correct.

WARNING

Working with the vehicle battery involves arisk of corrosion, explosions or electricshock.

● Never tilt the vehicle battery. Battery acidcould spill out of the openings for the releaseof gases and cause corrosion damage.

● Never open the vehicle battery.

● If battery acid splashes on you, immediate-ly rinse your eyes and skin abundantly withwater for several minutes. Then seek medicalcare immediately.

● If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult adoctor immediately.

Charging, replacing and connecting ordisconnecting the battery

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries us-ing special technology have been installed

282


and they must be charged in a controlled en-vironment ››› . SEAT recommends takingyour car in for technical service.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility, thesize and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. SEATrecommends you have the battery replacedby a technical service.

Use only maintenance-free genuine batteriesconforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73Standards. These standards must be datedApril 2008 or later.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 207) are equip-ped with a special battery. Therefore, it mustonly be replaced with a battery of the samespecifications.

Disconnecting the vehicle's battery

If you must disconnect the battery from theelectrical system, please note the following:

● Switch off the ignition and all electricalequipment.

● The vehicle must be unlocked before dis-connecting the battery, otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

● First disconnect the negative cable andthen the positive ››› .

Connecting the vehicle's battery

● Before reconnecting the battery, switch offthe engine and all electrical devices.

● First reconnect the positive cable and thenthe negative ››› .

Different control lamps may light up afterconnecting the battery and switching the ig-nition on. They will be turned off after a shorttrip at a speed of between 15-20 km/h(10-12 mph). If the warning indicators remainlit, please visit a specialised workshop tohave the vehicle checked.

If the battery has been disconnected for along time, it is possible that the next servicedate is not displayed or calculated correctly››› page 100. Respect the maximum serviceintervals permitted ››› Booklet MaintenanceProgramme.

Vehicles with Keyless Access (››› page 115):if, after connecting the battery, the ignitioncannot be switched on, lock and unlock thevehicle from outside. Then try to switch onthe ignition again. If the ignition does notwork, seek professional assistance.

Automatically disconnecting devices

The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto-matically implements a range of measures toprevent the battery from discharging whenhigh demands are made on it:

● the idling speed is increased so that the al-ternator provides more electricity.

● where necessary, the power of the mostpowerful devices is reduced or even com-pletely disconnected.

● On starting the engine, the power supplyfrom the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga-rette lighter may be interrupted for a shorttime.

The on-board management program cannotalways prevent the battery from running flat.For example, if the ignition is left on for along period with the engine off or if the sidelights or parking lights are left on while thevehicle is stationary.

Why does the battery run flat?

● When stationary for a long time withoutstarting the engine, particularly if the ignitionis switched on.

● Use of electrical devices with the engineswitched off.

● If the auxiliary heater is running››› page 177. »

283

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

Incorrectly securing the battery or using thewrong battery can cause short-circuits, fireand serious injuries.

● Always use only maintenance free batteriesthat do not run flat alone and whose proper-ties, specifications and size correspond tothe standard battery. The specifications areindicated on the battery case.

WARNING

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.

● The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

● Never charge a frozen or recently thawedbattery. A flat battery can also freeze at tem-peratures close to 0°C (+32°F).

● Always replace a battery which has frozen.

● Battery cables not correctly connected maycause a short circuit. Reconnect first the posi-tive cable and then the negative cable.

CAUTION

● Never disconnect the battery if the ignitionis switched on or if the engine is running.This could damage the electrical system orelectronic components.

● Never plug accessories that supply current,such as solar panels or a battery charger, tothe 12-volt power sockets or the cigarette

lighter. This could damage the vehicle's elec-trical system.


● Dispose of the battery in an environment-friendly manner. Batteries contain toxic sub-stances such as sulphuric acid and lead.

● Battery acid can contaminate the environ-ment. If it has leaked use adequate care col-lecting it (gloves and protective glasses), anddispose of it correctly.

Wheels and tyres

Tyres

Introduction

The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standardwith anti-puncture technology tyres (Conti-Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak ofup to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with aprotective layer inside the tread.

The inclusion of this technology means thatthere is no type of spare wheel included inthe vehicle's equipment.

SEAT recommend that all work on tyres andwheels is carried out by a specialised work-shop. These workshops have the necessaryspecial tools and replacement parts, trainedpersonnel and facilities for disposing of theold tyres while respecting the environment.SEAT recommends taking your car in for tech-nical service.

WARNING

The vehicle cannot be totally controlled orbraked if the tyres (new or used) are worn ordamaged.

● Incorrect use of wheels and tyres couldmake driving more dangerous and result inserious accidents and damage.

284

Wheels and tyres

● All four wheels must be fitted with radialtyres of the same type, size (rollingcircumference) and the same tread pattern.

● New tyres do not give maximum grip andwill not have reached their maximum brakingcapacity to start with, and therefore needrunning in. To prevent accidents and majordamage, extreme caution should be taken forthe first 500 km (310 miles).

● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensurethey are maintained at the pressures indica-ted. If the tyre pressure is too low, they couldoverheat, resulting in tread detachment oreven burst tyres.

● Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut,cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving ondamaged or worn tyres could result in bursttyres, serious accidents or damage. Worn ordamaged tyres must be replaced immediate-ly.

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle.

● The effectiveness of driver and brake assistsystems also depends on the grip of thetyres.

● If you notice unusual vibration or if the ve-hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop thecar immediately and check the tyres andwheels for damage.

● To minimise the risk of losing control of thevehicle or causing a serious accident, neverundo the bolted joints of beadlock wheels.

● Never mount used tyres or wheels if you arenot sure of their previous history. They maybe damaged, although the damage is not im-mediately visible.

● Old tyres, even if they have never beenused, may lose air or burst unexpectedlywhile driving, resulting in serious accident ordamage. If tyres are over six years old, theyshould only be used in an emergency andwith extreme caution.

Note

● For technical reasons, it is not generallypossible to use the wheels from other vehi-cles. In some cases, this may also be true forthe same model of wheel. Please refer to thevehicle documentation or ask at a technicalservice.

Handling tyres and wheels

Fig. 250 Diagram for changing wheels

The tyres of a vehicle are the componentswhich are subjected to most stress and arethe most underestimated. Tyres are very im-portant, as the support offered by their nar-row surface is the only point of contact be-tween the vehicle and the road.

The service life of tyres is dependent on tyrepressure, driving style, the care they receiveand the correct fitting.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essentialpart of the vehicle's design. The tyres andrims approved by SEAT are specially matchedto the characteristics of the vehicle and ourcritical to good road holding and safe han-dling.

Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels

● If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the kerb.

● Inspect the tyres regularly for damage(punctures, cuts, cracks, dents).

● Remove any foreign bodies found on theoutside of the tyre tread and ensure that theyhave not passed through the wall of the tyre››› page 290.

● In addition, the instructions for tyre controlsystems should always be observed.

● Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon aspossible ››› page 290. »

285

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● Regularly check tyres for non-visible dam-age ››› page 290.

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle ››› page 291.

● Do not allow tyres to come into contact withaggressive substances, grease, oil, fuel orbrake fluid ››› .

● Lost valve caps should be replaced imme-diately.

Changing wheels

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 250. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to aspecialised workshop to have the tyreschanged.

Tyres over 6 years old

Tyres are subject to an ageing process as aresult of physical and chemical processes.This may affect their performance. Tyreswhich are stored for long periods of timewithout being used, harden and becomemore fragile than tyres which are in constantuse.

SEAT recommends that tyres over six yearsold are replaced with new tyres. This also ap-plies to tyres which appear to be in perfect

condition on the outside and which have atread depth within the values stipulated bythe Law ››› .

The date of manufacture, part of the tyreidentification number (TIN), indicates the ageof the tyre ››› page 291.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicatethe direction of rotation (left, right, forwards,backwards). This ensures you will be able tomount them correctly when you replacethem. When removed, the wheels and/ortyres should be stored in a cool, dry and pref-erably dark location. Do not place tyresmounted on the wheel in a vertical position.

Protect tyres not mounted on wheels fromdirt by storing them in suitable bags andstanding them on the ground on their tread.

WARNING

Aggressive fluids or substances could resultin visible or invisible damage with the conse-quent risks.

● Always ensure that tyres do not come intocontact with chemical products, oil, grease,fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive substan-ces.

WARNING

Old tyres, even if they have never been used,may lose air or burst unexpectedly while driv-ing, resulting in serious accident or damage.

● If tyres are over six years old, they shouldonly be used in an emergency and with ex-treme caution.


Old tyres must be disposed of by qualifiedpersonnel according to the laws in the coun-try concerned.

Wheels

The design of wheel bolts is matched to therims. If different rims are fitted, the correctwheel bolts with the right length and correct-ly shaped bolt heads must be used. This en-sures that wheels are fitted securely and thatthe brake system functions correctly››› page 84.

For technical reasons, it is not generally pos-sible to use the wheels from other vehicles.In some cases, this may also be true for thesame model of wheel.

The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are spe-cially matched to the characteristics of thevehicle and are critical to good road holdingand safe handling.

286

Wheels and tyres

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correcttorque ››› page 84.

Beadlock wheel rims

Beadlock wheel rims have various compo-nents. These are joined together by specialbolts using a special procedure. This ensuresgood performance, a better seal, improvedsafety and wheel run out. Therefore, wornrims should always be replaced and must on-ly be repaired in a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a technical service››› .

Wheel rims with bolted trims

Wheel rims may be fitted with interchangea-ble trim parts which are attached to the rimusing self-locking bolts. Worn trims shouldonly be replaced at a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a technical service››› .

WARNING

The use of worn or damaged wheel rims couldmake driving more dangerous and result inserious accidents and damage.

● Only wheel rims which have been approvedfor use with your vehicle should be used.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for damageand replace as required.

WARNING

If the bolted joints of wheel rims with boltedring trims are not correctly tightened or loos-ened, this could result in serious accident.

● Never loosen the bolted joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.

● Any work relating to wheel rims with boltedrims should be carried out at specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends taking your carin for technical service.

Note

A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted tofind out whether wheels or tyres of differentsizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can befitted, and to find out about the combinationsallowed between the front axle (axle 1) andthe rear axle (axle 2).

Replacement of wheel rims and newtyres

New tyres

● When tyres are new, drive with extremecaution for the first 500 km (310 miles), asall tyres need to be run in. Tyres which havenot been run in do not have such good gripor ››› braking capacity ››› .

● All four wheels must be fitted with radialtyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer-ence) and the same tread pattern.

● The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Replacing tyres

● Where possible, always replace bothwheels on an axle (both wheels on the frontaxle or both wheels on the rear axle) ››› .

● Old tyres should only be replaced by SEATapproved tyres for the vehicle in question,and in accordance with the maximum permit-ted size, diameter, load and speed capacity.

● If replacing tyres, make sure the new oneshave an emergency ride system (Conti-Seal/Run flat). Otherwise, we recommendcarrying a tyre mobility system.

● Never use tyres which are larger than SEATapproved tyres. If the tyres are too big, theymay knock or rub against the chassis or othercomponents, resulting in damage.

WARNING

New tyres do not give maximum grip and willnot have reached their maximum braking ca-pacity to start with, and therefore need run-ning in.

● To prevent accidents and major damage,extreme caution should be taken for the first500 km (310 miles). »

287

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

There should be adequate space between thetyres and the vehicle in accordance with thevehicle design. If this is not the case, thetyres may rub against parts of the runninggear, chassis or brake lines, leading to faultsin the brake system or to tread detachment,and the risk of burst tyres.

● The true tyre dimension should not begreater than the dimensions of tyres manu-factured and approved by SEAT and shouldnot rub against parts of the vehicle.

Note

● Although tyres may be shown as being thesame size, the true dimensions of differenttypes of tyre may vary with respect to thenominal size, or tread patterns may be differ-ent.

● If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT,you can be sure that the true tyre dimensionswill be correct for your vehicle. For other tyremodels, the tyre vendor should provide themanufacturer's certificate with the tyre, indi-cating that this type of tyre is suitable foryour vehicle. This certificate should alwaysbe carried with the vehicle.

Tyre pressure

Fig. 251 Position of tyre pressure specifica-tion plate

The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted atthe factory is shown on a label and is validfor summer and winter tyres. This label››› Fig. 251 is either on the driver door strut orinside the fuel tank flap.

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reducethe life of the tyres considerably and also im-pair the car's handling ››› . It is essential tomaintain the correct tyre pressures, especial-ly if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyrepressure causes premature wear and couldcause tyre blow-out.

The pressure should therefore be checked atleast once a month and before starting ajourney.

As a general rule, the pressures given are forcold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pres-sures are greater.

Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain therequired pressure. This could result in verylow tyre pressures which may lead to suddenblow-outs.

Checking tyre pressures

Tyre pressures should only be checked whenthe vehicle has not been driven for more thana few kilometres (miles) at low speeds in thepast three hours.

● The tyre pressures should be checked regu-larly, and only when the tyres are cold. Al-ways check all the tyres. Tyre pressuresshould be checked more often in colder re-gions, and only when the vehicle has notbeen driven recently. Always use a correctly-operating tyre gauge.

● Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried inthe vehicle.

● After checking the pressure, always replacethe valve caps, and where applicable, ob-serve the instructions given for adjusting thetyre control system ››› page 231.

288

Wheels and tyres

WARNING

If tyre pressures are too high or too low, thetyre may deflate or burst suddenly while driv-ing. This could result in a serious accident.

● If the tyre pressure is too low, they couldoverheat, resulting in tread detachment oreven burst tyres.

● When driving at high speeds and/or fullyloaded, the tyre could suddenly overheat,burst or be subject to tread detachment, withthe resultant loss of control of the vehicle.

● Tyre pressures which are too high or toolow reduce the service life of the tyre, affect-ing the vehicle's performance.

● Tyre pressures should be checked regularly,at least once a month and before long jour-neys.

● Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to thevehicle load.

● Never deflate excess pressure from hottyres.

CAUTION

● Take care not to tilt the manometer whenplacing it on the valve. Otherwise, the valvemay be damaged.

● If tyre valves are not protected by caps, or ifthe caps are not screwed on correctly, theymay become damaged. Check that the capsare identical to the standard caps and havebeen correctly tightened.


Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Note

When checking tyre pressures, please ob-serve the instructions for the tyre control sys-tem ››› page 231.

Wear indicator depth profile

Fig. 252 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators

Tread depth

Certain driving conditions require a deepertread, as well as needing the tread to be ap-proximately the same on the front and reartyres. This is particularly important whendriving in winter, in cold temperatures and onwet roads ››› .

The minimum tread depth required by law inthe majority of cases is 1.6 mm (1/16 of aninch), measured in the tread grooves next tothe tread wear indicators. Observe legal re-quirements in each country.

Winter tyres lose much of their performancewhen their tread has worn to 4 mm(5/32 inch).

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Wear indicators on the tyre

The original tyres on your vehicle have1.6 mm (1/16 inch) high ››› Fig. 252 treadwear indicators running across the tread. Anumber of these indicators are equallyspaced around the tyre tread. Certain markson the tyre walls (e.g. the letters “TWI” orother symbols) indicate the position of thewear indicators.

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre isworn. They must always be replaced beforethe tyre tread has worn to the level of the in-dicator.

WARNING

Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, andmay lead to loss of control of the vehicle withserious consequences. »

289

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● Tyres must be replaced before the wear in-dicators are at the same level as the treadpattern.

● Worn tyres have significantly reduced grip,especially on wet surfaces, increasing therisk of “aquaplaning”.

● Worn tyres make control of the vehiclemore difficult in normal or difficult drivingconditions, increasing the braking distanceand the risk of skidding.

Tyre damage

Damage to wheels and tyres is often invisibleto the naked eye. If you notice unusual vibra-tion or the car pulling to one side, this mayindicate that one of the tyres is damaged››› .

● Slow down immediately if you think youhave a damaged wheel.

● Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

● If tyres are worn, stop driving and seekqualified assistance.

● If there is no visible exterior damage, driveslowly and carefully to the nearest special-ised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Foreign bodies in the tyre

● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!

● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 85. Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT deal-ership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre treadwraps around the foreign body and provision-ally seals the tyre.

Tyre wear

The wear of tyres depends on a number offactors, for example:

● Driving style.

● Unbalanced wheels.

● Running gear settings.

Driving style: Driving round bends quickly orsudden acceleration or braking speed accel-erates tyre wear. When the driving style isnormal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have therunning gear settings checked at a special-ised workshop.

Wheel run-out: The wheels on new vehiclesare balanced. However, certain circumstan-ces may lead to imbalance (run-out), which isdetected as vibrations in the steering wheel.Run-out leads to wear of the steering andsuspension. In the event of run out, thewheels should be balanced again. When anew wheel is fitted, it should be balancedagain.

Running gear settings: an incorrectly posi-tioned running gear increases the wear oftyres and affects your safety while driving. Iftyres wear too quickly, have the wheel align-ment checked at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

If you notice unusual vibration or the car pullsto one side while driving, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged.

● Reduce speed immediately and stop, whileobserving the highway code.

● Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

● Never carry on driving on worn tyres orwheels. Request qualified assistance immedi-ately.

● If there is no visible exterior damage, driveslowly and carefully to the nearest special-ised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

290

Wheels and tyres

Tyre code

Fig. 253 Universal code on tyres

Radial

Rim diameter code

Load index & speed rating

DOT tyre identification number

Severe snow conditions

Tyre ply composition and materials used

Max. load rating

Treadwear, traction and temperaturegrades

Max. permissible inflation pressure

Passenger car tyre

Nominal width of tyre in millimetres

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

Tyre code (example): Meaning

Make, logotype Manufacturer

Product name Name of tyre assigned by manufac-turer.

P215 /55 R 16

Size:

P Passenger vehicle code.

215Nominal width betweenwalls, in mm.

55 Height/width ratio in %

RTyre type (R indicates "ra-dial").

16 Rim diameter in inches

91 V Load index ››› page 292 and speedrating ››› page 292.

XL Reinforced tyres (“Reinforced”).

M+S or M/S Winter tyres (mud and snow tyres)››› page 292.

SSR or DSST,Eufonia, RFT,ROF, RSC, ZP,Conti-Seal

Specific manufacturer codes for run-flat tyres.

RADIALTUBELESS

Radial tyre without inner tube.

12 Tyre code (example): Meaning

E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies withinternational legislation followed bya number denoting the countrygranting the authorisation. The au-thorisation number ( several digits)is shown below.

DOT BT RA TY51709

Tyre identification number (TINa),may be only on interior wall of wheel)and date of manufacture:

DOT The tyre complies with thelegal requirements of theUS Department of Trans-port, responsible for tyresafety regulations.

BT Place of manufacturecode.

RA Information about manu-facturer and tyre size.

TY5 Manufacturer's tyre speci-fications.

1709 Date of manufacture:Week 17 of 2009.

TWI This identifies the position of theTread Wear Indicator ››› page 289.

MAX LOAD615 KG(1356 LBS)

US load rating, indicating maximumpermitted load per tyre.

MAX INFLATION350 KPA(51 PSI)

US limit, indicating maximum permit-ted tyre pressure. »

291

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Tyre code (example): Meaning

SIDEWALL 1 PLYRAYON

Information about tyre wall compo-nents:1 layer of rayon (artificial silk).

TREAD 4 PLIES1 RAYON +2 STEEL +1 NYLON

Information about tread compo-nents:In the example, there are 4 layers be-low the tread: 1 layer of rayon (artifi-cial silk), 2 layers of steel reinforce-ment and 1 layer of nylon.

Information for the end consumer concerning the com-parative values of the established base tyres (standar-dised test procedures):

TREADWEAR280

Relative service life of the tyre, withrespect to specific US standard test.

TRACTION AA Braking capacity of tyre on wet sur-face (AA, A, B or C).

TEMPERATURE A Tyre temperature resistance at highertest speeds (A, B or C).

If there are different letters, they are specific codes ofthe tyre manufacturer or specific national codes.

a) The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number.

Tyres with directional tread patterns

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when rotatingin only one direction. An arrow on the tyresidewall indicates the direction of rotation ontyres with directional tread. Always observethe direction of rotation indicated whenmounting the wheel. This guarantees opti-

mum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning,grip, noise and wear.

Tyre load rating

The load rating code indicates the maximumload in kilogrammes each wheel can carry(load capacity).

615 kg (1,356 pounds)

650 kg (1,433 pounds)

690 kg (1,521 pounds)

730 kg (1,609 pounds)

775 kg (1,709 pounds)

Speed rating

The speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 200 km/h (124 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

91

93

95

97

99

P

Q

R

S

T

U

H

V

Z

W

Y

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

Winter service

Winter tyres*

In winter conditions winter tyres will consid-erably improve the vehicle's handling. Thedesign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. Winter tyres also improve the vehi-cle braking performance, reducing the brak-ing distance in winter weather. SEAT recom-mend that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicleat temperatures below +7°C (+45°F).

The performance of winter tyres is much re-duced if the tyre tread is worn below 4 mm(1/16 inch). The age of the tyre is anotherfactor affecting performance, regardless ofthe depth of the tyre tread.

Please observe the following when usingwinter tyres:

● Observe legal requirements in each coun-try.

● Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

● Only use winter tyres in wintery weatherconditions.

292

Wheels and tyres

● Only use winter tyres of the size authorisedfor the vehicle.

● Only use radial winter tyres of the sametype, size (rolling circumference) and treadpattern.

● Adjust speeds to within the limits indicated(code letter on tyre) ››› .

Speed limit

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 292.

In some vehicles, it is possible to set a speedwarning in the MFD (multifunctiondisplay) menu on the instrument panel››› page 26.

If you use V-rated tyres the speed limits andtyre pressure will be determined by enginesize. Please ask your technical service centrefor further information on the maximum per-mitted speed and the required pressures forthe tyres.

All-wheel drive*

Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your car willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,SEAT still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres should be fitted on all fourwheels when winter road conditions are ex-pected, mainly because this will give a betterbraking response.

Please observe all instructions and warningswhen using snow chains ››› page 49.

WARNING

Although winter tyres help to make drivingsafer in the winter, you should not take un-necessary risks.


● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of wintertyre fitted on your vehicle.


When winter is over, change back to summertyres when you have the time. In tempera-tures above +7°C (+45°F), performance willbe improved if summer tyres are used. Fuelconsumption, wear and noises while drivingwill all be reduced.

Note

● If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre controlsystem, this should be “reprogrammed”whenever a tyre is changed ››› page 233.

● Please ask at a technical service centre forinformation about the permitted sizes forwinter tyres.

293

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Technical data

Technical features

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-ded in the Maintenance Programme or thevehicle registration documents shows whichengine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi-cations section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PSPferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZCetane number, indication of the dieselcombustion power.

RONResearch octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 254 Vehicle identification number.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassisnumber) can be read from outside the vehicle

through a viewer in the windscreen››› Fig. 254. This viewer is located in the lowerpart of the windscreen. The vehicle identifica-tion number (chassis number) is also stam-ped on the right water drain channel. The wa-ter drain channel is located between the sus-pension tower and the wing. Open the bon-net to read the vehicle identification number ››› page 268.

Vehicle data plate

The vehicle data plate is attached to the lug-gage compartment, and contains the follow-ing information:

● Vehicle identification number (chassisnumber).

● Vehicle type, engine power, gearbox type.

● Engine and gearbox code, paint number,interior equipment.

● Optional extras, PR numbers.

These data are also provided in the Mainte-nance Programme.

Type plate

The type plate is visible when the driver dooris opened, on the lower part of the strut. Ve-hicles for certain export countries do nothave a type plate.

The manufacturer's type plate contains thefollowing data:

294

Technical features

● Gross vehicle weight

● Maximum authorised weight of vehicle andtrailer

● Maximum gross front axle weight

● Maximum rear axle weight

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions dependon the equipment/features of each individualvehicle, as well as on the driving style, roadconditions, traffic conditions, environmentalconditions, load or number of passengers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values can dif-fer from those calculated in the current Euro-pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittingsor retro-fitting accessories will increase theweight of the vehicle ››› .

WARNING

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Always adjust your speed and drivingstyle to suit road conditions and require-ments.

● Never exceed the gross axle weight ratingor the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-missible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving characteris-tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac-cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-

proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be differentin other countries. All data in the official vehi-cle documentation takes precedence overthese data at all times ››› .

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on theball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-ceed 100 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor, if the drawbarload is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING

● For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80km/h (50 mph) limit. This is also valid incountries where higher speeds are permitted.

● Never exceed the maximum trailer weightsor the drawbar load. If the permissible axle »

295

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

load or the permissible total weight is excee-ded, the driving characteristics of the vehiclemay change, leading to accidents, injuriesand damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheelbolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.The tyre pressure values given there are forcold tyres. The slightly raised pressures ofwarm tyres must not be reduced. ›››

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summertyres.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the frontwheels.

Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torque

wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 140 Nm.

WARNING

● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or toolow, there is an increased danger of accidents- particularly at high speeds.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts andthreads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your TechnicalService for information about appropriatewheel, tyre and snow chain size.

296

Technical features

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON

Manual Automatic

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9

Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,300 2,420 2,310 2,430

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,703 1,755 1,717 1,768

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,190 1,190 1,200 1,200

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,160 1,280 1,160 1,280

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,000 2,000


297

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Petrol engine 2.0 162 kW (220 PS)


162 (220)/4,500-6,200 350/1,500-4,400 4/1,984 Super 95 RON

Automatic

5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 226 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.4


Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,360 2,490

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,790 1,838

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,250 1,250

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,160 1,290

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750


Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 2,200

298

Technical features

Diesel engine 2.0 85 kW (115 PS)


85 (115)/3,500 280/1,750-3,000 4/1,968Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 184 (VI)



Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,390 2,520

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,772 1,822

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,260 1,260

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,180 1,310

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750



299

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data



110 (150)/3,500 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Manual Automatic All-wheel drive

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI) 198 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3 7.1


Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,390 2,520 2,410 2,540 2,560 2,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,772 1,882 1,793 1,843 1,891 1,952

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,260 1,260 1,280 1,280 1,320 1,320

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,180 1,310 1,180 1,310 1,290 1,320

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100 100 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (in kg) 2,300 2,400 2,300 2,400 2,400

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (in kg) 2,200 2,200 2,400

300

Technical features



135 (184)/3,500-4,000 380/1,750-3,000 4/1,968Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Manual Automatic Automatic all-wheel drive

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VII)



Maximum authorised weight (in kg) 2,400 2,550 2,400 2,550 2,560 2,590

Weight in running order (with driver) (in kg) 1,800 1,841 1,804 1,845 1,923 1,974

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (en kg) 1,290 1,290 1,290 1,290 1,320 1,320

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (en kg) 1,160 1,310 1,160 1,310 1,290 1,320

Permitted roof load (in kg) 100 100 100

Maximum weight trailer without brakes (in kg) 750 750 750



301

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 255 Dimensions

ALHAMBRA

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 968/966

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,919

D Length (mm) 4,854

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,569/1,617

G Width (mm) 1,904

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,720

Turning radius (m) 11.9

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

302

Index

Index

AAbroad

extended stay abroad with your vehicle . . . . . 260sale of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

ABSsee Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Acoustic alarm

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32seatbelt unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Adaptive headlightsdynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

AdBluecontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266minimum quantity for a refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267tank filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Additional heatersee "Auxiliary heater" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Adjustingfolding the backrest of the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 142seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57seat with position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Adjusting the head restraintrear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Adjusting the head restraintsrear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Adjusting the seatsfront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Air-conditioning

malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Airbags

see Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 68

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 71functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70head-protection airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18locking the vehicle after deployment . . . . . . . 113repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 73vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 173, 174controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 174electronic manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 174indirect ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

All-wheel drivesnow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Anodized surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 260Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Anti-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 85Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 85Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

false alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Anti-theft alarm systemanti-tow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118vehicle interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Anti-tow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Anti-trap function

panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 276Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170ASR

see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204see Braking assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205see also Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Assistance call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Assistance systems

electronic differential lock system (EDS) . . . . 204electronic drive torque management (XDS) . . 204launch-Control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

303

Index

tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Assist systems

adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross traf-

fic alert (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 230lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211parking assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 209rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215rear cross traffic alert (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207start assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206traction control when accelerating (ASR) . . .204, 205traffic signal detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Automatic car wash

switching Auto Hold off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207switching the start assist off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35ignition key removal lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

automatic off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179remote control: replacing the battery . . . . . . . 179special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Auxiliary heater remote controlauxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

BBAS

see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Battery

changing in the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Belt tension device

service and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Bicycle carrier

fitting on the tow hitch ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 223malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Boot hatchemergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Brake

brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190changing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189running in new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 203Brake system

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Braking

brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203BSD

see Blind spot detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Bulb malfunction

see Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

CCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

windshield wiper fluid tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

304

Index

Card compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Caring for paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Caring for the vehicle

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219see cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 168Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Central locking systemafter airbag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Changing a bulb

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 84

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Changing gearcontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Changing windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Checking

tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

deactivating the passenger front airbag . . . . . . 18integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78in the passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22on rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 75securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 75weight categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75disabling the front passenger front airbag . . . . 73

Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256folding the rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258textile covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250washing the vehicle with high pressure clean-

ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Cleaning the vehiclehigh pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 173Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 123panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 83Combined weight rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Compartment for (sun)glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Compartments

centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165front central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Connectors

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Control and warning lamps

ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200engine oil sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

305

Index

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187for the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281indication of break pad wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128locking the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 105rear cross traffic alert (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281windscreen washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Control of functionrain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Controls on the steering wheeloperating the audio system and telephone . . 106

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Convenience closingwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Convenience functionsreprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Convenience openingwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Convenient entry function for the third row ofseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Cooling systemchecking the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274topping up with coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Cornering lightssee "Static cornering lights" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Counter steering assistance system . . . . . . . . . . 182Crossing through water

salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Cruise Control System (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

DDangers of not using a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Data registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Data storage during the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129DCC

see Dynamic chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230De-icing the locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Diagnostics connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Diesel

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Differential locksee Braking assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Directional tread pattern

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Disconnecting devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Disconnecting the passenger front airbag . . . . . . 18Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 101

Disposalbelt tension device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 8opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Drink holder

central console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Driving

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195cross country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263fuel level too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240undercarriage guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Driving abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Driving in winterfuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

306

Index

tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288windscreen washer bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Driving tips

for a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Driving with a trailer

extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Dynamic chassis control (DCC)

control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Dynamic Chassis Control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203EDS

see Braking assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Electrical devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 181, 239Electrical socket

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Electric child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Electric sliding door

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Electric sliding doors

rollback anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

see Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Electronic differential lock system (EDS) . . . . . . 204Electronic drive torque management (XDS) . . . . 204Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 50extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13passenger side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Emergency unlockingboot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Emergency unlocking the boot hatchboot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Emission control systemcontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18212 volt power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186pre-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 185starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . . . 184stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 268

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 280brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 278coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 274engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 271, 274opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 41, 280

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 277control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 276G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 276specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 276tank filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275topping-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 271

checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

307

Index

Environmentenvironmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Environmentalecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244ESC

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Exterior mirrors

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Exterior rear view mirrorscontrol of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139folding the rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6Extinguisher

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

FFabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Fault

dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 231panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 210rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Fault memoryconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Filling capacitiesAdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 263Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82First-aid kit

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Fitting

tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Folding down rear seats

load space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Folding the backrest of the front passenger seat 148Folding wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Front seatmanual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Front wiper bladeschange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 264diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Fuel consumptionwhy does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 201

Fuel gaugecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Function controltow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 90fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90identification using colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

GGearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 193changing gears manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34putting the vehicle in gear (automatic gear-

box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193putting the vehicle in gear (manual gearbox) 193Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34General instrument panel

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99General overview of the engine compartment . . 271Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

HHand brake

see Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 132Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 63

308

Index

Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Headlights

adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133headlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Head restraintassembly and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 142

Headrestsadjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 142assembly and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Heat and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Heating and air conditioning

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Hitch ball

electric release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Hubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

IIdentifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

see Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

removal lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Indication on display

Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Information call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 100

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 105display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 100, 101general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 105

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80seat belt routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Interior door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Interior view

left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 82, 84

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

KKeyless Access

keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 115starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Keyless Access locking and ignition systemsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Keyscontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 114vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

LLabels and plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221when is it necessary to disconnect it? . . . . . . . 221

Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Lift platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 128

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . 130coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

309

Index

interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131light controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133lighting of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Load compartment in the luggage compartmentsee Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 152

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 152driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Loading the vehiclefastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151vehicle loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Loads on the axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Locking and unlocking

electric panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Locking the doors manually if central lockingfails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 122, 152

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151electronic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123electronic opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153folding down rear seats to create load space . 153luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 134net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155see also Loading the luggage compartment . 152

Luggage compartment baggage net . . . . . . . . . . 161Luggage compartment hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Lumbar massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

MMain beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Main panel

turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 129Malfunction

air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 246Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Mobile telephoneuse without an exterior aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Mobile tow hitch ballfitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Motor oil

oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

NNet

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Noise

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Noises

auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Notes for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

OOctane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Odometer

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

310

Index

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119electric panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Operating fault

immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Overview

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

PPaintwork

code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 126

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Park assist systemautomatic stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212leaving the parking space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

preparing to park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213switching on or off (leaving the parking

space) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214switching on or off (parking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 190Parking assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 211Parking brake

automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189disengaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 208fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210with towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 209Passenger front airbag

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 60Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Portable waste bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Power brake system

anti-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Power sockets

12 volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Pre-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Protection of vehicle undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . 255Puncture

action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Pushing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

RRadio-operated remote control

see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Radio reception

antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Rails and attachment element systembaggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

control of function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

lift platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Rear Assistinstructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Rear cross traffic alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Rear cross traffic alert (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 226

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Rear lid

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Rear view mirrors

adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Recycled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

311

Index

Refuellingcontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Remote control keyunlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 261airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Replacement

parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Replacing bulbs

see Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Reprogramming control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Roll-back function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Rollback anti-trap function

electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

fastening the supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161RTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

see Rear cross traffic alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Run-flat tyres

codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Run-in

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Running inbrake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

SSafe

driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 187Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74disconnecting the passenger front airbag . . . . 18Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Safety instructions

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 75Sale of vehicle

in other countries / continents . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261vend-of-life vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Seatconvenient entry function for the third row of

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147electric front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14folding down rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153folding the backrest of the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141seat with position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 64automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67belt height adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Seatbeltscleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Seat beltsprotective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65twisted belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62with two buckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Seat belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Seat belt with two buckles

fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66twisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66unfastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144convenient entry function for the third row of

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147folding the backrest of the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148lumbar massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Seat upholstery

cleaning and maintenance of natural leather . 258synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Selective Catalytic Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265312

Index

Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Service fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228

connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121manually opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 120opening and closing electrically . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 296all-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Spare fuel canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Specifications

combined weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Stabilising the vehicle and trailer combination . 241Start-Stop function

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Start-Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Start assist

see Start assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Starting assistance

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53positive pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Steeringcontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181counter steering assistance system . . . . . . . . 182electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182tendency to pull to one side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Steering wheeladjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Storage

compartment for (sun)glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Storage compartment

other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Storage compartment in the roof console . . . . . 164Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164portable waste bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167rear footwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Sun blindanti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Sun blindsrear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Switching lights off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Switching lights on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . 32, 105Systems

tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

TTechnical data

engine oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Technical detailscapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280loads on the axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Technical features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Technical specifications

dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Telephone management

three button unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47TIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 87Tow hitch

electric release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Towingblind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 210

313

Index

special Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 87, 182

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Traction control (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 205Traffic signal detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240electrically releasing the hitch ball . . . . . . . . . 236electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238fitting a tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239hitch ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239rear LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 238rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 238stabilising the vehicle and trailer combina-

tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241trailer cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 238trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242wing mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Trailer cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 238Trailer weight

permitted maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Transportfolding the backrest of the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Transportation

baggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Transportingdriving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158vehicle loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Transporting objectsroof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Tyre control systems

tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Tyre load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86more than one damaged tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Tyre Mobility Setinflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Tyre mobility systemcases where it should not be used . . . . . . . . . . 85check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 233control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyre repair kit

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Tyres

avoiding damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291deterioration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290errors in wheel alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290foreign bodies in the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287old . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287run-flat tyre codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291run-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286technical details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291tyre code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291tyre identification number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 291tyre load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292tyre pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 292tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290valve caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

314

Index

wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289wheel balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . 292Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 290

UUnfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Unfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Upholstery cleaningtextile covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Upholstery: cleaningupholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 257

USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108USB/AUX-IN Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

VValve caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Vehicle

chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 280acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51automatically disconnecting devices . . . . . . . 283charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282checking the battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . 282connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 184disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282positive terminal for starting assistance . . . . . . 52preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250airbag modules (dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259anodized surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254antenna incorporated in window . . . . . . . . . . . 260chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254cleaning wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259de-icing the door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 255engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259protection of vehicle undercarriage . . . . . . . . 255rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251vehicle paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Vehicle care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Vehicle code

vehicle data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Vehicle data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Vehicle interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Vehicle key set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 82

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Vehicle undercarriage guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Vehicle's battery

running flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Vibrations

steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

WWarning and control lamp

cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 132Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 212special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 296

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 83, 84caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Wheel load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Wheel rims

beadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287bolted trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 286, 296changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 84

315

Index

changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45hubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Wheels and tyresspeed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Wheel trimhubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Windowsautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125automatic raising/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 87Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 135Windscreen washer fluid

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Windscreen washer water

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 136window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Wing mirrorsdriving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Winteradditional heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Winter conditionsdiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Winter drivingdriving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Winter operationheadlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 136salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Winter tyresall-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

XXDS

see Brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

316

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALHAMBRA range, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this man-ual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive ad-vertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function-alities better. It does not replace the instruc-tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

Audiovisual material on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.


Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

OWNER’S MANUAL

Alhambra

7N5012720BG

Ingl

és 7

N50

1272

0BG

(11

.16)

Alh

ambr

a I

nglé

s (

11.1

6)

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

owner’s manual - seat · owner’s manual alhambra 7n5012720bg inglés 7n5012720bg (11.16)...

Documents